WEB ED IT ION

OWNER'S MANUAL

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS.We trust that you will enjoy many years of safedriving in your Volvo, an automobile designedwith your safety and comfort in mind. We encour-age you to familiarize yourself with the equipmentdescriptions and operating instructions in thismanual.

We also urge you and your passengers to wearseat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle.And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if

you may be affected by alcohol, medication orany impairment that could hinder your ability todrive.

Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed-eral safety and emission standards. If you haveany questions regarding your vehicle, please con-tact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contact-ing Volvo" for information on getting in touch withVolvo in the United States and Canada.

Contents

2

01

01 IntroductionOn-board owner's manual........................ 11Owner's information.................................. 13Contacting Volvo....................................... 13About this manual..................................... 14Change of ownership................................ 18Crash event data....................................... 18Volvo Structural Parts Statement.............. 19Information on the Internet....................... 20Volvo ID..................................................... 21Open Source Software Notice.................. 21Volvo and the environment....................... 22Important warnings................................... 23Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance.......... 24Technician certification............................. 24 02

02 SafetyOccupant safety........................................ 26Recall information..................................... 26Reporting safety defects........................... 27Seat belts – general.................................. 28Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling.............. 29Seat belt reminder..................................... 30Seat belts – pregnancy............................. 30Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..... 31Front airbags............................................. 32Occupant Weight Sensor.......................... 36Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 39Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 41Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 42Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 44Crash mode – general information............ 44Crash mode – starting the vehicle............ 45Crash mode – moving the vehicle............. 45Child safety............................................... 46Child restraints.......................................... 47Infant seats............................................... 49Convertible seats...................................... 51Booster cushions...................................... 54ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. 55

02

Top tether anchors.................................... 56Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation................................................ 57Integrated booster cushion – using.......... 59Integrated booster cushion – stowing...... 60Child safety locks...................................... 61

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

03

03 Instruments and controlsInstrument overview ................................. 64Information displays – introduction........... 68Eco Guide* and Power Meter*.................. 71Information displays – indicator symbols. 72Information displays – warning symbols... 74My Car – introduction............................... 76Information displays – ambient tempera-ture sensor................................................ 77Information displays – trip odometer andclock......................................................... 78Inserting/removing remote key................. 78Ignition modes.......................................... 79Front seats................................................ 80Front seats – folding backrest*................. 81Front seats – power seat.......................... 81Key memory – power driver's seat* anddoor mirrors.............................................. 83Rear seats – head restraints..................... 84Rear seats – folding backrest................... 86Steering wheel.......................................... 87Electrically heated* steering wheel........... 88Lighting panel........................................... 89High/low beam headlights........................ 90Active high beams (AHB)*......................... 90

03

Tunnel detection (models with the rainsensor* only)............................................. 92Active Bending Lights (ABL)*.................... 92Auxiliary lights*.......................................... 93Instrument and "theater" lighting.............. 93Parking lights............................................ 93Rear fog lights........................................... 94Hazard warning flashers........................... 94Turn signals............................................... 95Front interior lighting................................. 96Rear interior lighting.................................. 97Home safe lighting.................................... 97Approach lighting...................................... 97Windshield wipers..................................... 98Rain sensor*.............................................. 98Windshield washer.................................... 99Tailgate wiper/washer............................. 100Power windows....................................... 100Power door mirrors................................. 102Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/retraction................................................. 103Heated windshield*, rear window anddoor mirror defrosters............................. 104Interior rearview mirror............................ 104

03

Digital compass*..................................... 105Panoramic roof* – introduction............... 106Panoramic roof* – operation................... 107

HomeLink® Wireless Control System* –introduction............................................. 109

HomeLink® Wireless Control System* –programming........................................... 110Volvo Sensus.......................................... 112Information display – menu controls....... 113Information display – menu overview..... 114Information display – messages............. 114Trip computer – introduction ................. 115Trip computer – functions, analog instru-ment panel.............................................. 117Trip computer – functions, digital instru-ment panel.............................................. 120Trip computer – Supplementary informa-tion.......................................................... 122Trip computer – Trip statistics................ 123

Contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04

04 ClimateClimate – general information................. 125Climate – sensors................................... 125Air quality................................................ 126Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*.......... 126Climate – menu settings......................... 127Air distribution – general......................... 127Electronic climate control (ECC)............. 129Heated seats........................................... 130Temperature and blower control............ 131Automatic climate control....................... 131Air conditioning....................................... 132Max. defroster and electrically heatedwindshield*.............................................. 132Air distribution – function........................ 133Air distribution – recirculation................. 134Air distribution – table............................. 135

05

05 Loading and storageStorage spaces....................................... 138Tunnel console........................................ 140Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets........... 140Glove compartment................................ 141Vanity mirror............................................ 14112-volt socket in the cargo area*............ 141Loading – general................................... 142Loading – roof load carriers.................... 142Load anchoring eyelets........................... 143Grocery bag holder................................. 144Cargo net – general information............. 144Cargo net – mounting/removing............. 145Cargo area cover.................................... 147Steel cargo grid....................................... 147 06

06 Locks and alarmRemote key and key blade..................... 150Remote key – loss................................... 150Key memory............................................ 151Locking/unlocking confirmation.............. 151Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...................... 152Remote key – functions.......................... 153Remote key – range................................ 154Detachable key blade – general informa-tion.......................................................... 155Detachable key blade – detaching/rein-serting..................................................... 155Detachable key blade – unlocking.......... 156Private locking........................................ 156Remote key – replacing the battery........ 157Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking.......... 159Keyless drive* – unlocking with keyblade....................................................... 160Keyless drive* – key memory.................. 160Keyless drive* – messages..................... 161Keyless drive* – antenna locations......... 162Locking/unlocking – from the outside..... 163Manual locking........................................ 164Locking/unlocking – from inside............. 164Locking/unlocking – glove compartment 165

Contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

06

Locking/unlocking – tailgate................... 166Power tailgate – automatic opening/clos-ing........................................................... 167Power tailgate – programming................ 168Power tailgate – interruption................... 168Power tailgate – manual opening/closing 169Alarm – general information.................... 169Alarm indicator........................................ 170Alarm – arming/disarming....................... 170Alarm signal............................................ 171Alarm – turning off................................... 171Alarm-related functions........................... 171 07

07 Driver supportActive chassis* (Four C).......................... 174Stability system – introduction................ 174Stability system – operation.................... 175Stability system – symbols and mes-sages....................................................... 177Adjustable steering force*....................... 179Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-tion.......................................................... 179Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation 180Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations 180Cruise control (CC) – introduction.......... 181Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set-ting speed............................................... 181Toggling between ACC and CC (stand-ard Cruise Control).................................. 183Cruise control (CC) – deactivating.......... 183Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction... 184Adaptive Cruise Control – function......... 185Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging....... 187Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed 188Adaptive Cruise Control – setting timeinterval..................................................... 189Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating.. 189Adaptive Cruise Control – passinganother vehicle........................................ 191

07

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – QueueAssist...................................................... 191Radar sensor........................................... 193Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations...... 193Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols andmessages................................................ 195Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshoot-ing........................................................... 197Distance Alert – introduction................... 198Distance Alert – operation....................... 198Distance Alert – limitations...................... 199Distance Alert – symbols and messages 201City Safety – introduction........................ 202City Safety – function.............................. 203City Safety – operation............................ 204City Safety – limitations.......................... 204City Safety – troubleshooting.................. 205City Safety – symbols and messages..... 207City Safety – Laser sensor...................... 208Collision warning – introduction.............. 209Collision warning* – function................... 211Collision warning* – operation................ 212Collision warning* – Cyclist detection..... 213Collision warning* – Pedestrian detec-tion.......................................................... 214

Contents

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07

Collision warning* – limitations............... 215The camera’s limitations......................... 217Collision warning – troubleshooting........ 218Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages....................................................... 220Driver Alert System................................. 222Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction 222Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation.... 223Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function...... 223Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations... 224Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols andmessages................................................ 225Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction.................................................... 227Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-tion.......................................................... 227Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-tions........................................................ 229Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – sym-bols and messages................................. 230Park assist – introduction....................... 232Park assist – function.............................. 232Park assist – operation........................... 234Park assist – limitations.......................... 235Park assist – troubleshooting.................. 236

07

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-duction.................................................... 236Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – func-tion.......................................................... 237Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-tion.......................................................... 237Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – guidingand marker lines...................................... 239Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-tions........................................................ 240BLIS* – introduction................................ 240BLIS* – function...................................... 241BLIS* – operation.................................... 242BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)............. 243BLIS* – limitations................................... 244BLIS* – messages................................... 245 08

08 Starting and drivingStarting the engine.................................. 247Switching off the engine......................... 249Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduc-tion.......................................................... 249Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting theengine..................................................... 250Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switchingoff the engine.......................................... 250Jump starting.......................................... 251Transmission – general information........ 252Transmission – positions........................ 252Transmission – Geartronic...................... 254Transmission – shiftlock override........... 256Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)......... 257Start/Stop – introduction........................ 257Start/Stop – function............................... 257Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions......... 258Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions......... 259Start/Stop – settings............................... 260Start/Stop – symbols and messages...... 261ECO*....................................................... 262All Wheel Drive (AWD)............................. 264Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduc-tion.......................................................... 264Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation.. 265

Contents

7

08

Brakes – general..................................... 266Brakes – symbols ................................... 268Anti-lock braking system (ABS).............. 268Brake lights............................................. 268Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)....... 269Parking brake – general information....... 269Parking brake – applying........................ 270Parking brake – releasing........................ 271Parking brake – symbols and messages 272Driving through water.............................. 273Engine and cooling system..................... 274Conserving electrical current.................. 274Before a long distance trip...................... 274Driving in cold weather........................... 275Refueling – fuel requirements................. 276Refueling – octane rating........................ 277Refueling – opening/closing fuel fillerdoor......................................................... 278Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap...... 279Emission controls.................................... 280Economical driving.................................. 280Towing a trailer....................................... 282Detachable trailer hitch........................... 283Trailer Stability Assist (TSA).................... 284

08

Towing the vehicle.................................. 285Towing eyelet.......................................... 285Towing by tow truck............................... 286

09

09 Wheels and tiresTires – general information...................... 289Tires – storage and age.......................... 290Tires – tread wear indicator.................... 291Tires – tire economy................................ 291Changing a wheel – direction of rotation 292Changing a wheel – removing wheel...... 292Changing a wheel – spare wheel............ 295Changing a wheel – accessing the sparewheel....................................................... 296Changing a wheel – installing a wheel.... 296Tire inflation – general information.......... 297Tire inflation – checking pressure........... 298Tire specifications................................... 299Tire inflation – pressure table.................. 301Loading specifications............................ 302Loading specifications – load limit.......... 302Tire specifications – terminology............ 303Tire specifications – Uniform Tire QualityGrading................................................... 304Snow chains............................................ 305Snow tires/studded tires......................... 306Tire pressure monitoring - introduction.. 306Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– general information.............................. 307

Contents

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– changing wheels.................................. 308Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– recalibrating......................................... 309Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– activating/deactivating......................... 309Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– messages............................................. 310Tire Monitor - introduction...................... 311Calibrating Tire Monitor.......................... 311Tire Monitor status information............... 312Tire Monitor – messages......................... 313Self-supporting run flat tires (SST).......... 314Tire sealing system* – general informa-tion.......................................................... 314Tire sealing system* – overview.............. 316Tire sealing system* – sealing hole......... 317Tire sealing system – checking inflationpressure.................................................. 319Tire sealing system* – inflating tires........ 320Tire sealing system* – sealing compoundcontainer................................................. 321

10

10 Maintenance and servicingMaintenance – introduction.................... 323Maintenance – owner maintenance........ 324Maintenance – hoisting........................... 325Onboard Diagnostic System................... 326Booking service and repairs .................. 326Maintenance – opening/closing hood..... 328Engine compartment – overview............ 329Engine compartment – engine oil........... 330Engine compartment – coolant............... 332Engine compartment – brake fluid.......... 333Engine compartment – power steeringfluid......................................................... 334Bulbs – introduction................................ 335Bulbs – headlight housing....................... 336Bulbs – cover.......................................... 337Bulbs – low beam, Halogen.................... 338Bulbs – high beam, Halogen................... 338Bulbs – extra high beam......................... 339Bulbs – front turn signals........................ 339Bulbs – rear fog lights............................. 340Bulbs – location of taillight bulbs............ 340Bulbs – brake lights and taillights........... 341Bulbs – license plate lighting.................. 341Bulbs – cargo area lighting..................... 341

10

Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting.................. 342Bulbs – specifications............................. 342Wiper blades – service position.............. 343Wiper blades – windshield...................... 344Wiper blades – tailgate........................... 345Engine compartment – washer fluid....... 345Battery – symbols................................... 346Battery – handling................................... 346Battery – maintenance............................ 347Battery – changing.................................. 348Fuses – introduction............................... 349Fuses – engine compartment................. 351Fuses – glove compartment................... 355Fuses – cargo area/trunk........................ 358Fuses – engine compartment cold zone(Start/Stop only)...................................... 359Washing the car...................................... 361Automatic car wash................................ 362Polishing and waxing.............................. 362Cleaning the interior................................ 363Touching up paintwork........................... 365

Contents

9

11

11 SpecificationsLabel information.................................... 368Dimensions............................................. 371Weights................................................... 374Engine specifications.............................. 376Oil specifications..................................... 377Oil volume............................................... 378Coolant – specification and volume........ 379Transmission oil – specification and vol-umes....................................................... 379Brake fluid – specification and volume... 379Power steering – specification................ 380Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-ume......................................................... 380Air conditioning – specification and vol-ume......................................................... 380Battery specifications............................. 381Symbols – general information............... 382Warning symbols.................................... 382Indicator symbols.................................... 383Information symbols............................... 384Information symbols – ceiling console.... 385Information symbols – center console.... 385

12

12 IndexIndex....................................................... 386

INTRODUCTION

01 Introduction

01

}}11

On-board owner's manualThe owner's manual can be displayed on thecenter console screen and you can carry outsearches for the information that you require.

To open the owner's manual, press the MYCAR button on the center console, press OK/MENU and select Owner's manual.

For basic information, see "Infotainment -operating the system." The following sectionsalso provide more detailed information.

The on-board owner's manual start page

There are four ways of finding informationarticles in the on-board owner's manual:

• Searching: search for an article.

• Categories: All of the articles are sortedby category.

• Favorites: Quick access to frequentlyread articles.

• Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov-ering commonly used functions.

Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor-ner for additional information about the on-board owner's manual.

NOTE

• The on-board owner's manual cannotbe accessed while the vehicle is mov-ing.

• Specifications regarding your vehicleare not found in the on-board informa-tion. This information is listed in theprinted owner's manual.

Searching for information

Searching using the text wheel

List of characters

Switching between character entrymodes (see the following table)

Surf history

Use the text wheel to enter a web address.

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and pressOK/MENU to confirm. The number/letterkeys on the center console can also beused.

2. Continue to the next letter, etc. Theresults of the search will be displayed inthe phone book.

||01 Introduction

01

12

3. To switch from letter entry mode to theentry mode for numbers or special char-acters, or to go view surf history, turnTUNE to one of the selections (see theexplanation in the following table) in thelist for switching character entry mode (2)and press OK/MENU.

123/ABC

Toggle between letters and num-bers by pressing OK/MENU.

=> This leads to surf history. TurnTUNE to select a web addressand press OK/MENU to go to thewebsite.

Go Go to the website by pressingOK/MENU.

a|A Toggle between upper and lowercase letters by pressing OK/MENU.

| | } Switch from the text wheel to theAddress: field. Use TUNE tomove the cursor and erase char-acters by pressing EXIT. PressOK/MENU to return to the textwheel.

The number/letter keys on thecenter console can also be usedto edit the Address: field.

Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character.Press and hold EXIT to erase all characters.

Pressing a number key on the center consolewhile the text wheel is displayed (see the pre-vious illustration) will display a list of charac-ters. Press the desired key repeatedly toenter the desired letter and continue to thenext letter, etc.

To enter a number, press and hold the but-ton.

CategoriesThe articles in the on-board owner's manualare divided into main categories and sub-cat-egories. The same article may be listed inseveral applicable categories to help makesearches easier.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the category struc-ture and press OK/MENU to open a category(indicated by the symbol) or an article(indicated by the symbol). Press EXIT toreturn to the previous view.

FavoritesArticles that have been marked as favoritescan be found here. For information aboutmarking an article as a favorite, see "Navigat-ing in an article" below.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the list of favoritesand press OK/MENU to open an article.Press EXIT to return to the previous view.

Quick GuideThis is a selection of articles that will help youbecome familiar with some of the vehicle'smost common functions. These articles canalso be found in their respective categoriesbut are listed here for quick access.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guideand press OK/MENU to open an article.Press EXIT to return to the previous view.

Navigating in an article

Home: Returns you to the owner's man-ual start page.

Favorites: Add/remove an article fromthe list of favorites. This can also be doneby pressing the FAV button on the centerconsole keypad.

Highlighted link: takes you to the linkedarticle.

Important information: if the article con-tains warnings, cautions or notes, sym-

01 Introduction

01

13

bols for these types of information andthe number of such texts in the article willbe displayed here.

Turn TUNE to navigate among the links orscroll in an article. When you have scrolled tothe beginning/end of an article, you canreturn to the start page or a favorite by scroll-ing one additional step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate a selection or highlightedlink. Press EXIT to return to the previousview.

Related information• Information on the Internet (p. 20)

Owner's informationYour vehicle is equipped with a screen onwhich you can display information about yourvehicle's features and functions. The printedowner's manual supplements the on-boardinformation and contains important texts, thelatest updates and instructions that can beuseful in situations when it is not practical toread the information on the screen.

Changing the language used for the on-boardinformation could mean that some of theinformation displayed may not comply withnational or local statutes and regulations.

WARNING

The driver is always responsible for oper-ating the vehicle in a safe manner and forcomplying with current statutes and regu-lations.

It is also essential to maintain and servicethe vehicle according to Volvo's recom-mendations as stated in the owner's infor-mation and the service and warranty book-let.

If the on-board information differs from theprinted owner's manual, the printed infor-mation always takes precedence.

Contacting Volvo

In the USA:

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive,

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Related information• About this manual (p. 14)

• Important warnings (p. 23)

• Crash event data (p. 18)

• Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)

01 Introduction

01

14

About this manualReading your owner's manual is a good wayto familiarize yourself with the features andsystems in your vehicle.

• Before you operate your vehicle for thefirst time, we recommend that you lookthrough the information found in thechapters "Your Driving Environment" and"During Your Trip."

• Information contained in the balance ofthe manual is extremely useful and shouldbe read after operating the vehicle for thefirst time.

• The manual is structured so that it can beused for reference. For this reason, itshould be kept in the vehicle for readyaccess.

On-board owner's manualWhen the printed manual refers to the on-board owner's manual, this pertains to theinformation displayed on the center consolescreen.

The language used on the center consolescreen and instrument panel can be changedin the MY CAR system settings menu.

There are four ways of finding informationarticles in the on-board owner's manual:

• Searching: search for an article.

• Categories: All of the articles are sortedby category.

• Favorites: Quick access to frequentlyread articles.

• Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov-ering commonly used functions.

Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor-ner for additional information about the on-board owner's manual.

NOTE

• The on-board owner's manual cannotbe accessed while the vehicle is mov-ing.

• Specifications regarding your vehicleare not found in the on-board informa-tion. This information is listed in theprinted owner's manual.

The owner's manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The owner's manual mobile app can bedownloaded at www.volvocars.com.

The mobile app also contains videos andsearchable content, and provides easynavigation between the various articles.

FootnotesCertain pages of this manual contain informa-tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom ofthe page. This information supplements thetext that the footnote number refers to (a let-ter is used if the footnote refers to text in atable).

Display textsThere are several displays in the driver’s fieldof vision that show messages generated byvarious systems and functions in the vehicle.These texts are indicated in the Owner’sManual by being in slightly larger type thanthe surrounding text and are printed in gray,(for example: Change doors unlocksetting).

DecalsThere are various types of decals in the vehi-cle whose purpose is to provide importantinformation in a clear and concise way. Theimportance of these decals is explained asfollows, in descending order of importance.

01 Introduction

01

}}15

Risk of injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back-ground, white text/image on a black back-ground. Decals of this type are used to indi-cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning ofthis type could result in serious injury ordeath.

Risk of damage to the vehicle

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image on ablack or blue warning background and spacefor a message. If the information on decals ofthis type is ignored, damage to the vehiclecould result.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image on ablack background. These decals provide gen-eral information.

NOTE

The decals shown in the Owner’s Manualare examples only and are not intended tobe reproductions of the decals actuallyused in the vehicle. The purpose is to givean indication of how they look and theirapproximate location in the vehicle. Theapplicable information for your particularvehicle can be found on the respectivedecals in the vehicle.

||01 Introduction

01

16

Types of lists used in the owner'sinformation

ProceduresProcedures (step-by-step instructions), oractions that must be carried out in a certainorder, are arranged in numbered lists in thismanual.

If there is a series of illustrations associ-ated with step-by-step instructions, eachstep in the procedure is numbered in thesame way as the corresponding illustra-tion.

Lists in which letters are used can befound with series of illustrations in caseswhere the order in which the instructionsare carried out is not important.

Arrows with or without numbers are usedto indicate the direction of a movement.

Arrows containing letters are used to indi-cate movement.

If there are no illustrations associated with astep-by-step list, the steps in the procedureare indicated by ordinary numbers.

Position listsRed circles containing a number are usedin general overview illustrations in whichcertain components are pointed out. Thecorresponding number is also used in theposition list's description of the variouscomponents.

Bullet listsBullets are used to differentiate a number ofcomponents/functions/points of informationthat can be listed in random order.

For example:

• Coolant

• Engine oil

Continues on next page} }This symbol can be found at the lowerright corner to indicate that the current topiccontinues on the following page.

Continuation from previous page|| This symbol can be found at the upper leftcorner to indicate that the current topic is acontinuation from the previous page.

Options and accessoriesOptional or accessory equipment describedin this manual is indicated by an asterisk.

Optional or accessory equipment may not beavailable in all countries or markets. Pleasenote that some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legal require-ments.

Contact your Volvo retailer for additionalinformation.

NOTE

• Do not export your Volvo to anothercountry before investigating that coun-try's applicable safety and exhaustemission requirements. In some casesit may be difficult or impossible tocomply with these requirements. Mod-ifications to the emission control sys-tem(s) may render your Volvo not certi-fiable for legal operation in the U.S.,Canada and other countries.

• All information, illustrations and speci-fications contained in this manual arebased on the latest product informa-tion available at the time of publica-tion. Please note that some vehiclesmay be equipped differently, depend-ing on special legal requirements.Optional equipment described in thismanual may not be available in all mar-kets.

• Some of the illustrations shown aregeneric and may not depict the exactmodel for which this manual isintended.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to changespecifications or design without noticeand without incurring obligation.

01 Introduction

01

17

WARNING

If your vehicle is involved in an accident,unseen damage may affect its drivabilityand safety.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA proposition 65

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the state of Cali-fornia to cause cancer, and birth defectsor other reproductive harm. In addition,certain fluids contained in vehicles andcertain products of component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer, and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

WARNING

Certain components of this vehicle such asair bag modules, seat belt pretensioners,adaptive steering columns, and button cellbatteries may contain Perchlorate material.Special handling may apply for service orvehicle end of life disposal.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

ShiftlockWhen your vehicle is parked, the gear selec-tor is locked in the P (Park) position. Torelease the selector from this position, the

ignition must be in mode II (p. 79) or theengine must be running. Depress the brakepedal, press the button on the front side ofthe gear selector and move the selector fromP (Park).

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)The ABS system performs a brief self-diag-nostic test when the engine has been startedand driver releases the brake pedal. Anotherautomatic test may be performed when thevehicle first reaches a speed of approximately6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsateseveral times and a sound may be audiblefrom the ABS control module. This is normal.

Fuel filler doorPress the button on the light switch panel(see the illustration in Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door (p. 278)) when the vehi-cle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel fillerdoor. It will relock when closed and there willbe an audible click.

Points to keep in mind• Do not export your Volvo to another

country before investigating that coun-try's applicable safety and exhaust emis-sion requirements. In some cases it maybe difficult or impossible to comply withthese requirements. Modifications to theemission control system(s) may renderyour Volvo not certifiable for legal opera-

tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun-tries.

• All information, illustrations and specifica-tions contained in this manual are basedon the latest product information availa-ble at the time of publication. Please notethat some vehicles may be equipped dif-ferently, depending on special legalrequirements. Optional equipment descri-bed in this manual may not be available inall markets.

• Some of the illustrations shown aregeneric and may not depict the exactmodel for which this manual is intended.

• Volvo reserves the right to make modelchanges at any time, or to change speci-fications or design without notice andwithout incurring obligation.

Related information• Information on the Internet (p. 20)

• Volvo and the environment (p. 22)

• Important warnings (p. 23)

01 Introduction

01

18

Change of ownershipWhen the vehicle changes owners, all per-sonal settings should be reset to the factorydefaults.

To reset, press the MY CAR button in thecenter console followed by OK/MENU andselect Settings Reset to factory settings.

User data e.g., for apps, the web browserand for personal settings in menus such asthe climate system and vehicle settingsshould be reset to factory defaults.

For vehicles equipped with the optional VolvoOn Call with Sensus Connect (VOC), personalsettings stored in the vehicle should bedeleted, see Changing ownership of a vehiclewith Volvo On Call.

Related information• Volvo ID (p. 21)

Crash event dataThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle's systems per-formed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-tems for a short period of time, typically 30seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

• Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depress-ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.

NOTE

EDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, and crashlocation) are recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with anumber of computers whose task is to con-tinuously control and monitor the vehicle’soperation. They can also register informationduring normal driving conditions if they detecta fault relating to the vehicle’s operation andfunctionality. Some of the stored informationis required by technicians when carrying outservice and maintenance to enable them todiagnose and rectify any faults that haveoccurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo tofulfill legal and other regulatory requirements.This information may be stored in the vehi-cle’s computers for a certain period of time.

01 Introduction

01

}}19

Volvo will not contribute to spreading theabove-mentioned information to third partieswithout the consent of the vehicle’s owner.However, due to national legal requirementsand regulations, Volvo may be compelled toprovide information of this type to authoritiessuch as law enforcement agencies or otherswho may assert a legal right to obtain suchinformation.

Volvo and service and repair facilities withagreements with Volvo have access to thespecial technical equipment required in orderto read and interpret the information storedby the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsi-ble for ensuring that the information transmit-ted to Volvo during service and maintenanceis stored and handled in a secure manner andthat this handling is done in accordance withapplicable legal requirements. For additionalinformation, contact:

For additional information, contact:

In the United States

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

Related information• Information on the Internet (p. 20)

• Contacting Volvo (p. 13)

Volvo Structural Parts StatementVolvo has always been and continues to be aleader in automotive safety.

Volvo engineers and manufactures vehiclesdesigned to help protect vehicle occupants inthe event of a collision.

Volvos are designed to absorb the impact ofa collision. This energy absorption systemincluding, but not limited to, structural com-ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars,bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails,fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and bodypanels must work together to maintain cabinintegrity and protect the vehicle occupants.

The supplemental restraint system includingbut not limited to air bags, side curtain airbags, and deployment sensors work togetherwith the above components to provide propertiming for air bag deployment.

Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer-ica does not support the use of aftermarket,alternative or anything other than originalVolvo parts for collision repair.

In addition Volvo does not support the use orre-use of structural components from anexisting vehicle that has been previouslydamaged. Although these parts may appearequivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts havebeen previously replaced with non-OE partsor if the part has been damaged as a result ofa prior collision. The quality of these used

||01 Introduction

01

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

parts may also have been affected due toenvironmental exposure.

Related information• Important warnings (p. 23)

• Information on the Internet (p. 20)

• Contacting Volvo (p. 13)

Information on the InternetAdditional information regarding your vehiclecan be found at www.volvocars.com.

Support on the InternetGo to support.volvocars.com or use the QRcode below to visit the site, which is availablein most markets.

QR code to the support site

The information on the support site is search-able and is grouped into different categories.It includes support for e.g., Internet-basedservices and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC),the navigation system* and apps. Video andstep-by-step instructions explain various pro-cedures such as how to connect the vehicleto the Internet via a cell phone.

Downloadable information

MapsSensus Navigation system* maps can bedownloaded from the support site.

Mobile appsFor certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos,the owner's manual is available in the form ofan app. The VOC* app can also be foundhere.

Owner's manuals for earlier modelVolvosOwner's manuals for earlier model Volvos areavailable in PDF format. Quick Guides andsupplements can also be found on the sup-port site. Select a model and a model yearand download the desired information.

ContactContact information for customer support andthe nearest Volvo retailer are available on thesite.

Related information• About this manual (p. 14)

• Contacting Volvo (p. 13)

01 Introduction

01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21

Volvo IDThis is your personal ID that can be used toaccess a number of services1

Creating a Volvo IDTo create a Volvo ID, provide your personalemail address and then follow the instructionsprovided in the email that you will receivefrom Volvo. This can be done from:

• From an Internet-connected vehicle:Enter your email address in the app thatrequires a Volvo ID and follow the instruc-tions provides or press the Internet con-nect ( ) button on the center consoleand select Apps, Settings and follow theinstructions provided.

• Volvo On Call (VOC*): download the latestversion of the VOC app and create aVolvo ID on the start page.

Open Source Software NoticeThe systems in your Volvo contain certainfree/open source and other software.

This product uses certain free / open sourceand other software originating from thirdparties, that is subject to the GNU GeneralPublic License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public Licenseversion 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType ProjectLicense (“FreeType License”) and otherdifferent and/or additional copyright licenses,disclaimers and notices. The links how toaccess the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,LGPLv3, and the other open source softwarelicenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements andnotices are provided to you below. Pleaserefer to the exact terms of the relevantLicense, regarding your rights under saidlicenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offersto provide the source code of said free/opensource software to you for a charge coveringthe cost of performing such distribution, suchas the cost of media, shipping and handling,upon written request. Please contact yournearest Volvo retailer.

This offer is valid for a period of at least three(3) years from the date of the distribution ofthis product by VCC / or for as long as VCCoffers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses softwarecopyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 TheFreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rightsreserved.

This product includes software underfollowing licenses:

GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html

• Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista2.6.31 kernel and kernel fromL2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)

• uBoot (based on v2009.08)

• busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)

GCC runtime library exception: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html

• libgcc_s.so.1

LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html

• Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1

The FreeType Project License: http://www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT

• libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)

Related information• About this manual (p. 14)

1 These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

01 Introduction

01

22

Volvo and the environmentVolvo is committed to the well being of itscustomers. As a natural part of this commit-ment, we care about the environment inwhich we all live. Concern for the environmentmeans an everyday involvement in reducingour environmental impact.

Volvo's environmental activities are based ona holistic view, which means we consider theoverall environmental impact of a productthroughout its complete life cycle. In this con-text, design, production, product use, andrecycling are all important considerations. Inproduction, Volvo has partly or completelyphased out several chemicals includingCFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cad-mium; and reduced the number of chemicalsused in our plants 50% since 1991.

Volvo was the first in the world to introduceinto production a three-way catalytic con-verter with a Lambda sond, now called theheated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The currentversion of this highly efficient system reducesemissions of harmful substances (CO, HC,NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately95 – 99% and the search to eliminate theremaining emissions continues. Volvo is theonly automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning systemof all models as far back as the 1975model 240. Advanced electronic engine con-trols and cleaner fuels are bringing us closerto our goal. In addition to continuous environ-

mental refinement of conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvois actively looking at advanced technologyalternative-fuel vehicles.

When you drive a Volvo, you become ourpartner in the work to lessen the car's impacton the environment. To reduce your vehicle'senvironmental impact, you can:

• Maintain proper air pressure in your tires.Tests have shown decreased fuel econ-omy with improperly inflated tires.

• Follow the recommended maintenanceschedule in your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet.

• Drive at a constant speed whenever pos-sible.

• See a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician as soon as possible forinspection if the check engine (malfunc-tion indicator) light illuminates, or stayson after the vehicle has started.

• Properly dispose of any vehicle-relatedwaste such as used motor oil, used bat-teries, brake pads, etc.

• When cleaning your vehicle, please usegenuine Volvo car care products. AllVolvo car care products are formulated tobe environmentally friendly.

FSC®

The FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®)symbol indicates that the wood pulp used inthis publication comes from FSC® certifiedforests and other responsible sources.

Related information• Economical driving (p. 280)

• Tires – tire economy (p. 291)

01 Introduction

01

23

Important warningsPlease keep the following warnings in mindwhen operating/servicing your vehicle.

Driver distractionA driver has a responsibility to do everythingpossible to ensure his or her own safety andthe safety of passengers in the vehicle andothers sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac-tions is part of that responsibility.

Driver distraction results from driver activitiesthat are not directly related to controlling thevehicle in the driving environment. Your newVolvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea-ture-rich entertainment and communicationsystems. These include hands-free cellulartelephones, navigation systems, and multi-purpose audio systems. You may also ownother portable electronic devices for your ownconvenience. When used properly and safely,they enrich the driving experience. Improperlyused, any of these could cause a distraction.

For all of these systems, we want to providethe following warning that reflects the strongVolvo concern for your safety. Never usethese devices or any feature of your vehicle ina way that distracts you from the task of driv-ing safely. Distraction can lead to a seriousaccident. In addition to this general warning,we offer the following guidance regardingspecific newer features that may be found inyour vehicle:

WARNING

• Never use a hand-held cellular tele-phone while driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit cellular telephone use bya driver while the vehicle is moving.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a navi-gation system, set and make changesto your travel itinerary only with thevehicle parked.

• Never program your audio systemwhile the vehicle is moving. Programradio presets with the vehicle parked,and use your programmed presets tomake radio use quicker and simpler.

• Never use portable computers or per-sonal digital assistants while the vehi-cle is moving.

Accessory installation• We strongly recommend that Volvo own-

ers install only genuine, Volvo-approvedaccessories, and that accessory installa-tions be performed only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• Genuine Volvo accessories are tested toensure compatibility with the perform-ance, safety, and emission systems inyour vehicle. Additionally, a trained andqualified Volvo service technician knowswhere accessories may and may not besafely installed in your Volvo. In all cases,please consult a trained and qualified

Volvo service technician before installingany accessory in or on your vehicle.

• Accessories that have not been approvedby Volvo may or may not be specificallytested for compatibility with your vehicle.Additionally, an inexperienced installermay not be familiar with some of yourcar's systems.

• Any of your car's performance and safetysystems could be adversely affected ifyou install accessories that Volvo has nottested, or if you allow accessories to beinstalled by someone unfamiliar with yourvehicle.

• Damage caused by unapproved orimproperly installed accessories may notbe covered by your new vehicle warranty.See your Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet for more warrantyinformation. Volvo assumes no responsi-bility for death, injury, or expenses thatmay result from the installation of non-genuine accessories.

Related information• About this manual (p. 14)

• Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)

01 Introduction

01

24

Volvo On Call Roadside AssistanceYour new Volvo comes with a four year ONCALL roadside assistance.

Additional information, features, and benefitsof this program are described in a separateinformation package in your glove compart-ment.

If you require assistance, dial:

In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63-VOLVO)

In Canada 1-800-263-0475

NOTE

Some vehicles may be equipped withVolvo On Call with Sensus Connect,which will allow access to the call centerand additional features directly from thevehicle. This is in addition to the Volvo OnCall Roadside Assistance program men-tioned above.

Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect willbe a customer pay subscription offer afteran initial complimentary trial period.

Related information• Information on the Internet (p. 20)

Technician certificationIn addition to Volvo factory training, Volvosupports certification by the National Institutefor Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.).

Certified technicians have demonstrated ahigh degree of competence in specific areas.Besides passing exams, each technicianmust also have worked in the field for two ormore years before a certificate is issued.These professional technicians are best ableto analyze vehicle problems and perform thenecessary maintenance procedures to keepyour Volvo at peak operating condition.

SAFETY

02 Safety

02

26

Occupant safetySafety is Volvo's cornerstone.

Volvo's concern for safetyOur concern for safety dates back to 1927when the first Volvo rolled off the productionline. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo inven-tion), safety cages, and energy-absorbingimpact zones were designed into Volvo vehi-cles long before it was fashionable orrequired by government regulation.

We will not compromise our commitment tosafety. We continue to seek out new safetyfeatures and to refine those already in ourvehicles. You can help. We would appreciatehearing your suggestions about improvingautomobile safety. We also want to know ifyou ever have a safety concern with yourvehicle. Call us in the U.S. at:1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at:1-800-663-8255.

Occupant safety remindersHow safely you drive doesn't depend on howold you are but rather on:

• How well you see.

• Your ability to concentrate.

• How quickly you make decisions understress to avoid an accident.

The following suggestions are intended tohelp you cope with the ever changing trafficenvironment.

• Never drink and drive.

• If you are taking any medication, consultyour physician about its potential effectson your driving abilities.

• Take a driver-retraining course.

• Have your eyes checked regularly.

• Keep your windshield and headlightsclean.

• Replace wiper blades when they start toleave streaks.

• Take into account the traffic, road, andweather conditions, particularly withregard to stopping distance.

• Never send text messages while driving.

• Refrain from using or minimize the use ofa cell phone while driving.

Related information• Recall information (p. 26)

• Reporting safety defects (p. 27)

Recall informationInformation regarding recalls or other servicecampaigns is available on our website atwww.volvocars.com/us/.

On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVOand the heading RECALL INFORMATION willbe displayed at the lower left side of thescreen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Num-ber for your vehicle (found at the base of thewindshield). If your vehicle has any openRecalls, they will be displayed on this page.

Volvo customers in CanadaFor any questions regarding open recalls foryour vehicle, please contact your authorizedVolvo retailer. If your retailer is unable toanswer your questions, please contact VolvoCustomer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon-day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com.You may also write us at:

Volvo Cars of Canada

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

Related information• Occupant safety (p. 26)

• Reporting safety defects (p. 27)

02 Safety

02

27

Reporting safety defectsThe following information will help you reportany perceived safety-related defects in yourvehicle.

Reporting safety defects in the U.S.If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Volvo Cars of NorthAmerica, LLC. If NHTSA receivessimilar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individ-ual problems between you, yourretailer, or Volvo Cars of NorthAmerica, LLC. To contact NHTSA,you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans-portation, Washington D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other informa-tion about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov, where youcan also enter your vehicle's VIN(Vehicle Identification Number) tosee if it has any open recalls.

Volvo strongly recommends that ifyour vehicle is covered under aservice campaign, safety or emis-sion recall or similar action, it shouldbe completed as soon as possible.Please check with your local retaileror Volvo Cars of North America, LLCif your vehicle is covered underthese conditions.

NHTSA can be reached at:

Internet:

http://www.nhtsa.gov

Telephone:

1-888-DASH-2-DOT(1-888-327-4236).

Reporting safety defects in CanadaIf you believe your vehicle has a defect thatcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifying VolvoCars of Canada Corp.

Transport Canada can be contacted at:1-800-333-0510

Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500

Fax: 1-819-994-3372

Mailing Address: Transport Canada - RoadSafety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z0A1

Related information• Occupant safety (p. 26)

• Recall information (p. 26)

02 Safety

02

28

Seat belts – generalSeat belts should always be worn by all occu-pants of your vehicle. Children should beproperly restrained, using an infant, car, orbooster seat determined by age, weight andheight.

Volvo also believes no child should sit in thefront seat of a vehicle.

Adjusting the seat belt

Most states and provinces make it mandatoryfor occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts.

Seat belt pretensionersAll seat belts are equipped with pretensionersthat reduce slack in the belts. These preten-sioners are triggered in situations where thefront or side impact airbags deploy, and incertain impacts from the rear. The front seatbelts also include a tension reducing devicewhich, in the event of a collision, limits the

peak forces exerted by the seat belt on theoccupant.

Seat belt maintenanceCheck periodically that the seat belts are ingood condition. Use water and a mild deter-gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanismfunction as follows: attach the seat belt andpull rapidly on the strap.

WARNING

Never use a seat belt for more than oneoccupant. Never wear the shoulder portionof the belt under the arm, behind the backor otherwise out of position. Such usecould cause injury in the event of an acci-dent. As seat belts lose much of theirstrength when exposed to violent stretch-ing, they should be replaced after any col-lision, even if they appear to be undam-aged.

WARNING

• Never repair the belt yourself; have thiswork done by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician only.

• Any device used to induce slack intothe shoulder belt portion of the three-point belt system will have a detrimen-tal effect on the amount of protectionavailable to you in the event of a colli-sion.

• The seat back should not be tilted toofar back. The shoulder belt must betaut in order to function properly.

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in thefront passenger's seat. We also rec-ommend that children who have out-grown these devices sit in the rearseat with the seat belt properly fas-tened.

Related information• Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29)

• Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

• Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 30)

02 Safety

02

29

Seat belts – buckling/unbucklingSeat belts should be used by all occupants inthe vehicle when it is in motion.

Buckling a seat beltPull the belt out far enough to insert the latchplate into the receptacle until a distinct clickis heard. The seat belt retractor is normally"unlocked" and you can move freely, provi-ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled outtoo far.

Seat belt retractorThe seat belt retractor will lock up in thefollowing situations:

• if the belt is pulled out rapidly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the vehicle is leaning excessively

• when driving in turns

• if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) isactivated

NOTE

Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt)is equipped with the ALR/ELR function,which is designed to help keep the seatbelt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat beltis pulled out as far as possible. If this isdone, a sound from the seat belt retractorwill be audible, which is normal, and theseat belt will be pulled taut and locked inplace. This function is automatically disa-bled when the seat belt is unbuckled andfully retracted.

See also Child restraints (p. 47) for informa-tion about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR func-tion to anchor a child seat.

When wearing the seat belt remember:• The belt should not be twisted or turned.

• The lap section of the belt must be posi-tioned low on the hips (not pressingagainst the abdomen).

• Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolledup into its retractor and that the shoulderand lap belts are taut.

Unbuckling the seat beltTo remove the seat belt, press the red sectionon the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting thevehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fullyafter being unbuckled. If necessary, guide thebelt back into the retractor slot.

Related information• Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

• Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 30)

02 Safety

02

30

Seat belt reminderThe seat belt reminder is intended to alert alloccupants of the vehicle that their seat beltsshould be fastened before the vehicle beginsto move.

G017726

Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console

The seat belt reminder consists of an audiblesignal, an indicator light near the rearviewmirror and a symbol in the instrument panelthat alert all occupants of the vehicle to fas-ten their seat belts (p. 28). The audible signaland indicator light will be on for several sec-onds from the time the ignition is switchedon, regardless of whether or not the seatbelts are fastened.

If the front seat belts are unbuckled while thevehicle is in motion, the audible signal andwarning light will be active for a several sec-onds.

Rear seatsThe seat belt reminder in the rear seat hastwo additional functions:

• It provides information about which seatbelts are fastened in the rear seat. A mes-sage will appear in the information displaywhen a belt is being used. This messagewill disappear after several seconds orcan be erased by pressing the OK buttonon the left steering wheel lever.

• It also provides a reminder if one of theoccupants of the rear seat has unbuckledhis/her seat belt while the vehicle is inmotion. A visual and audible signal will begiven. These signals will stop when theseat belt has been re-buckled or can bestopped by pressing the OK button.

• The message Unbelted in rear seat willappear in the information display if one ofthe rear doors has been opened.

The message in the information display canalways be accessed, even if it has beenerased, by pressing the OK button to displaystored messages.

Related information• Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 30)

Seat belts – pregnancyThe seat belt should always be worn duringpregnancy. However, it is crucial that it beworn correctly.

G020998

The diagonal section should wrap over theshoulder then be routed between the breastsand to the side of the belly. The lap sectionshould lay flat over the thighs and as low aspossible under the belly. It must never beallowed to ride upward. Remove all slackfrom the belt and ensure that it fits close tothe body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheelsuch that they can easily maintain control ofthe vehicle as they drive (which means theymust be able to easily operate the foot pedalsand steering wheel). Within this context, theyshould strive to position the seat with as large

02 Safety

02

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31

a distance as possible between their bellyand the steering wheel.

Related information• Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29)

• Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

• Child restraints (p. 47)

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)As an enhancement to the three-point seatbelts (p. 28), your Volvo is equipped with aSupplemental Restraint System (SRS).

Models with an analog instrument panel

Models with an digital instrument panel*

Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretension-ers, front airbags (p. 32), side impact air-

bags (p. 39), a front passenger occupantweight sensor (p. 36), and inflatable cur-tains (p. 41). All of these systems are moni-tored by the SRS control module. An SRSwarning light in the instrument panel (see theillustration) illuminates when the ignition is inmodes I or II, and will normally go out afterapproximately 6 seconds if no faults aredetected in the system.

Where applicable, a text message will also bedisplayed when the SRS warning light illumi-nates. If this warning symbol is not function-ing properly, the general warning symbol illu-minates and a text message will be displayed.

See also Information displays – indicatorsymbols (p. 72) and Information displays –warning symbols (p. 74) for more informa-tion about indicator and warning lights.

||02 Safety

02

32

WARNING

• If the SRS warning light stays on afterthe engine has started or if it illumi-nates while you are driving, have thevehicle inspected by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician assoon as possible.

• Never try to repair any component orpart of the SRS yourself. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function and serious injury. All work onthese systems should be performed bya trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

WARNING

If your vehicle has become flood-damagedin any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/stand-ing water on the floor of the vehicle), donot attempt to start the vehicle or insertthe remote key into the ignition slot beforedisconnecting the battery (see below). Thismay cause airbag deployment which couldresult in serious injury. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician for repairs.

Before attempting to tow the vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition for at least10 minutes and disconnect the bat-tery.

2. Follow the instructions for manuallyoverriding the shiftlock system Trans-mission – shiftlock override (p. 256).

Related information• Crash mode – general information

(p. 44)

Front airbagsThe front airbags supplement the three-pointseat belts (p. 28). For these airbags to providethe protection intended, seat belts must beworn at all times.

G018665

The front airbag systemThe front airbag system includes gas genera-tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera-tion sensors that activate the gas generators,causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro-gen gas.

02 Safety

02

}}33

Location of the passenger's side front airbag

As the movement of the seats' occupantscompresses the airbags, some of the gas isexpelled at a controlled rate to provide bettercushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners alsodeploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entireprocess, including inflation and deflation ofthe airbags, takes approximately one fifth of asecond.

The location of the front airbags is indicatedby SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steeringwheel pad and above the glove compartment,and by decals on both sun visors and on thefront and far right side of the dash.

The driver's side front airbag is folded andlocated in the steering wheel hub.

The passenger's side front airbag is foldedbehind a panel located above the glove com-partment.

WARNING

• The airbags in the vehicle are designedto be a SUPPLEMENT to–not areplacement for–the three-point seatbelts. For maximum protection, wearseat belts at all times. Be aware thatno system can prevent all possibleinjuries that may occur in an accident.

• Never drive with your hands on thesteering wheel pad/airbag housing.

• The front airbags are designed to helpprevent serious injury. Deploymentoccurs very quickly and with consider-able force. During normal deploymentand depending on variables such asseating position, one may experienceabrasions, bruises, swellings, or otherinjuries as a result from deployment ofone or both of the airbags.

• When installing any accessory equip-ment, make sure that the front airbagsystem is not damaged. Any interfer-ence in the system could cause mal-function.

Front airbag deployment• The front airbags are designed to deploy

during certain frontal or front-angular col-lisions, impacts, or decelerations,depending on the crash severity, angle,speed and object impacted. The airbagsmay also deploy in certain non-frontal

collisions where rapid decelerationoccurs.

• The SRS (p. 31) sensors, which triggerthe front airbags, are designed to react toboth the impact of the collision and theinertial forces generated by it, and todetermine if the intensity of the collision issufficient for the seat belt pretensionersand/or airbags to be deployed.

However, not all frontal collisions activate thefront airbags.

• If the collision involves a nonrigid object(e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid,fixed object at a low speed, the front air-bags will not necessarily deploy.

• Front airbags do not normally deploy in aside impact collision, in a collision fromthe rear or in a rollover situation.

• The amount of damage to the bodyworkdoes not reliably indicate if the airbagsshould have deployed or not.

WARNING

If any of the airbags have deployed:

• Do not attempt to drive the vehicle.Have it towed to a qualified repairfacility.

• If necessary seek medical attentIon.

||02 Safety

02

34

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in thefront passenger's seat. We also rec-ommend that occupants under 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) in height who haveoutgrown these devices sit in the rearseat with the seat belt fastened1.

• Never drive with the airbags deployed.The fact that they hang out can impairthe steering of your vehicle. Othersafety systems can also be damaged.

• The smoke and dust formed when theairbags are deployed can cause skinand eye irritation in the event of pro-longed exposure.

Should you have questions about any com-ponent in the SRS system, please contact atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianor Volvo customer support:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

www.volvocars.com/us

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

www.volvocars.com/ca

NOTE

• Deployment of front airbags occursonly one time during an accident. In acollision where deployment occurs,the airbags and seat belt pretensionersactivate. Some noise occurs and asmall amount of powder is released.The release of the powder may appearas smoke-like matter. This is a normalcharacteristic and does not indicatefire.

• Volvo's front airbags use special sen-sors that are integrated with the frontseat buckles. The point at which theairbag deploys is determined bywhether or not the seat belt is beingused, as well as the severity of the col-lision.

• Collisions can occur where only one ofthe airbags deploys. If the impact isless severe, but severe enough topresent a clear injury risk, the airbagsare triggered at partial capacity. If theimpact is more severe, the airbags aretriggered at full capacity.

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information, (p. 36).

02 Safety

02

35

Airbag decals

Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors

Passenger's side airbag decal

WARNING

• Children must never be allowed in thefront passenger's seat.

• Occupants in the front passenger'sseat must never sit on the edge of theseat, sit leaning toward the instrumentpanel or otherwise sit out of position.

• The occupant's back must be asupright as comfort allows and beagainst the seat back with the seatbelt properly fastened.

• Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not onthe dash, seat or out of the window.

WARNING

• No objects or accessory equipment,e.g. dashboard covers, may be placedon, attached to, or installed near theair bag hatch (the area above the glovecompartment) or the area affected byairbag deployment.

• There should be no loose articles,such as coffee cups on the floor, seat,or dashboard area.

• Never try to open the airbag cover onthe steering wheel or the passenger'sside dashboard. This should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the vehicle occu-pants.

Related information• Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 36)

• Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags(p. 39)

• Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41)

• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)(p. 31)

02 Safety

02

36

Occupant Weight SensorThe Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) isdesigned to meet the regulatory requirementsof Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard(FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (willnot inflate) the passenger's side front airbagunder certain conditions.

2

2

G017724

Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light

Disabling the passenger's side frontairbagVolvo recommends that ALL occupants(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seatof any vehicle with a front passenger side air-bag (p. 32), and be properly restrained fortheir size and weight. For child safety recom-mendations, see Child safety (p. 46).

The OWS works with sensors that are part ofthe front passenger's seat and seatbelt (p. 28). The sensors are designed to

detect the presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger'sside front airbag should be enabled (mayinflate) or disabled (will not inflate).

The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas-senger's side front airbag when:

• the front passenger's seat is unoccupied,or has small/medium objects in the frontseat,

• the system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat that isinstalled according to the manufacturer'sinstructions,

• the system determines that a small childis present in a forward-facing childrestraint that is installed according to themanufacturer's instructions,

• the system determines that a small childis present in a booster seat,

• a front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time,

• a child or a small person occupies thefront passenger's seat.

The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp which will illuminate and stayon to remind you that the passenger's sidefront airbag is disabled. The PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in theoverhead console, near the base of the rear-view mirror.

NOTE

When the ignition is switched on, the OWSindicator light will go on for up to 10 sec-onds while the system performs a self-diagnostic test.

However, if a fault is detected in the system:

• The OWS indicator light will stay on

• The SRS warning light (p. 31) will comeon and stay on

• The message Pass. Airbag OFF Serviceurgent will be displayed in the informa-tion display.

WARNING

If a fault in the system is detected andindicated as described, be aware that thepassenger's side front airbag will notdeploy in the event of a collision. In thiscase, the SRS system and OccupantWeight Sensor should be inspected by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian as soon as possible.

02 Safety

02

}}37

WARNING

• Never try to open, remove, or repairany components in the OWS system.This could result in system malfunc-tion. Maintenance or repairs shouldonly be carried out by an a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• The front passenger's seat should notbe modified in any way. This couldreduce pressure on the seat cushion,which might interfere with the OWSsystem's function.

Passeng-er's seatoccu-pancy sta-tus

OWSindicatorlight sta-tus

Passeng-er's sidefront air-bag status

Seat unoc-cupied

OWS indi-cator lightlights up.

Passenger'sside front air-bag disabled

Seat occu-pied by lowweightoccupant/objectA

OWS indi-cator lightlights up

Passenger'sside front air-bag disabled

Seat occu-pied byheavy occu-pant/object

OWS indi-cator lightis not lit

Passenger'sside front air-bag enabled

A Volvo recommends that children always be properlyrestrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats.Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag isdisabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly instal-led. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passeng-er's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rearseat.

The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate)the passenger's side front airbag in the eventof a collision anytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sitting properly in thefront passenger's seat. The PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off andremain off.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possiblethat the person isn't sitting properly in theseat. If this happens:

• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person toplace the seatback in an upright position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson's legs comfortably extended.

• Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for about twominutes. This will allow the system todetect that person and enable the pas-senger's frontal airbag.

• If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-tor lamp remains on even after this, theperson should be advised to ride in therear seat.

This condition reflects limitations of the OWSclassification capability. It does not indicateOWS malfunction.

ModificationsIf you are considering modifying your vehiclein any way to accommodate a disability, forexample by altering or adapting the driver'sor front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbagsystems, please contact Volvo at:

In the USA

Volvo Cars of North America, LLC

Customer Care Center

||02 Safety

02

38

1 Volvo Drive

P.O. Box 914

Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647

1-800-458-1552

In Canada

Volvo Cars of Canada Corp.

National Customer Service

9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9

1-800-663-8255

WARNING

• No objects that add to the total weighton the seat should be placed on thefront passenger's seat. If a child isseated in the front passenger's seatwith any additional weight, this extraweight could cause the OWS systemto enable the airbag, which mightcause it to deploy in the event of a col-lision, thereby injuring the child.

• The seat belt should never be wrappedaround an object on the front pas-senger's seat. This could interfere withthe OWS system's function.

• The front passenger's seat belt shouldnever be used in a way that exertsmore pressure on the passenger thannormal. This could increase the pres-sure exerted on the weight sensor by achild, and could result in the airbagbeing enabled, which might cause it todeploy in the event of a collision,thereby injuring the child.

WARNING

• Keep the following points in mind withrespect to the OWS system. Failure tofollow these instructions couldadversely affect the system's functionand result in serious injury to the occu-pant of the front passenger's seat:

• The full weight of the front seat pas-senger should always be on the seatcushion. The passenger should neverlift him/herself off the seat cushionusing the armrest in the door or thecenter console, by pressing the feet onthe floor, by sitting on the edge of theseat cushion, or by pressing againstthe backrest in a way that reducespressure on the seat cushion. Thiscould cause OWS to disable the front,passenger's side airbag.

02 Safety

02

}}39

WARNING

• Do not place any type of object on thefront passenger's seat in such a waythat jamming, pressing, or squeezingoccurs between the object and thefront seat, other than as a direct resultof the correct use of the AutomaticLocking Retractor/Emergency LockingRetractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (Childrestraints (p. 47)).

• No objects should be placed under thefront passenger's seat. This couldinterfere with the OWS system's func-tion.

Related information• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

Side impact protection (SIPS) airbagsAs an enhancement to the structural sideimpact protection built into your vehicle, it isalso equipped with Side Impact ProtectionSystem (SIPS) airbags.

G032949

Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (frontseats only)

The SIPS airbag system is designed to helpincrease occupant protection in the event ofcertain side impact collisions. The SIPS air-bags are designed to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact.

Driver's side SIPS airbag

Passenger's side SIPS airbag

NOTE

SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag)occurs only on the side of the vehicleaffected by the impact. The airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situa-tions.

||02 Safety

02

40

Components in the SIPS airbag systemThis SIPS airbag system consists of a gasgenerator, the side airbag modules built intothe outboard sides of both front seat back-rests, and electronic sensors/wiring.

WARNING

• The SIPS airbag system is a supple-ment to the structural Side ImpactProtection System and the three-pointseat belt system. It is not designed todeploy during collisions from the frontor rear of the vehicle or in rollover sit-uations.

• The use of seat covers on the frontseats may impede SIPS airbag deploy-ment.

• No objects, accessory equipment orstickers may be placed on, attached toor installed near the SIPS airbag sys-tem or in the area affected by SIPS air-bag deployment.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the SIPS airbag system. Thisshould be done only by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• In order for the SIPS airbag to provideits best protection, both front seatoccupants should sit in an uprightposition with the seat belt properly fas-tened.

• Failure to follow these instructions canresult in injury to the occupants of thevehicle in the event of an accident.

Related information• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

• Front airbags (p. 32)

• Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41)

02 Safety

02

41

Inflatable Curtain (IC)The inflatable curtain is designed to help pro-tect the heads of the occupants of the frontseats and the occupant of the outboard rearseating positions in certain side impact colli-sions.

This system consists of inflatable curtainslocated along the sides of the roof liners,stretching from the center of both front sidewindows to the rear edge of the rear sidedoor windows.

In certain side impacts, both the InflatableCurtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys-tem (p. 39) (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The ICand the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

NOTE

If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remainsinflated for approximately 3 seconds.

WARNING

• The IC system is a supplement to theSide Impact Protection System. It isnot designed to deploy during colli-sions from the rear of the vehicle.

• Never try to open or repair any compo-nents of the IC system. This should bedone only by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• Never hang heavy items from the ceil-ing handles. This could impededeployment of the Inflatable Curtain.

• The cargo area and rear seat shouldnot be loaded to a level higher than2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge ofthe rear side windows. Objects placedhigher than this level could impede thefunction of the Inflatable Curtain.

WARNING

In order for the IC to provide its best pro-tection, both front seat occupants andboth outboard rear seat occupants shouldsit in an upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened; adults using the seatbelt and children using the proper childrestraint system. Only adults should sit inthe front seats. Children must never beallowed in the front passenger seat, Childsafety (p. 46) for guidelines. Failure tofollow these instructions can result in injuryto the vehicle occupants in an accident.

Related information• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

(p. 31)

• Front airbags (p. 32)

• Child safety (p. 46)

02 Safety

02

42

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)The WHIPS system consists of speciallydesigned hinges and brackets on the frontseat backrests designed to help absorb someof the energy generated in a collision from therear (when the vehicle is rear-ended).

In the event of a rear-end collision, the hingesand brackets of the front seat backrests aredesigned to change position slightly to allowthe backrest/head restraint to help supportthe occupant's head before moving slightly

rearward. This movement helps absorb someof the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING

• The WHIPS system is designed tosupplement the other safety systemsin your vehicle. For this system tofunction properly, the three-point seatbelt must be worn. Please be awarethat no system can prevent all possibleinjuries that may occur in an accident.

• The WHIPS system is designed tofunction in certain collisions from therear, depending on the crash severity,angle and speed.

02 Safety

02

43

WARNING

• Occupants in the front seats mustnever sit out of position. The occu-pant's back must be as upright ascomfort allows and be against the seatback with the seat belt properly fas-tened.

• If your vehicle has been involved in arear-end collision, the front seat back-rests must be inspected by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician,even if the seats appear to be undam-aged. Certain components in theWHIPS system may need to bereplaced.

• Do not attempt to service any compo-nent in the WHIPS system yourself.

WARNING

• Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behindthe front seats could impede the func-tion of the WHIPS system.

• If the rear seat backrests are foldeddown, cargo must be secured to pre-vent it from sliding forward against thefront seat backrests in the event of acollision from the rear. This couldinterfere with the action of the WHIPSsystem.

WARNING

Any contact between the front seat back-rests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child seat could impede the functionof the WHIPS system. If the rear seat isfolded down, the occupied front seatsmust be adjusted forward so that they donot touch the folded rear seat.

Related information• Seat belts – general (p. 28)

02 Safety

02

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rollover Protection System (ROPS)Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)utilizes the Roll Stability Control (RSC) func-tion and has been designed to help minimizethe risk of a rollover in emergency maneuversor if a skid should occur.

RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registersthe amount of change in the lateral angle atwhich the vehicle is leaning. Using this infor-mation, RSC calculates the likelihood of arollover. If there is an imminent risk of a roll-over, the stability system is activated, powerto the engine is cut and the brakes areapplied to one or more of the wheels until thevehicle regains stability.

WARNING

The vehicle’s stability systems, includingROPS and RSC, do not replace thedriver’s responsibility for operating thevehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driv-ing style should always be adapted to thecurrent road, traffic and weather condi-tions. Posted speed limits should alwaysbe respected.

Crash mode – general informationAfter a collision, the functionality of some ofthe vehicle's systems may be reduced as asafety precaution.

Warning symbol: analog instrument panel

Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*

If the vehicle has been involved in a collision,the text Safety mode See manual mayappear in the information display.

NOTE

This text can only be shown if the displayis undamaged and the vehicle's electricalsystem is intact.

Crash mode is a feature that is triggered ifone or more of the safety systems (e.g.front (p. 32) or side airbags (p. 39), an inflat-able curtain (p. 41), or one or more of the seatbelt pretensioners) has deployed. The colli-sion may have damaged an important func-tion in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sen-sors for one of the safety systems, the brakesystem, etc.

02 Safety

02

45

WARNING

• Never attempt to repair the vehicleyourself or to reset the electrical sys-tem after the vehicle has displayedSafety mode See manual. This couldresult in injury or improper systemfunction.

• Restoring the vehicle to normal operat-ing status should only be done by atrained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

• After Safety mode See manual hasbeen displayed, if you detect the odorof fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuelleakage, do not attempt to start thevehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately.

Related information• Crash mode – starting the vehicle

(p. 45)

• Crash mode – moving the vehicle(p. 45)

Crash mode – starting the vehicleIf Crash mode has been set Crashmode (p. 44)) and damage to the vehicle isminor and there is no fuel leakage, you mayattempt to start the engine.

To do so:

1. Remove the remote key from the ignitionslot and open the driver's door. If a mes-sage is displayed that the ignition is on,press the start button.

2. Close the driver's door and reinsert theremote key in the ignition slot.

3. Try to start the vehicle.

WARNING

If the message Safety mode See manualis still displayed, the vehicle should not bedriven and must be towed. Concealedfaults may make the vehicle difficult tocontrol.

Related information• Crash mode – general information (p. 44)

• Crash mode – moving the vehicle(p. 45)

Crash mode – moving the vehicleIf the message Normal mode appears afteran attempt has been made to start the engine,Starting the vehicle after a crash (p. 45), thevehicle may be moved carefully from its pres-ent position, if for example, it is blocking traf-fic. It should, however, not be moved fartherthan is absolutely necessary.

WARNING

Even if the vehicle appears to be drivableafter Crash mode has been set, it shouldnot be driven or towed (pulled by anothervehicle). There may be concealed damagethat could make it difficult or impossible tocontrol. The vehicle should be transportedon a flatbed tow truck to a trained andqualified Volvo service technician forinspection/repairs.

Related information• Crash mode – general information (p. 44)

02 Safety

02

46

Child safetyChildren should always be seated safely whentraveling in the vehicle.

General informationVolvo recommends the proper use of restraintsystems (p. 47) for all occupants includingchildren. Remember that, regardless of ageand size, a child should always be properlyrestrained in a vehicle.

Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH attachments (p. 55), which make itmore convenient to install child seats.

Some restraint systems for children aredesigned to be secured in the vehicle by lapbelts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.Such child restraint systems can help protectchildren in vehicles in the event of an acci-dent only if they are used properly. However,children could be endangered in a crash if thechild restraints are not properly secured in thevehicle. Failure to follow the installationinstructions for your child restraint can resultin your child striking the vehicle's interior in asudden stop.

Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitablesubstitute for a child restraint system. In anaccident, a child held in a person's arms canbe crushed between the vehicle's interior andan unrestrained person. The child could alsobe injured by striking the interior, or by beingejected from the vehicle during a suddenmaneuver or impact. The same can also hap-

pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained onthe seat. Other occupants should also beproperly restrained to help reduce the chanceof injuring or increasing the injury of a child.

All states and provinces have legislation gov-erning how and where children should be car-ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulationsexisting in your state or province. Recentaccident statistics have shown that childrenare safer in rear seating positions than frontseating positions when properly restrained. Achild restraint system can help protect a childin a vehicle. Here's what to look for whenselecting a child restraint system:

It should have a label certifying that it meetsapplicable Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada,CMVSS 213.

Make sure the child restraint system isapproved for the child's height, weight anddevelopment – the label required by thestandard or regulation, or instructions forinfant restraints, typically provide this infor-mation.

In using any child restraint system, we urgeyou to carefully look over the instructions thatare provided with the restraint. Be sure youunderstand them and can use the deviceproperly and safely in this vehicle. A misusedchild restraint system can result in increasedinjuries for both the infant or child and otheroccupants in the vehicle.

When a child has outgrown the child safetyseat, you should use the rear seat with thestandard seat belt fastened. The best way tohelp protect the child here is to place thechild on a cushion so that the seat belt isproperly located on the hips (see Boostercushions (p. 54) for illustration). Legislationin your state or province may mandate theuse of a child seat or cushion in combinationwith the seat belt, depending on the child'sage and/or size. Please check local regula-tions.

A specially designed and tested boostercushion and backrest can be obtained fromyour Volvo retailer.

USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) inheight

Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs.(18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) in height

02 Safety

02

}}47

WARNING

• Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in thefront passenger's seat. We also rec-ommend that children under 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) in height who haveoutgrown these devices sit in the rearseat with the seat belt fastened.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure to these high temperaturesfor even a short period of time cancause heat-related injury or death.Small children are particularly at risk.

Child seat should always be registered. SeeChild restraints (p. 47) for more information.

Volvo's recommendationsWhy does Volvo believe that no child shouldsit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simplereally. A front airbag (p. 32) is a very powerfuldevice designed, by law, to help protect anadult.

Because of the size of the airbag and itsspeed of inflation, a child should never beplaced in the front seat, even if he or she isproperly belted or strapped into a child safetyseat. Volvo has been an innovator in safetyfor over seventy-five years, and we'll continueto do our part. But we need your help. Pleaseremember to put your children in the backseat, and buckle them up.

Volvo has some very specificrecommendations:• Always wear your seat belt (p. 28).

• Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safetydevice which, when used with a three-point seat belt can help reduce seriousinjuries during certain types of accidents.Volvo recommends that you do not dis-connect the airbag system in your vehi-cle.

• Volvo strongly recommends that every-one in the vehicle be properly restrained.

• Volvo recommends that ALL occupants(adults and children) shorter than 4 feet7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the backseat of any vehicle with a front passengerside airbag.

• Drive safely!

Related information• Infant seats (p. 49)

• Convertible seats (p. 51)

• Booster cushions (p. 54)

• Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation (p. 57)

• Child safety locks (p. 61)

• Top tether anchors (p. 56)

Child restraintsSuitable child restraints should always beused when children travel in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems

G022840

Infant seat

There are three main types of child restraintsystems: infant seats (p. 49), convertibleseats (p. 51), and booster cush-ions (p. 54). They are classified according tothe child's age and size.

The following section provides general infor-mation on securing a child restraint using athree-point seat belt (p. 28). Refer to ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) and Top tetheranchors (p. 56) for information on securinga child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH loweranchors and/or top tether anchorages.

||02 Safety

02

48

G022847

Convertible seat

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to causethe airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri-ous injury or death to a child seated in thisposition.

G023269

Booster cushion

WARNING

Always refer to the child restraint manufac-turer's instructions for detailed informationon securing the restraint.

WARNING

• When not in use, keep the childrestraint system secured or remove itfrom the passenger compartment tohelp prevent it from injuring passen-gers in the event of a sudden stop orcollision.

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing,properly restrained, as long as possi-ble.

Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR)To make child seat installation easier, eachseat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip-ped with a locking mechanism to help keepthe seat belt taut.

02 Safety

02

}}49

When attaching the seat belt to a childseat:1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat

according to the child seat manufactur-er's instructions.

2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible.

3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into thebuckle (lock) in the usual way.

4. Release the seat belt and pull it tautaround the child seat.

A sound from the seat belt retractor will beaudible at this time and is normal. The beltwill now be locked in place. This function isautomatically disabled when the seat belt isunlocked and the belt is fully retracted.

WARNING

Do not use child safety seats or childbooster cushions/backrests in the frontpassenger's seat. We also recommendthat children who have outgrown thesedevices sit in the rear seat with the seatbelt properly fastened.

Child restraint registration and recallsChild restraints could be recalled for safetyreasons. You must register your childrestraint to be reached in a recall. To stayinformed about child safety seat recalls, besure to fill out and return the registration cardthat comes with new child restraints.

Child restraint recall information is readilyavailable in both the U.S. and Canada. Forrecall information in the U.S., call the U.S.Government's Auto Safety Hotline at1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visitTransport Canada's Child Safety website athttp://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm.

Related information• Child safety locks (p. 61)

• Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation (p. 57)

Infant seatsSuitable child restraints should always beused when children (depending on their age/size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing an infant seat with a seat belt

G022844

Do not place the infant seat in the front passeng-er's seat

NOTE

Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for infor-mation on securing a child restraint usingISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or toptether anchorages.

1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat ofthe vehicle.

2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seataccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

||02 Safety

02

50

G023270

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat

WARNING

• An infant seat must be in the rear-facingposition only.

• The infant seat should not be positionedbehind the driver's seat unless there isadequate space for safe installation.

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehiclesequipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). Ifthe severity of an accident were to causethe airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri-ous injury or death to a child seated in thisposition.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

G023271

Fasten the seat belt

G022846

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate thebelt's automatic locking function.

02 Safety

02

}}51

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckledand allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, letthe seat belt retract and pull it taut. Asound from the seat belt retractor's auto-matic locking function will be audible atthis time and is normal. The seat beltshould now be locked in place.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

6. Push and pull the infant seat along theseat belt path to ensure that it is heldsecurely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint (child seat) more than 1 in.(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat beltpath.

The infant seat can be removed by unbuck-ling the seat belt and letting it retract com-pletely.

Related information• Child safety (p. 46)

• Child restraints (p. 47)

• Convertible seats (p. 51)

• Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation (p. 57)

• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

• Top tether anchors (p. 56)

Convertible seatsSuitable child restraints should always beused when children (depending on their age/size) are seated in the vehicle.

Securing a convertible seat with a seatbelt

G018630

Do not place the convertible seat in the frontpassenger's seat

NOTE

Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for informa-tion on securing a child restraint usingISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or toptether anchorages.

Convertible seats can be used in either a for-ward or rearward-facing position, dependingon the age and size of the child.

||02 Safety

02

52

G022847

Route the seat belt through the convertible seat

WARNING

Always use a convertible seat that is suita-ble for the child's age and size. See theconvertible seat manufacturer's recom-mendations.

1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seatof the vehicle.

WARNING

• A small child's head represents a con-siderable part of its total weight and itsneck is still very weak. Volvo recom-mends that children up to age 4 travel,properly restrained, facing rearward. Inaddition, Volvo recommends that chil-dren should ride rearward facing, prop-erly restrained, as long as possible.

• Convertible child seats should be instal-led in the rear seat only.

• A rear-facing convertible seat shouldnot be positioned behind the driver'sseat unless there is adequate space forsafe installation.

2. Attach the seat belt to the convertibleseat according to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

G022848

Fasten the seat belt

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat beltout as far as possible to activate thebelt's automatic locking function.

02 Safety

02

53

NOTE

The locking retractor will automaticallyrelease when the seat belt is unbuckledand allowed to retract fully.

5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place,let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. Asound from the seat belt retractor's auto-matic locking function will be audible atthis time and is normal. The seat beltshould now be locked in place.

G022849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt

6. Push and pull the convertible seat alongthe seat belt path to ensure that it is heldsecurely in place by the seat belt.

WARNING

It should not be possible to move the childrestraint (child seat) more than 1 in.(2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat beltpath.

The convertible seat can be removed byunbuckling the seat belt and letting it retractcompletely.

G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place

WARNING

A child seat should never be used in thefront passenger seat of any vehicle with afront passenger airbag – not even if the"Passenger airbag off" symbol near therear-view mirror is illuminated. If theseverity of an accident were to cause theairbag to inflate, this could lead to seriousinjury or death to a child seated in thisposition.

Related information• Child safety (p. 46)

• Child restraints (p. 47)

• Infant seats (p. 49)

• Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation (p. 57)

• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

• Top tether anchors (p. 56)

02 Safety

02

54

Booster cushionsBooster cushions should be properly posi-tioned in the vehicle.

Securing a booster cushion

G022851

Position the child correctly on the booster cush-ion

Booster cushions are recommended for chil-dren who have outgrown convertibleseats (p. 51).

1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seatof the vehicle.

2. With the child properly seated on thebooster cushion, attach the seat belt to oraround the cushion according to themanufacturer's instructions.

3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latchplate into the buckle (lock) until a distinctclick is audible.

G022852

Positioning the seat belt

4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled tautand fits snugly around the child.

WARNING

• The hip section of the three-point seatbelt must fit snugly across the child'ships, not across the stomach.

• The shoulder section of the three-pointseat belt should be positioned acrossthe chest and shoulder.

• The shoulder belt must never beplaced behind the child's back orunder the arm.

Related information• Child safety (p. 46)

• Child restraints (p. 47)

• Infant seats (p. 49)

• Convertible seats (p. 51)

• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

• Top tether anchors (p. 56)

02 Safety

02

}}55

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchorsLower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equippedchild seats are located in the rear, outboardseats, hidden below the backrest cushions.

Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower childseat anchors

Symbols on the seat back upholstery markthe ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions asshown. To access the anchors, kneel on theseat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.Always follow your child seat manufacturer'sinstallation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top teth-ers (p. 56) whenever possible.

To access the anchors1. Put the child restraint in position.

2. Kneel on the child restraint to press downthe seat cushion and locate the anchorsby feel.

3. Fasten the attachment on the childrestraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/LATCH/LATCH lower anchors.

4. Firmly tension the lower child seat strapsaccording to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

WARNING

Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform toFMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer tothe child restraint system's manual forweight and size ratings.

NOTE

• The rear seat's center position is notequipped with ISOFIX/LATCH loweranchors. When installing a childrestraint in this position, attach therestraint's top tether strap (if it is soequipped) to the top tether anchoragepoint and secure the restraint with thevehicle's center seat belt.

• Always follow your child seat manufac-turer's installation instructions, anduse both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchorsand top tethers whenever possible.

G018631

Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors

WARNING

• Be sure to fasten the attachment cor-rectly to the anchor (see the illustra-tion). If the attachment is not correctlyfastened, the child restraint may notbe properly secured in the event of acollision.

• The ISOFIX/LATCH lower childrestraint anchors are only intended foruse with child seats positioned in theoutboard seating positions. Theseanchors are not certified for use withany child restraint that is positioned inthe center seating position. Whensecuring a child restraint in the centerseating position, use only the vehicle'scenter seat belt.

||02 Safety

02

56

Related information• Child safety (p. 46)

• Infant seats (p. 49)

• Convertible seats (p. 51)

• Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation (p. 57)

Top tether anchorsYour Volvo is equipped with child restraint toptether anchorages in the rear seat. They arelocated on the rear side of the backrests.

Child restraint anchorages

Securing a child seat1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat.

2. Route the top tether strap under the headrestraint and attach it to the anchor.

3. Attach lower tether straps to the lowerISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the childrestraint is not equipped with lower tetherstraps, or the restraint is used in the cen-ter seating position, follow instructions forsecuring a child restraint using the Auto-matic Locking Retractor seat belt (seeChild restraints (p. 47)).

4. Firmly tension all straps.

Refer also to the child seat manufacturer'sinstructions for information on securing thechild seat.

NOTE

On models equipped with the optionalcargo area cover, this cover should beremoved before a child seat is attached tothe child restraint anchors.

WARNING

• Always refer to the recommendationsmade by the child restraint manufac-turer.

• Volvo recommends that the top tetheranchors be used when installing a for-ward-facing child restraint.

• Never route a top tether strap over thetop of the head restraint. The strapshould be routed beneath the headrestraint.

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fitted childrestraints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses. The anchorages are notable to withstand excessive forces onthem in the event of collision if full har-ness seat belts or adult seat belts areinstalled to them. An adult who uses abelt anchored in a child restraintanchorage runs a great risk of suffer-

02 Safety

02

}}57

ing severe injuries should a collisionoccur.

• Do not install rear speakers thatrequire the removal of the top tetheranchors or interfere with the properuse of the top tether strap.

Related information• Child safety (p. 46)

• Infant seats (p. 49)

• Convertible seats (p. 51)

• Integrated booster cushion – generalinformation (p. 57)

• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55)

Integrated booster cushion – generalinformationThe booster cushions are designed to raisethe child higher so that the shoulder strapcrosses over the child's collarbone, not overthe neck.

Integrated two-stage booster cushion2

Volvo's optional integrated booster cushionsare located in the outboard seating positions.These booster cushions have been speciallydesigned to help safeguard children in therear seat. They should be stowed (p. 60)(folded down into the seat cushion) when notin use. When using an integrated boostercushion (p. 59), the child must be securedwith the vehicle's three-point seat belt.

Use these booster cushions onlywith children whose weight isbetween:• Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg)• Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg)and whose height is between:• Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 –

140 cm)• Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)

In Canada, Transport Canada'sweight recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg).If using a booster cushion does not result inproper positioning of the shoulder strap, thenthe child should be placed in a properlysecured child restraint (see (p. 47) ). Theshoulder belt must never be placed behindthe child's back or under the arm.

Correct seating position: child's head is belowthe head restraint and the shoulder belt is acrossthe collarbone

2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion.

||02 Safety

02

58

Incorrect seating position: the child's head isabove the head restraint and the shoulder belt isnot across the collarbone

Before driving, check that:

• The integrated two-stage booster cushionis set in the correct position according tothe child's height and weight (see thetable below) and is locked in position.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 48 – 80 lbs

22 – 36 kg

33 – 55 lbs

15 – 25 kg

Height 45 – 55 in.

115 – 140 cm

37 – 47 in.

95 – 120 cm

• That the seat belt (p. 28) is properly posi-tioned and is taut.

• The shoulder section of the seat belt isacross the child's collarbone, not over theneck.

• The lap section of the seat belt is acrossthe child's hips and not the abdomen.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY canoccurFollow all instructions on thebooster cushion and in the vehi-cle's owner's manual.MAKE SURE THE BOOSTERCUSHION IS SECURELYLOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD ISSEATED.• Use this booster cushion only with

children whose height and weight arewithin the permitted limits shown inthe table (Integrated booster cushion –general information (p. 57)).

• In the event of a collision while theintegrated booster cushion was occu-pied, the entire booster cushion andseat belt must be replaced. Thebooster cushion should also bereplaced if it is badly worn or damagedin any way. This work should be per-formed by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician only.

Related information• Child safety (p. 46)

• Infant seats (p. 49)

• Convertible seats (p. 51)

• Booster cushions (p. 54)

02 Safety

02

}}59

Integrated booster cushion – usingThe Integrated booster cushion (p. 57) in therear seat can be folded up in two stages,depending on the child's height and weight.

Stage 1

Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2)to release the booster cushion.

Press the booster cushion rearward tolock it in position.

Stage 2

With the booster cushion in the stage 1position, press the button (see the arrowin illustration 1).

Lift the front edge of the booster cushionand press it rearward toward the backrestto lock it in position.

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY canoccurFollow all instructions on thebooster cushion and in the vehi-cle's owner's manual.MAKE SURE THE BOOSTERCUSHION IS SECURELYLOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD ISSEATED.• Use this booster cushion only with

children whose height and weight arewithin the permitted limits shown inthe table (Integrated booster cushion –general information (p. 57)).

• In the event of a collision while theintegrated booster cushion was occu-pied, the entire booster cushion andseat belt must be replaced. Thebooster cushion should also bereplaced if it is badly worn or damagedin any way. This work should be per-formed by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician only.

||02 Safety

02

60

Related information• Integrated booster cushion – stowing

(p. 60)

Integrated booster cushion – stowingThe integrated booster cushion (p. 57) can befolded down completely (stowed) from eitherthe stage 1 or stage 2 positions.

NOTE

The booster cushion cannot be movedfrom the stage 2 (upper) position to thestage 1 (lower) position. It must first befolded down completely to the stowedposition, and then adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release thebooster cushion.

Press down on the center of the boostercushion to return it to the stowed posi-tion.

NOTE

The booster cushion must be in thestowed position before the rear seat back-rests are folded down.

CAUTION

Be sure there are no loose objects underthe booster cushion before it is stowed.

02 Safety

02

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

WARNING

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY canoccurFollow all instructions on thebooster cushion and in the vehi-cle's owner's manual.MAKE SURE THE BOOSTERCUSHION IS SECURELYLOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD ISSEATED.• Use this booster cushion only with

children whose height and weight arewithin the permitted limits shown inthe table (Integrated booster cushion –general information (p. 57)).

• In the event of a collision while theintegrated booster cushion was occu-pied, the entire booster cushion andseat belt must be replaced. Thebooster cushion should also bereplaced if it is badly worn or damagedin any way. This work should be per-formed by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician only.

Related information• Integrated booster cushion – using (p. 59)

Child safety locksPower child safety locks* help prevent chil-dren from inadvertently opening one of therear doors or windows from inside the vehicle.

Manual child safety locks

G021077

Child safety locks – rear doorsThe controls are located on the rear doorjambs. Use the remote control's key blade ora screwdriver to adjust these controls.

The rear doors can only be opened fromthe outside when the slot is in the hori-zontal position.

The rear doors can be opened from theinside when the slot is in the vertical posi-tion.

Power child safety locks anddisengaging rear door windows*

Driver's door control panel

The power child safety locks can be acti-vated/deactivated when the remote key is inmode I (p. 79) or higher. Activation/deacti-vation can be done up to 2 minutes after theengine has been switched off (if no door hasbeen opened).

To activate the child safety locks:

1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher, orstart the engine.

2. Press the button on the driver's door con-trol panel (see the illustration).> Rear child locks Activated will be

displayed in the instrument panel andthe indicator light in the button will illu-minate when the function is activated.

When the child safety locks are activated:

||02 Safety

02

62

• The rear door windows can only beopened from the driver's door controlpanel

• The rear doors cannot be opened fromthe inside

The child safety locks' current setting isstored when the engine is switched off. Ifthese locks were activated when the enginewas switched off, they will also be activewhen the engine is restarted.

Related information• Detachable key blade – general informa-

tion (p. 155)

• Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

03 Instruments and controls

03

64

Instrument overview This overview shows the location of theinstrument panel and center console displays,and controls/buttons/switches.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}65

||03 Instruments and controls

03

66

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Function See

Controls for menusand messages, turnsignals, high/lowbeams, trip computer

(p. 76),(p. 95),(p. 89),(p. 115)

Paddles for manuallyshifting gears*

(p. 254)

Cruise control (p. 181)

Horn, airbag (p. 87),(p. 32)

Main instrumentpanel

(p. 68)

Infotainment system/Bluetooth hands-freecontrols

Sensus Info-tainmentsupplement

START/STOPENGINE button

(p. 78)

Ignition slot (p. 78)

Display for infotain-ment system func-tions and menus

(p. 113),Sensus Info-tainmentsupplement

Door handle -

Function See

In-door control pan-els (power windows,mirrors, central lock-ing button, powerchild safety locks)

(p. 100),(p. 102),(p. 164),(p. 61)

Hazard warningflashers

(p. 94)

Controls for the info-tainment system andmenus

(p. 76),(p. 129),Sensus Info-tainmentsupplement

Climate system con-trols

(p. 129)

Gear selector (p. 252)

Controls for activechassis (Four-C)*

(p. 174)

Wipers and washers (p. 98),(p. 99)

Steering wheeladjustment

(p. 87)

Hood opening control (p. 328)

Parking brake (p. 269)

Function See

Lighting panel, but-tons for opening fuelfiller door andunlocking the tailgate

(p. 89),(p. 278),(p. 166)

Power seat* adjust-ment controls

(p. 81)

Related information• Information displays – ambient tempera-

ture sensor (p. 77)

• Information displays – trip odometer andclock (p. 78)

03 Instruments and controls

03

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information displays – introductionThe displays show information on some of thevehicle's functions, such as cruise control, thetrip computer and messages. The informationis shown with text and symbols.

Information displays: analog instrument panel

Information displays: digital instrument panel*

More detailed information can be found in thedescriptions of the functions that use theinformation displays.

Gauges and indicators: analoginstrument panel

Fuel gauge: When the indicator showsone white marking1, a yellow indicatorlight will illuminate to indicate a low fuellevel. See also Trip computer – introduc-tion (p. 115) and Refueling – fuel require-ments (p. 276) for additional information.

Eco meter: Indicates how economicallythe vehicle is being driven. The higher theneedle moves on the scale, the moreeconomically the vehicle is being driven.

Speedometer

Tachometer: Shows engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm)

Gear indicator: Shows the currentlyselected gear

Gauges and indicators: digitalinstrument panel*Different themes (display alternatives) can beselected for the digital instrument panel:

• Elegance

• Eco

• Performance

To change themes, press the OK button onthe left steering wheel lever and use thethumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OKto confirm your choice.

1 When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69

Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator showsone white marking, a yellow indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate a low fuel level.See also Trip computer – introduction(p. 115) and Refueling – fuel require-ments (p. 276) for additional information.

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousandsof revolutions per minute (rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currentlyselected gear

Theme Eco: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows awhite marking, a yellow indicator light willilluminate to indicate a low fuel level. Seealso Trip computer – introduction (p. 115)and Refueling – fuel requirements(p. 276) for additional information.

Eco Guide (see Eco Guide* and PowerMeter* (p. 71))

Speedometer

Tachometer (engine speed in thousandsof revolutions per minute (rpm))

Gear indicator: Shows the currentlyselected gear

Theme Performance: gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows awhite marking, a yellow indicator light willilluminate to indicate a low fuel level. Seealso Trip computer – introduction (p. 115)and Refueling – fuel requirements(p. 276) for additional information.

Coolant temperature gauge

Speedometer

Tachometer (shows engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute(rpm))

Power Meter (see Eco Guide* and PowerMeter* (p. 71)).

Gear indicator: Shows the currentlyselected gear

||03 Instruments and controls

03

70

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: analog instru-ment panel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrumentpanel

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols

Function checkAll indicator and warning symbols light up inignition mode II or when the engine is started.When the engine has started, all the symbolsshould go out except the parking brake sym-bol, which only goes out when the brake isdisengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functioncheck is carried out in ignition mode II, allsymbols go out after 5 seconds except themalfunction indicator light, which may indi-cate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system,and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Some of the symbols shown may not beavailable in all markets or models.

Related information• Instrument overview (p. 64)

• Information displays – indicator symbols(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71

Eco Guide* and Power Meter*Eco guide and Power guide are two gauges inthe instrument panel that help improve drivingeconomy.

The vehicle also stores driving-related statis-tics in the form of a bar graph, see Trip com-puter – Trip statistics (p. 123).

Introduction

To display or remove these functions from theinstrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (seeInformation displays – introduction (p. 68)).

Driving statistics are also stored and can bedisplayed in the form of a bar chart (see Tripcomputer – Trip statistics (p. 123)).

Eco GuideThis gauge gives an indication of how eco-nomically the vehicle is being driven.

Current (instantaneous) reading

Average

Current (instantaneous) readingThis is the current level of economical driving;the higher the reading, the more economicallythe vehicle is being driven.

This value is calculated based on the vehi-cle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine loadand brake use.

The optimal speed range is between approxi-mately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably atas low rpm as possible. The markers fallwhen the brake or accelerator pedal ispressed.

If the current reading is very low, the red fieldin the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay,indicating low driving economy.

AverageThe average reading changes graduallyaccording to changes in the current readingto indicate how economically the vehicle hasbeen driven recently. The higher the averagereading, the more economically the vehiclehas been driven.

Power MeterThis gauge indicates the engine power thathas been utilized and the amount of powerremaining.

Available power

Utilized power

||03 Instruments and controls

03

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Available powerThe smaller, upper indicator shows theengine's available power2. The higher thereading on the scale, the greater the amountof power remaining in the current gear.

Utilized powerThe larger, lower indicator shows the amountof engine power that has been utilized2. Thehigher the reading on the scale, the greaterthe amount of power that is being utilized.

The larger the gap between the two indica-tors, the greater the amount of power remain-ing.

Information displays – indicatorsymbolsThe indicator symbols alert the driver whencertain functions are activated, that a systemis actively working or that a fault may haveoccurred in a system or function.

Symbol Description

Fault in the Active BendingLight (ABL)*system

Malfunction indicator light

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

Rear fog lights on

Stability system

The stability system's Sportmode is activated

Low fuel level

Information symbol, read thetext displayed in the instrumentpanel

High beam indicator

Symbol Description

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

Tire pressure monitoring sensor(TPMS)A

The Eco function is on.

TheStart/Stop function is active(the engine has auto-stopped)

A Option in Canada

Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)systemThis symbol will illuminate if there is a fault inthe ABL system. See Active Bending Lights(ABL)* (p. 92) for more information aboutthis system.

2 Depending on rpm

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73

Malfunction Indicator LightAs you drive, a computer called On-BoardDiagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle'sengine, transmission, electrical and emissionsystems.

The malfunction indicator light will illuminate ifthe computer senses a condition that poten-tially may need correcting. When this hap-pens, please have your vehicle checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianas soon as possible.

A malfunction indicator light may have manycauses. Sometimes, you may not notice achange in your car's behavior. Even so, anuncorrected condition could hurt fuel econ-omy, emission controls, and drivability.Extended driving without correcting the causecould even damage other components inyour vehicle.

This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap isnot closed tightly or if the engine was runningwhile the vehicle was refueled.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)If the warning light comes on, there may be amalfunction in the ABS system (the standardbraking system will still function). Check thesystem by:

1. Stopping in a safe place and switching offthe ignition.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the warning light goes off, no furtheraction is required.

If the indicator light remains on, the vehicleshould be driven to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for inspection, seeBrakes – general (p. 266) for additional infor-mation.

Rear fog lightsThis symbol indicates that the rear fog lightsare on.

Stability systemThis indicator symbol flashes when the stabil-ity system is actively working to stabilize thevehicle, see Stability system – introduction(p. 174) for more detailed information.

Stability system - Sport modeThis symbol illuminates to indicate that thestability system's Sport mode has been acti-vated to help provide maximum tractive force,for example when driving with snow chains,or driving in deep snow or loose sand.

Low fuel levelWhen this light comes on, the vehicle shouldbe refueled as soon as possible. See Refuel-ing – fuel requirements (p. 276) for informa-tion about fuel and refueling.

Information symbolThe information symbol lights up and a textmessage is displayed to provide the driverwith necessary information about one of thevehicle's systems. The message can beerased and the symbol can be turned off by

pressing the OK button (see Information dis-play – menu controls (p. 113) for information)or this will take place automatically after ashort time (the length of time varies, depend-ing on the function affected).

The information symbol may also illuminatetogether with other symbols.

High beam indicatorThis symbol illuminates when the high beamheadlights are on, or if the high beam flashfunction is used.

Left turn signal indicator

Right turn signal indicator

NOTE

• Both turn signal indicators will flashwhen the hazard warning flashers areused.

• If either of these indicators flash fasterthan normal, the direction indicatorsare not functioning properly.

Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)*This symbol illuminates to indicate that tirepressure in one or more tires is low, see TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – generalinformation (p. 307) for detailed information.

Eco* function onThe symbol will illuminate when the Eco func-tion is activated.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Start/stop*The symbol illuminates when the engine hasauto-stopped.

Related information• Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

Information displays – warningsymbolsThe warning lights alert the driver that animportant function is activated or that a seri-ous fault has occurred.

Symbol Description

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake appliedB

SRS airbags

Seat belt reminder

Generator not charging

Fault in the brake system

Warning symbol, read the textdisplayed in the instrumentpanel

A Certain engines do not use this symbol to indicate low oilpressure. On these models, a text message will be dis-played on the instrument panel instead, see Engine com-partment – engine oil (p. 330).

B The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digitalinstrument panel.

Low oil pressureIf the light comes on while driving, stop thevehicle, stop the engine immediately, andcheck the engine oil level. Add oil if neces-

sary. If the oil level is normal and the lightstays on after restart, have the vehicle towedto the nearest trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Parking brake appliedThis symbol flashes while the brake is beingapplied and then glows steadily when theparking brake has been set.

See Parking brake – general information(p. 269) for more information about using theparking brake.

Airbags – SRSIf this light comes on while the vehicle isbeing driven, or remains on for longer thanapproximately 10 seconds after the vehiclehas been started, the SRS system's diagnos-tic functions have detected a fault in a seatbelt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, sideimpact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain.Have the system(s) inspected by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician assoon as possible.

See Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)(p. 31) for more information about the airbagsystem.

Seat belt reminderThis symbol comes on for approximately6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his orher seat belt.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}75

Generator not chargingThis symbol comes on during driving if a faulthas occurred in the electrical system. Contactan authorized Volvo workshop.

Engine temperatureEngine overheating can result from low oil orcoolant levels, towing or hard driving at highheat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction.Engine overheating will be signaled with textand a red warning triangle in the middle of theinstrument display. The exact text will dependon the degree of overheating. It may rangefrom High engine temp Reduce speed toHigh engine temp Stop engine. If appropri-ate, other messages, such as Coolant levellow, Stop safely will also be displayed. Ifyour engine does overheat so that you muststop the engine, always allow the engine tocool before attempting to check oil and cool-ant levels.

See Engine compartment – coolant (p. 332)for more information.

Fault in brake systemIf this symbol lights, the brake fluid level maybe too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe placeand check the level in the brake fluid reser-voir, see Engine compartment – brake fluid(p. 333). If the level in the reservoir is belowMIN, the vehicle should be transported to anauthorized Volvo workshop to have the brakesystem checked.

If the and symbols come onat the same time, there may be a fault in thebrake force distribution system.

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turnoff the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

• If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-ing.

• If the symbols remain on, check the levelin the brake fluid reservoir, see Enginecompartment – brake fluid (p. 333). If thebrake fluid level is normal but the sym-bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven,with great care, to an authorized Volvoworkshop to have the brake systemchecked.

• If the level in the reservoir is below MIN,the vehicle should be transported to anauthorized Volvo workshop to have thebrake system checked.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a warning mes-sage is displayed in the text window:DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicletowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brakesystem inspected.

•If the and symbolsare on at the same time, there is a riskof reduced vehicle stability.

Warning symbolThe red warning symbol lights up to indicatea problem related to safety and/or drivability.A message will also appear in the instrumentpanel. The symbol remains visible until thefault has been rectified but the text messagecan be cleared with the OK button, see Infor-mation display – menu controls (p. 113). Thewarning symbol can also come on in conjunc-tion with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive thevehicle further.

2. Read the information on the display.Implement the action in accordance withthe message in the display. Clear themessage using OK.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

76

Reminder – doors not closedIf one of the doors is not closed properly, theinformation or warning symbol illuminates(depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphicwill be displayed in instrument panel and anexplanatory text message3 will also be dis-played in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place as soon as possible andclose the door.

If the vehicle is driven at a speedlower than approximately 5 mph(7 km/h), the information symbol illu-

minates.

If the vehicle is driven at a speedhigher than approximately 5 mph(7 km/h), the warning symbol illumi-

nates.

If the hood is not closed properly, the warn-ing symbol illuminates, a graphic will be dis-played in instrument panel and an explana-tory text message3 will also be displayed inthe instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in asafe place as soon as possible and close thehood.

If the tailgate is not closed properly, theinformation symbol illuminates and a graphicwill be displayed in instrument panel. Stopthe vehicle in a safe place as soon as possi-ble and close the tailgate.

Related information• Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

• Information displays – indicator symbols(p. 72)

My Car – introductionThe MY CAR menu system provides accessto menus for operating many of the vehicle'sfunctions, such as setting the clock, door mir-rors, lock and alarm settings, etc.

Some of the features or functions are stand-ard; others are optional and vary according tomodel/market.

OperationUse the buttons on the center console or thesteering wheel keypad to navigate in themenus.

3 Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

The center console control panel and the steer-ing wheel keypad. The illustration is generic andthe appearance/location of the buttons may vary.

MY CAR: opens the MY CAR menu sys-tem.

OK/MENU: Press the button on the cen-ter console or the thumb wheel on thesteering wheel keypad to select a menualternative or to store a selected functionin the system's memory.

TUNE: Turn this control on the centerconsole or the thumb wheel on the steer-ing wheel keypad to navigate up/down ina menu.

EXIT

EXIT functionsDepending on which function the cursor ispointing to and the menu level, briefly press-ing EXIT will result in:

• An in-coming phone call will be rejected

• The current function will be cancelled

• Characters entered will be erased

• The most recent selection will be cancel-led

• Go back/up in the menu system

Pressing and holding EXIT takes you to thenormal view for MY CAR. If you are already innormal view, this will take you to the mainsource menu.

Menu selections and pathsPlease consult your Sensus Infotainment sup-plement for a description of the MY CARmenu selections and paths.

Information displays – ambienttemperature sensor

Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A:digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrumentpanel

NOTE

When the ambient temperature is between23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflakesymbol will be displayed next to the tem-perature. This symbol serves as a warningfor possible slippery road surfaces. Pleasenote that this symbol does not indicate afault with your vehicle.

At low speeds or when the vehicle is notmoving, the temperature readings may beslightly higher than the actual ambienttemperature.

Related information• Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

03 Instruments and controls

03

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information displays – trip odometerand clockThe trip odometers T1 and T2 and clock aredisplayed in the instrument panel.

Trip odometers

Trip odometer4

Odometer display

Turn the thumb wheel on the left steeringwheel lever to display the desired trip odome-ter.

Press and hold the RESET button on the leftsteering wheel lever for at least 1 second toreset the selected trip odometer5.

Clock

Clock, digital instrument panel*

Display6

Setting the clockThe clock can be set in the MY CAR menusystem. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) foradditional information about these menus.

Go to Settings System options Timesettings. Set Auto time to ON (check thebox) and select the correct time zone underLocation.

Related information• Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

Inserting/removing remote keyThe remote key is used to start the engine orto use various electrical functions withoutstarting the engine.

Inserting and removing the remote key

Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOPENGINE button.

Inserting the remote key7

Holding the end of the remote key with thebase of the key blade, insert the remote keyinto the ignition slot as shown in the illustra-tion and press it in as far as possible.

CAUTION

Foreign objects in the ignition slot canimpair function or cause damage.

4 The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels5 Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information6 Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel7 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Removing the remote keyThe remote key can be removed from theignition slot by pulling it out.

Related information• Ignition modes (p. 79)

Ignition modesThe vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and IIthat can be used without starting the engine.The following table shows examples of whichfunctions are available in the respectivemodes.

NOTE

To access ignition modes I or II withoutstarting the engine, the brake pedal mustnot be depressed.

Mode Function

0 The odometer, clock and tem-perature gauge are illuminated.Power seats* can be adjustedand the infotainment system canbe used for a limited time (to min-imize battery drain, see the Sen-sus Infotainment Supplement).

I The laminated panoramic roof,power windows,12-volt socketsin the passenger compartment,navigation system*, climate sys-tem blower, windshield wiperscan be used.

II The headlights/taillights illumi-nate. Warning/indicator lights illu-minate for 5 seconds. Other sys-tems are activated. However, theheated seats* and heated rearwindow function can only be acti-vated when the engine is running.Mode II should only be used forvery short periods to help avoiddraining the battery.

Ignition modes

Ignition mode 0– The vehicle is unlocked.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Ignition mode I– With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot8, press START/STOPENGINE briefly.

Ignition mode II– With the remote key fully pressed into the

ignition slot8, press START/STOPENGINE for approximately 2 seconds.

Returning to mode 0To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, pressSTART/STOP ENGINE briefly.

Starting and stopping the engineSee Starting the engine (p. 247) and Switch-ing off the engine (p. 249) for information onstarting the engine and switching it off.

Emergency towingSee Towing the vehicle (p. 285) for importantinformation about the remote key when thevehicle is being towed.

Related information• Inserting/removing remote key (p. 78)

Front seatsThe front seats can be adjusted in a numberof ways to help provide the most comfortableseating position.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar andmove the seat to the position of yourchoice.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,pump up/down.

Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust theangle of the backrest.

Electronic lumbar support*. Press thebutton to adjust.

Control panel for power seat*, see Frontseats – power seat (p. 81).

WARNING

• Do not adjust the seat while driving.The seat should be adjusted so thatthe brake pedal can be depressedfully. In addition, position the seat asfar rearward as comfort and controlallow.

• Check that the seat is securely lockedinto position after adjusting.

Related information• Front seats – power seat (p. 81)

• Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 86)

• Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84)

8 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

Front seats – folding backrest*10

The front passenger's seat backrest can befolded down to make it easier to transportlong objects.

The front passenger seat backrest can befolded to a horizontal position to make roomfor a long load. Fold the backrest as follows:

Move the seat as far back and down aspossible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the back-rest.

Without releasing the catches, push thebackrest forward.

Move the seat as far forward as possibleso that the head restraint slides under theglove compartment.

Return the seat to its upright position in thereverse order.

WARNING

• When transporting long objects, coversharp edges on the load to help pre-vent injury to occupants. Secure theload to help prevent shifting duringsudden stops.

• When the seat's backrest is returnedto the upright position, push and pull itto be sure that it is securely locked inthis position.

Related information• Front seats (p. 80)

• Front seats – power seat (p. 81)

• Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 86)

• Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84)

Front seats – power seat12

The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a shortperiod after unlocking the door with theremote control without the key in the ignitionslot. Seat adjustment is normally made whenthe ignition is on and can always be madewhen the engine is running.

Power seat

Power seat adjustment controls

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Raise/lower the seat

Seat forward/rearward

Backrest tilt

Electronic lumbar support*

10 The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down12 Optional on certain models

||03 Instruments and controls

03

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Operation

NOTE

• Only one of the power seat's controlscan be used at the same time.

• The power seats have an overloadprotector that activates if a seat isblocked by any object. If this occurs,switch off the ignition (key in posi-tion 0) and wait for a short periodbefore operating the seat again.

Power seat memory function

Power seat memory buttons

Button for storing a position

Button for storing a position

Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

Programming the seat's memoryThree different seating and door mirror posi-tions can be stored in the driver seat's mem-ory.

The following example explains how button(1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3)are programmed in the same way.

To program (store) a seat and door mirrorposition in button (1):

1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to thedesired positions using the seat and mir-ror adjustment controls.

2. Press and hold down the M (memory)button (4).

3. With the memory button depressed,press button (1) briefly to store the cur-rent position for the seat/mirrors.

To move the seat and mirrors to the posi-tion that they were in when a button wasprogrammed:

– Press and hold down button (1) until theseat and mirrors stop moving.

NOTE

As a safety precaution, the seat will stopautomatically if the button is releasedbefore the seat has reached the presetposition.

Heated seats*See Heated seats (p. 130).

Related information• Front seats (p. 80)

• Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 86)

• Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Key memory – power driver's seat*and door mirrorsEach remote key has a memory that enables itto store (remember) the position of the powerdriver's seat and door mirrors when the vehi-cle is locked with that remote key.

Remote key memory and the powerdriver's seat* and door mirrors13

The key memory has to be activated for eachof the remote keys used in the vehicle asfollows:

1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot.

2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go toSettings Car settings Car keymemory

3. To activate the remote key memory fea-ture, press ENTER (check the box).> The remote key is now ready to store

the position of the power driver's seatand door mirrors.

Repeat this procedure for each of the vehi-cle's remote keys.

See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for adescription of the menu system.

Storing the positions of the powerdriver's seat/mirrors in the remote key1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the

desired position using the seat and mirroradjustment controls.

2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors withthe remote key (or close the driver's doorand press the lock button on the doorhandle with the remote key in your pos-session on vehicles with the optional key-less drive).> The positions of the power driver's

seat and door mirrors are now storedin the remote key's memory.

NOTE

The remote key's memory feature and thepower driver's seat memory function (thesettings made using the buttons on theside of the seat, see the section "Powerseat memory function" in Front seats –power seat (p. 81)) work independently ofeach other.

13 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

84

Returning the seat/mirrors to the storedpositionsTo move the seat and door mirrors to theposition stored in the remote key:

1. Unlock the driver's door with the sameremote key (the one used to lock thedoors). For models equipped with theoptional keyless drive, you must have thesame remote key in your possession.

2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes.

The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto-matically move to the position in which youleft them (if the vehicle has been unlockedwith one of the other keys and new seat/mirror adjustments have been made).

NOTE

• The seat will move to this positioneven if someone else has moved it to adifferent position and locked the vehi-cle with a different remote key.

• This feature will work in the same waywith all of the remote keys that youuse with your vehicle.

Emergency stop

WARNING

• Because the driver's seat can beadjusted with the ignition off, childrenshould never be left unattended in thevehicle.

• Movement of the seat can be STOP-PED at any time by pressing any but-ton on the power seat control panel.

• Do not adjust the seat while driving.The seat should be adjusted so thatthe brake pedal can be depressedfully. In addition, position the seat asfar rearward as comfort and controlallow.

• The seat rails on the floor must not beobstructed in any way when the seat isin motion.

Related information• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Rear seats – head restraintsThe rear seat head restraints can be foldeddown. The center head restraint can beraised/lowered according to the passenger'sheight.

Rear center head restraint

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}85

The center head restraint should be adjustedaccording to the passenger's height. Therestraint should be carefully adjusted to sup-port the occupant's head.

• Pull the head restraint up as required.

• To lower, press and hold the button(located at the center, between the back-rest and the head restraint) while pressingthe head restrain down carefully.

WARNING

The center rear seat head restraint shouldonly be in its lowest position when thisseat is NOT occupied. When the centerposition is occupied, the head restraintshould be correctly adjusted to the pas-senger’s height. The upper edge of thehead restraint should be at least on a levelwith the upper-most point of the seatoccupant's ear.

Manually folding down the rear seat'soutboard head restraints

• Pull the handle closest to the headrestraint to fold it down.

• To return the head restraint to the uprightposition, push it up until it clicks intoplace.

NOTE

• The head restraint must be returned tothe upright position manually.

• The outboard head restraints cannotbe folded down on models that are notequipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not bekept folded down for prolonged periods.This could result in pressure marks inleather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should beallowed to sit in the outboard rear seatpositions if the head restraints are foldeddown. If these positions are occupied, thehead restraints should be in the upright(fixed) position.

Automatically folding down the rearseat’s outboard head restraints

1. The ignition must be in mode II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear headrestraints for improved visibility.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

86

NOTE

• The head restraint must be returned tothe upright position manually.

• The outboard head restraints cannotbe folded down on models that are notequipped with this button.

CAUTION

The rear head restraints should not bekept folded down for prolonged periods.This could result in pressure marks inleather upholstery.

WARNING

For safety reasons, no one should beallowed to sit in the outboard rear seatpositions if the head restraints are foldeddown. If these positions are occupied, thehead restraints should be in the upright(fixed) position.

Related information• Front seats (p. 80)

• Front seats – power seat (p. 81)

• Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84)

Rear seats – folding backrestThe rear seat head restraints and backrestscan be folded down. The center headrestraint can be raised/lowered according tothe passenger's height.

Folding down the rear seat backrestsThe three sections of the rear seat backrestcan be folded down in different combinationsto make it easier to transport long objects.

• The left (driver's side) section can befolded down separately.

• The center section can be folded downseparately.

• The right (passenger's side) section canonly be folded down together with thecenter section.

• All three sections can be folded downtogether.

CAUTION

To help avoid damage to the upholstery,there should be no objects on the rear seatand the seat belt should not be buckledwhen the backrest is folded down.

Release and lower the center headrestraint (see Rear seats – head restraints(p. 84)) if the center and/or right section ofthe backrest is to be lowered. The out-board head restraints fold down automat-ically.

Pull up the backrest release control onthe respective section(s) ( ) and fold thesection(s) down. A red indicator ( )shows that the backrest is not locked inthe upright position.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

NOTE

It may be necessary to move the frontseats forward or put their backrests in amore upright position before folding downthe rear seat backrests.

WARNING

• When one or more sections of thebackrest is returned to the uprightposition, check that it is properlylocked in place by pushing and pullingit. The red indicators should also notbe visible.

• Return the outboard head restraints tothe upright position.

• Long loads should always be securelyanchored to help avoid injury in theevent of a sudden stop.

• Always turn the engine off and applythe parking brake when loading/unloading the vehicle.

• Place the transmission in the Park (P)position to help prevent inadvertentmovement of the gear selector.

• On hot days, the temperature in thevehicle interior can rise very quickly.Exposure of people to these high tem-peratures for even a short period oftime can cause heat-related injury ordeath. Small children are particularly atrisk.

Related information• Front seats (p. 80)

• Front seats – power seat (p. 81)

• Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84)

Steering wheelThe steering wheel can be adjusted to variouspositions and has controls for the horn, cruisecontrol*, menus, the infotainment system andBluetooth®-connected cell phone.

Adjusting

G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel

Lever for releasing/locking the steeringwheel

Possible positions

To adjust the steering wheel's height andreach:

1. Pull the lever toward you to release thesteering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the positionthat suits you.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Push back the lever to lock the steeringwheel in place. If the lever is difficult topush into place, press the steering wheellightly at the same time as you push thelever.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel while driv-ing.

With the optional speed-dependent powersteering the level of steering force can beadjusted, see Active chassis* (Four C)(p. 174).

Keypads and steering wheel paddles*

Steering wheel keypads and paddles*

Cruise control, see Cruise control (CC) –introduction (p. 181). Adaptive cruise

control*, see Adaptive Cruise Control –introduction (p. 184).

Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear-tronic), see Transmission – Geartronic(p. 254).

Infotainment system controls, see SensusInfotainment supplement.

Horn

Horn

– Press the steering wheel hub to soundthe horn.

Related information• Electrically heated* steering wheel

(p. 88)

Electrically heated* steering wheelThe steering wheel can be heated electrically.

Button for steering wheel heating

With the engine running, press this buttononce to begin warming the steering wheel(press again to switch off). The indicator lightin the button will illuminate when the functionis active.

This function can also be started automati-cally (the setting can be activated/deactivatedin the MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is coldand the ambient temperature is belowapproximately 50° F (10° C).

03 Instruments and controls

03

89

Lighting panelThe lighting panel is used to control the day-time running lights, parking lights, etc., and toadjust the instrument panel lighting and "the-ater" lighting (p. 93).

Lighting panel overview

Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru-ment and "theater" lighting (see Instru-ment and "theater" lighting (p. 93))

Rear fog lights (see Rear fog lights(p. 94))

Headlight switch

Volvo recommends using the posi-tion whenever possible.

Headlight switch positionsDaytime running lights function as follows:

With the headlight switch in the position:

• In the US: the daytime running lights willbe off

• In Canada: the daytime running lights willbe on

With the headlight switch in the 16

position and the ignition in mode II or if theengine is running (see Ignition modes (p. 79))

• In the US: the daytime running lights willbe off

• In Canada: the daytime running lights willbe on

With the headlight switch in the posi-tion:

• The daytime running lights will be on (thelow beam headlights will automaticallyswitch on in dark conditions)

US models only: The daytime running lightsin mode can be switched on or off inthe MY CAR menu system under SettingsCar settings Light settings Daytimerunning lights.

NOTE

The use of Daytime Running Lights is rec-ommended in the United States and ismandatory in Canada.

With the headlight switch in the posi-tion:

• The daytime running lights will be off andthe low beam headlights will be on

16 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

03 Instruments and controls

03

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

High/low beam headlightsWhen the engine is started, the low beamsare activated automatically if the headlightcontrol is in position .

Headlight switch and steering wheel lever

High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Continuous high beam headlightsWith the headlight switch in the (in darkconditions only, when the daytime runninglights have automatically switched off and thelow beam headlights have switched on) or

position:

• Pull the lever toward the steering wheel toposition 2 and release it to togglebetween low and high beams.

High beam flashPull the lever toward the steering wheel toposition 1. The high beams come on until thelever is released.

Related information• Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 92)

• Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)

• Lighting panel (p. 89)

• Tunnel detection (models with the rainsensor* only) (p. 92)

Active high beams (AHB)*AHB uses a camera at the upper edge of thewindshield to detect the headlights of oncom-ing vehicles or the taillights of a vehicledirectly ahead. When this happens, the head-lights will automatically switch from highbeams to low beams. When the camera nolonger detects the headlights/taillights ofother vehicles, your headlights will switchback to high beams after several seconds.

To activate AHB:

• Turn the headlight control to the position.

The feature will begin functioning if the enginehas been running for at least 20 seconds andthe vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph(20 km/h).

Headlight switch in the AUTO position

03 Instruments and controls

03

91

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steer-ing wheel lever rearward (toward the steeringwheel) as far as possible and releasing it. IfAHB is switched off while the high beams areon, the headlights will change to low beams.

Models with an analog instrument panelWhen AHB is activated, the symbol willilluminate in the instrument panel. The highbeam indicator ( ) in the instrument panelwill also illuminate when the high beams areon.

Models with a digital instrument panelWhen AHB is activated, will illuminateas a white symbol in the instrument panel.When the high beams are on, the symbol willchange to blue.

NOTE

• Keep the windshield in front of thecamera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc.

• Do not mount or in any way attachanything on the windshield that couldobstruct the camera.

If Active high beam Temporaryunavailable Switch manually is displayed inthe instrument panel, switching between highand low beams will have to be done man-ually. However, the light switch can remain inthe position. The same applies ifWindscreen Sensors blocked is displayedand the symbol is displayed. The symbol will go out when these messages aredisplayed.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., inheavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes activeagain or if the sensors in the windshield areno longer obscured, the messages will disap-pear and the symbol will illuminate.

CAUTION

In the following situations, it may be nec-essary to switch between high and lowbeams manually:

• In heavy fog or rain

• In blowing snow or slush

• In bright moonlight

• In freezing rain

• In areas with dim street lighting

• When oncoming vehicles have dimfront lighting

• If there are pedestrians on or near theroad

• If there are reflective objects, such assigns, near the road

• When oncoming vehicles' lights areobscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc.

• When there are vehicles on connectingroads

• At the top of hills or in dips in the road

• In sharp curves

See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) formore information about the camera's limita-tions.

Related information• High/low beam headlights (p. 90)

• Lighting panel (p. 89)

03 Instruments and controls

03

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel detection (models with the rainsensor* only)For models without automatic low beams,tunnel detection activates the low beamswhen the vehicle enters a tunnel. The lowbeams are switched off approx. 20 secondsafter the vehicle leaves the tunnel.

The rain sensor reacts to the change in light-ing conditions when, for example, the vehicleenters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea-ture will then activate the low beam head-lights. The low beams will be switched offapprox. 20 seconds after the vehicle leavesthe tunnel.

The rain sensor does not have to be activatedfor tunnel detection to function.

Related information• Lighting panel (p. 89)

• High/low beam headlights (p. 90)

Active Bending Lights (ABL)*With ABL activated, the headlight beamsadjust laterally to help light up a curveaccording to movements of the steeringwheel (see the right-pointing beam in the fol-lowing illustration).

Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Lightfunction deactivated (left) and activated (right)

ABL is activated automatically17 when theengine is started.

The function can be deactivated/reactivatedin the MY CAR menu system under My XC60

Active Bending Lights or under SettingsCar settings Light settings Active

Bending Lights.

See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for adescription of the menu system.

NOTE

This function is only active in twilight ordark conditions, and only when the vehicleis in motion.

If a fault should occur in the system, the sym-bol will illuminate and a message will be dis-played as shown in the table.

Symbol Display Explanation

HeadlampfailureServicerequired

The system isnot functioningproperly andshould beinspected/repaired by atrained andqualified Volvoservice techni-cian.

Related information• Lighting panel (p. 89)

• High/low beam headlights (p. 90)

• Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)

17 The factory default setting is on.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

Auxiliary lights*If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, thedriver can use the MY CAR menu system tochoose to deactivate and turn these lights onand off along with the high beam headlights.

The auxiliary lights must be connected to thevehicle's electrical system, which should onlybe done by a trained and authorized Volvoservice technician. See My Car – introduction(p. 76) for more information about the menusystem.

Instrument and "theater" lighting

Instrument lightingIllumination of the display and instrumentlights will vary, depending on ignition mode.

The display lighting is automatically subduedin darkness and the sensitivity is set with thethumb wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting isadjusted with the thumb wheel.

"Theater" lightingWhen the overhead courtesy lighting hasgone out and the engine is running, severalLEDs located near the roof console illuminateto provide faint lighting for the occupants ofthe front seats. This lighting goes out justafter the overhead courtesy lighting when thevehicle is locked.

Related information• Lighting panel (p. 89)

• Front interior lighting (p. 96)

• Rear interior lighting (p. 97)

• Ignition modes (p. 79)

Parking lightsTurn the headlight switch to the posi-tion (the license plate lighting comes on at thesame time).

Headlight switch in the parking light position

Canadian models: If the ignition is in positionII or the engine is running, the daytime run-ning lights will also be on.

With the headlight switch in this position, theparking lights will remain on even when theignition is switched off.

In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rearparking lights also illuminate when the tailgateis opened to alert anyone traveling behindyour vehicle. This happens regardless of theposition that the headlight control is in orwhich mode the ignition is in.

Related information• Lighting panel (p. 89)

03 Instruments and controls

03

94

Rear fog lightsThe rear fog lights are considerably brighterthan the normal taillights and should be usedonly when conditions such as fog, rain, snow,smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehi-cles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters).

The rear fog lights will only function in combi-nation with the high/low beam headlights.

– Press the button to switch the rear foglights on/off.> The rear fog light indicator symbol

on the instrument panel and thelight in the button illuminate when therear fog lights are switched on.

NOTE

• The rear fog lights are considerablybrighter than the normal taillights andshould be used only when conditionssuch as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dustreduce visibility for other vehicles toless than 500 ft. (150 meters).

• Condensation may form temporarily onthe inside of the lenses of exteriorlights such as headlights, fog lights, ortaillights. This is normal and the lightsare designed to withstand moisture.Normally, condensation will dissipateafter the lights have been on for ashort time.

Related information• Lighting panel (p. 89)

Hazard warning flashersThe hazard warning flasher should be used toindicate that the vehicle has become a traffichazard.

When the function is activated, both turn sig-nal indicators in the instrument panel willflash.

Location of the hazard warning flasher button

– To activate the flashers, press the buttonin the center dash. Press the button againto turn off the flashers.

NOTE

• Regulations regarding the use of thehazard warning flasher may vary,depending on where you live.

• The hazard warning flashers will beactivated automatically if an airbagdeploys.

03 Instruments and controls

03

95

Related information• Turn signals (p. 95)

Turn signalsThe turn signals are controlled by the leftsteering wheel lever.

Turn signals

When changing lanes The driver can automatically flash the turn

signals 3 times by moving the turn signallever up or down to the first position andreleasing it.

When turning Move the lever as far up or down as pos-

sible to start the turn signals. The turn signalswill be cancelled automatically by the move-ment of the steering wheel, or the lever canbe returned to its initial position by hand.

NOTE

• This automatic flashing sequence canbe interrupted by immediately movingthe lever in the opposite direction.

• If the turn signal indicator flashesfaster than normal, check for aburned-out turn signal bulb.

Related information• Hazard warning flashers (p. 94)

03 Instruments and controls

03

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front interior lightingThe lighting in the front part of the passengercompartment is controlled with the buttons inthe ceiling console.

G021149

Light switches, front roof lighting

Drivers side front reading light, on/off

Passenger's side front reading light,on/off

Overhead courtesy lighting.

Switch (3) has three positions for all passen-ger compartment lighting:

• Off: right side depressed, automatic light-ing off.

• Neutral position: automatic lighting ison.

• On – left side depressed, passengercompartment lighting on.

Overhead courtesy lightingThe passenger compartment lighting isswitched on and off automatically when but-ton (3) is in the neutral position.

The lighting comes on and remains on for30 seconds if:

• the vehicle is unlocked from the outsidewith the key or remote control

• the engine is switched off and the ignitionis in mode 0.

The lighting switches off when:

• the engine is started

• the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The lighting comes on and remains on for twominutes if one of the doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting can beswitched on and off manually within30 minutes after the vehicle has beenunlocked.

If the lighting is switched on manually and thevehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting willswitch off automatically after one minute.

Courtesy lights/door step lighting*The courtesy lights/door step lighting switchon/off automatically when one of the frontdoors is opened/closed.

Glove compartment lightingThe glove compartment lighting switcheson/off automatically when the lid is opened/closed.

Related information• Rear interior lighting (p. 97)

03 Instruments and controls

03

97

Rear interior lightingThe lights are switched on or off by pressingeach respective button.

Rear reading lights

Cargo area lightingThe cargo area lighting comes on automati-cally when the tailgate is opened.

Related information• Front interior lighting (p. 96)

Home safe lightingWhen you leave your vehicle at night, you canmake use of the home safe lighting functionto illuminate the area in front of the vehicle.

This function illuminates the headlights, park-ing lights, lights in the door mirrors, licenseplate lights, front ceiling lighting and footwelllighting. These lights will remain on for 30 18,60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can beset in MY CAR under Settings Carsettings Light settings Home safelight duration. See My Car – introduction(p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

1. Remove the key from the ignition slot toput the ignition in mode 0 (see Ignitionmodes (p. 79) for information about theignition modes).

2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possibletowards the steering wheel and release it.

3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors.

Related information• Approach lighting (p. 97)

Approach lightingApproach lighting activates the parking lights,door mirror lights, license plate lighting, domelighting and door step lighting when youapproach the vehicle.

This function is activated by pressing theapproach light button on the remote key (seethe illustration in Remote key – functions(p. 153)).

The time interval for this lighting can be setby pressing MY CAR and going to Carsettings Light settings Approach lightduration. See My Car – introduction (p. 76)for a description of the menu system.

Related information• Home safe lighting (p. 97)

18 Factory setting

03 Instruments and controls

03

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Windshield wipersMove the lever toward the steering wheel tostart the windshield and headlight washers.After the lever is released the wipers makeseveral extra sweeps.

Windshield wipers and washers

Rain sensor* on/off

Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency

CAUTION

• Use ample washer fluid when washingthe windshield. The windshield shouldbe thoroughly wet when the wipers arein operation.

• Before using the wipers, ice and snowshould be removed from the wind-shield/rear window. Be sure the wiperblades are not frozen in place.

Windshield wipers offMove the lever to position 0 toswitch off the windshield wipers.

Single sweepMove the lever upward from posi-tion 0 to sweep the windshield onestroke at a time for as long as the

lever is held up.

Intermittent wipingWith the lever in this position, youcan set the wiper interval by twistingthe thumb wheel upward to increase

wiper speed or downward to decrease thespeed.

Continuous wipingThe wipers operate at normalspeed.

The wipers operate at high speed.

Windshield wiper service positionThe windshield wipers must be in the serviceposition before the wiper blades can becleaned or replaced. See Wiper blades –service position (p. 343) for additional infor-mation.

Related information• Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 345)

Rain sensor*The rain sensor automatically regulates wiperspeed according to the amount of water onthe windshield.

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can beadjusted moving the thumb wheel up (thewipers will sweep the windshield more fre-quently) or down (the wipers will sweep thewindshield less frequently).

NOTE

The wipers will make an extra sweep eachtime the thumb wheel is adjusted upward.

When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivityWhen activating the rain sensor, the vehiclemust be running or in ignition mode II and thewindshield wiper lever must be in position 0or in the single sweep position.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-ton . The windshield wipers will makeone sweep.

Press the lever up for the wipers to make anextra sweep. The rain sensor returns to activemode when the stalk is released back toposition 0.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99

DeactivatingDeactivate the rain sensor by pressing thebutton or press the lever down toanother wiper position.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivatedwhen the key is removed from the ignitionslot or five minutes after the ignition has beenswitched off.

CAUTION

The rain sensor should be deactivatedwhen washing the car in an automatic carwash, etc. If the rain sensor function is lefton, the wipers will start inadvertently in thecar wash and could be damaged.

Windshield washerMove the lever toward the steering wheel tostart the windshield and headlight washers.After the lever is released the wipers makeseveral extra sweeps.

Washing function

Heated washer nozzles*The washer nozzles are heated automaticallyin cold weather to help prevent the washerfluid from freezing.

High-pressure headlight washing*High-pressure headlight washing consumes alarge quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,the headlights are washed using two alterna-tives:

• Low/high beam headlights on. Theheadlights will be washed the first timethe windshield is washed. Thereafter, theheadlights will only be washed once for

every five times the windshield is washedwithin a 10-minute period.

• Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend-ing Lights will be washed once for everyfive times the windshield is washed. Nor-mal halogen headlights will not bewashed.

CAUTION

• Use ample washer fluid when washingthe windshield. The windshield shouldbe thoroughly wet when the wipers arein operation.

• When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) ofwasher fluid remains in the reservoir,the headlights will no longer bewashed. A text message will also bedisplayed to remind the driver to fill thewasher fluid reservoir.

Related information• Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 345)

03 Instruments and controls

03

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tailgate wiper/washerThe tailgate wiper operates at two speeds:intermittent and continuous.

Move the lever forward to start the tailgatewasher.

Intermittent wiping

Normal (continuous) wiping

NOTE

The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-offfunction, which means that it will not oper-ate if its electric motor overheats. Thewiper will function again after a cool-downperiod (30 seconds or longer, dependingon the heat of the motor and ambient tem-perature conditions).

Tailgate wiper and reverse gearIf the windshield wipers are on and the trans-mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgatewiper will go into intermittent wiping func-tion19. This function is deactivated when a dif-ferent gear is selected.

NOTE

On vehicles with the optional rain sensor,the tailgate wiper will be activated whenreverse is selected, if the rain sensor isactivated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continu-ous) wiping mode, selecting different gearswill not affect its function.

Related information• Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 345)

Power windowsAll power windows can be operated using thecontrol panel in the driver's door. The controlpanels in the other doors only operate thewindow in the respective doors.

Driver's door control panel

Switch for power child safety locks* anddisengaging rear power window buttons,see Child safety locks (p. 61)

Rear window controls

Front window controls.

19 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101

WARNING

• Always remove the ignition key whenthe vehicle is unattended to put theignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes(p. 79) for information about the igni-tion modes).

• Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

• Make sure that the windows are com-pletely unobstructed before they areoperated.

Operating

Operating the power windows

Manual up/down

Auto up/down.

For the power windows to function, the igni-tion must be in at least mode I. When the

vehicle has been running, the power windowscan be operated for several minutes after theremote key has been removed from the igni-tion slot, or until a door has been opened.

NOTE

• Movement of the windows will stop ifthey are obstructed in any way.

• To reduce buffeting wind noise if therear windows are opened, also openthe front windows slightly.

Manual up/down– Move one of the controls up/down

slightly.> The power windows move up/down as

long as the control is held in position.

Auto up/down– Move one of the controls up/down as far

as possible and release it.> The window will open or close com-

pletely.

ResettingIf the battery has been disconnected, theauto open function must be reset so that itwill work properly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the but-ton to close the window and hold it forone second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button againfor one second.

Laminated glass*This glass is reinforced to help pro-vide protection against break-insand improved sound insulation inthe passenger compartment.

The windshield, laminated panoramic roofand other windows have laminated glass.

03 Instruments and controls

03

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Power door mirrorsThe control on the driver's door is used toadjust the position of the door mirrors.

Door mirror controls

Adjusting1. Press the L button for the left door mirror

or the R button for the right door mirror.The light in the button comes on.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in thecenter.

3. Press the L or R button again. The lightshould no longer be on.

WARNING

Objects seen in the mirrors may appearfurther away than they actually are.

Retractable power door mirrors*The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-ing in narrow spaces:

1. Press down the L and R buttons at thesame time.

2. Release them after approximately onesecond. The mirrors automatically stop inthe fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the Land R buttons at the same time. The mirrorsautomatically stop in the fully extended posi-tion.

Storing the position*The mirror positions are stored in the keymemory when the vehicle has been lockedwith the remote key. When the vehicle isunlocked with the same remote control themirrors and the driver's seat adopt the storedpositions when the driver's door is opened.

The function can be activated/deactivated inMY CAR under Settings Car settingsCar key memory Personal settings inkey memory. See My Car – introduction(p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

Tilting the door mirrors when parking*The door mirrors can be tilted down to helpgive the driver a better view along the sides ofthe vehicle, for example when parallel park-ing.

To activate this function, select reverse gearand press the L or R mirror control button totilt the mirror down.

The function can be activated/deactivated inMY CAR under Settings Car settingsSide mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tiltright mirror. See My Car – introduction(p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

The door mirror will reset to its normal posi-tion:

• after 10 seconds when reverse is disen-gaged and the car remains stopped.

• immediately when reverse is disengagedand the vehicle's forward speed exceedsapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• immediately if you press the correspond-ing L or R button again.

• when the engine is turned off.

• when the side mirrors are folded in.

NOTE

Only one mirror can be tilted down at atime.

Home safe and approach lightingThe light on the door mirrors comes on whenapproach lighting or home safe lighting isselected, see Approach lighting (p. 97) andHome safe lighting (p. 97).

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

Related information• Interior rearview mirror (p. 104)

• Heated windshield*, rear window anddoor mirror defrosters (p. 104)

• Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/retraction (p. 103)

Power door mirrors – automatictilting/retractionThe control on the driver's door is used toadjust the position of the door mirrors.

Automatically tilting the door mirrorswhen parkingThe door mirrors can tilt down automaticallyto help give the driver a better view along thesides of the vehicle, for example when paral-lel parking. When the transmission is nolonger in reverse, the mirrors will automati-cally return to their original position.

This function can be activated/deactivated inMY CAR under Settings Car settingsSide mirror settings In reverse gear tiltleft mirror or In reverse gear tilt rightmirror. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) forinformation about the MY CAR menu system.

Automatic retraction when lockingWhen the vehicle is locked/unlocked with theremote key the door mirrors are automaticallyretracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated inMY CAR under Settings Car settingsSide mirror settings Retract side mirrorswhen locking. See My Car – introduction(p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

Resetting to neutralMirrors that have been moved out of positionby an external force must be electrically resetto the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work.

• Retract the mirrors with the L and R but-tons.

• Fold them out again with the L and R but-tons.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Related information• Interior rearview mirror (p. 104)

• Heated windshield*, rear window anddoor mirror defrosters (p. 104)

03 Instruments and controls

03

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Heated windshield*, rear window anddoor mirror defrostersThe heating function is used to defrost/de-icethe windshield and/or the rear window anddoor mirrors.

Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear win-dow and door mirror defroster (2)

Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the wind-shield and/or button (2) to defrost the rearwindow and door mirrors. The indicator lightsin the respective buttons indicate that thefunction is active. Switch the function offwhen then windshield/rear window/mirrorshave cleared to help avoid battery drain. Theheating function will also switch off automati-cally after a certain amount of time.

Auto-defrosting for the rear window and doormirrors (if the vehicle is started when theambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C)can be selected in MY CAR under Settings

Climate settings Automatic reardefroster. See My Car – introduction (p. 76)for a description of the menu system.

Interior rearview mirrorThe interior rearview mirror has an auto-dimfunction that helps reduce glare from follow-ing vehicle's headlights.

Auto-dim functionThe interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim func-tion is controlled by two sensors: one point-ing forward (located on the forward-facingside of the mirror, which monitors the amountof ambient light) and one pointing rearward(located on the side of the mirror facing thedriver at the upper edge, which senses thestrength of following vehicles' headlights),and work together to help eliminate glare.20

NOTE

Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g.,parking stickers, transponders, etc., or therear sensor by loading the cargo area orthe rear seat in such a way that light isprevented from reaching the sensor willreduce the auto-dim function in the interiorrearview mirror and optional auto-dimfunction in the door mirrors.

Related information• Power door mirrors (p. 102)

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105

Digital compass*The rear-view mirror has an integrated displaythat shows the compass direction in whichthe vehicle is traveling.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different directions are shown with theabbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E(east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (south-west), W (west) and NW (northwest).

The compass is displayed automatically whenthe vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. Toswitch the compass on/off use a pen, paper-clip or similar object and press in the buttonon the underside of the mirror.

CalibrationNorth America is divided into 15 magneticzones and the compass will need to be cali-brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one(see the magnetic zones on the map in thefollowing section "Selecting a magneticzone"). To do so:

1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area,safely out of traffic and away from steelstructures and high-tension electricalwires.

2. Start the vehicle.

NOTE

• For best calibration results, switch offall electrical equipment in the vehicle(climate system, windshield wipers,audio system, etc.) and make sure thatall doors are closed.

• Calibration may not succeed or beincorrect if the vehicle's electricalequipment is not switched off.

3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object,press and hold the button on the under-side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds untilC is displayed in the mirror.

4. Press and hold the button for 3 secondsuntil the number of the current magneticzone is displayed.

5. Press the button repeatedly until thenumber of the desired magnetic zone(1-15) is displayed. See the magneticzones on the map in the following section"Selecting a magnetic zone").

6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mir-ror.

7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of nomore than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direc-tion is displayed. This indicates that cali-bration is complete.

8. Drive around in a circle an additional twotimes to fine-tune the calibration.

9. Vehicles with an electrically heatedwindshield:* if C is displayed when theheating function is activated, performstep 7 with the heating function on. Seealso Max. defroster and electricallyheated windshield* (p. 132) for additionalinformation about the heated windshield.

Repeat the calibration procedure if neces-sary.

20 The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Selecting a magnetic zone

15

14

13

12

119

8

76

5

4

3

2

1

10

G018632

Magnetic zones.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The correct zone must be selected for thecompass to work correctly.

1. Put the ignition in mode II.

2. Using a pen or similar object, press andhold the button on the rear side of mirrorfor at least 3 seconds. The number for thecurrent area will be shown.

3. Press the button repeatedly until thenumber for the required geographic area(1 – 15) is shown.

4. The display will revert to showing thecompass direction after several seconds.

Panoramic roof* – introductionThe laminated panoramic roof is divided intotwo sections. The rear glass section is fixed inplace and cannot be moved but the frontglass section can be slid horizontally to theopen or closed positions or its rear edge canbe raised and lowered to allow ventilation.

IntroductionAll references in this section to opening orclosing the panoramic roof pertain to the frontglass section.

The laminated panoramic roof also has a sunshade made of perforated fabric that islocated below the sections of glass. Thisshade can be opened or closed, for examplewhen driving in bright sunlight.

Both the laminated panoramic roof and thesun shade are operated by the controls in theceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The

vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or IIbefore the laminated panoramic roof/sunshade can be operated.

CAUTION

• Remove ice and snow before openingthe laminated panoramic roof.

• Do not operate the laminated panor-amic roof if it is frozen closed.

• Never place heavy objects on the lami-nated panoramic roof.

Wind blocker

The laminated panoramic roof is equippedwith a wind blocker that folds up when theroof is open.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Panoramic roof* – operationThe laminated panoramic roof is divided intotwo sections. The rear glass section is fixed inplace and cannot be moved but the frontglass section can be slid horizontally to theopen or closed positions or its rear edge canbe raised and lowered to allow ventilation.

Operation

Auto open (arrow points toward the rearof the vehicle)

Manual open

Manual close

Auto close

WARNING

• During manual closing, if the laminatedpanoramic roof is obstructed, immedi-ately open it again.

• Never open or close the laminatedpanoramic roof if it is obstructed inany way.

• Never allow a child to operate thelaminated panoramic roof.

• Never leave a child alone in a vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, ensure thatthe ignition is in mode 0 (see Ignitionmodes (p. 79) for information about thevarious ignition modes) to disable thelaminated panoramic roof. Never leavethe remote key/PCC* in the vehicle.

• Never extend any object or body partthough the open laminated panoramicroof, even if the vehicle's ignition iscompletely switched off.

Automatic operation1. To open the sun shade completely, pull

the control as far back as possible (to theauto open position) and release it.

2. To fully open the laminated panoramicroof, pull the control as far back as possi-ble a second time (to the auto open posi-tion) and release it.

Quick open/closeThe laminated panoramic roof and the sunshade can be opened/closed at the sametime:

• Open - pull the control back (to the autoopen position) twice in quick successionand release it.

• Close - push the control forward (to theauto close position) twice in quick suc-cession and release it.

||03 Instruments and controls

03

108

Manual operation1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control

back to the first stop (the manual openposition) and hold it until the sun shadehas opened to the position of yourchoice.

2. Opening the rear edge of the laminatedpanoramic roof: Pull the control back tothe first stop (the manual open position) asecond time to open the rear edge of thelaminated panoramic roof.

3. Opening the front glass section: Pullthe control back to the first stop (themanual open position) a third time andhold it until the laminated panoramic roofhas opened to the position of yourchoice.

Perform this procedure in reverse order toclose the laminated panoramic roof and/orsun shade.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun shade mustfirst be fully open before it will be possibleto open the laminated panoramic roof.When closing, the laminated panoramicroof must be fully closed before the sunshade can be closed.

Tilt position

Tilt position, raised at the rear edge

Open (raise the rear edge of the frontglass section) by pressing the rear edgeof the control upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the con-trol downward and holding it until thelaminated panoramic roof has closedcompletely.

If the sun shade is completely closed, it willopen approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when thelaminated panoramic roof is opened to the tiltposition.

Auto-stopThe laminated panoramic roof has an auto-stop feature that is triggered if the glass sec-tion of the roof or the sun shade is blocked inany way when being closed. In this case, thelaminated panoramic roof or sun shade willstop and reverse automatically approximately

2 in. (5 cm) from the point at which it wasblocked (or will open fully to the tilt position).

The auto-stop feature also functions whenthe laminated panoramic roof or sun shade isbeing opened.

The auto-stop feature can be overridden if theclosing procedure has been interrupted (e.g.,due to ice around the laminated panoramicroof) by pressing and holding the control for-ward/down until the roof is closed.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*– introductionHomeLink® can be used to open garagedoors, gates, etc.

WARNING

• If you use HomeLink® to open agarage door or gate, be sure no one isnear the gate or door while it is inmotion.

• When programming a garage dooropener, it is advised to park outside ofthe garage.

• Do not use HomeLink® with anygarage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features as requiredby U.S. federal safety standards (thisincludes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1,1982). A garage door that cannotdetect an object - signaling the door tostop and reverse - does not meet cur-rent U.S. federal safety standards. Formore information, contact HomeLinkat: www.homelink.com.

The HomeLink®21 Wireless Control Systemprovides a convenient way to replace up tothree hand-held radio-frequency (RF) trans-mitters used to activate devices such as gateoperators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems, even home lighting.Additional information can be found on theInternet at, www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or byphoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RFdevice you are programming for use in othervehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro-gramming. It is also suggested that upon thesale of the vehicle, the programmed Home-Link buttons be erased for security purposes.Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” inHomeLink® Wireless Control System* – pro-gramming (p. 110).

Using HomeLinkTo operate, simply press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLink button until the traineddevice begins to operate (this may take sev-eral seconds). Activation will now occur forthe trained device (i.e., garage door opener,gate operator, security system, entry doorlock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven-ience, the hand-held transmitter of the devicemay also be used at any time. In the eventthat there are still programming difficulties orquestions, contact HomeLink at:www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at1–800–355–3515.

NOTE

If the ignition is switched off, HomeLinkwill function for 30 minutes after the driv-er's door has been opened.

21 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

03 Instruments and controls

03

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System*– programmingThe HomeLink Wireless Control System pro-vides a convenient way to replace up to threehand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices such as gate opera-tors, garage door openers, entry door locks,security systems, even home lighting. Addi-tional information can be found on the Inter-net atwww.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at1–800–355–3515.

NOTE

Some vehicles may require the ignition tobe switched on or be in the “accessories”position for programming and/or operationof HomeLink. It is also recommended thata new battery be placed in the hand-heldtransmitter of the device being pro-grammed to HomeLink for quicker trainingand accurate transmission of the radio-fre-quency signal. The HomeLink buttonsmust be reset first. When this has beencompleted, Homelink is in learning modeso that you can perform programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held trans-mitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away fromthe HomeLink button you wish to pro-gram while keeping the indicator light inview.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both thechosen HomeLink and hand-held trans-mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica-tor light changes from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light. Now you may release boththe HomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.

NOTE

Some devices may require you to replacethis Programming Step 2 with proceduresnoted in the “Gate Operator / CanadianProgramming” section. If the HomeLinkindicator light does not change to a rapidlyblinking light after performing these steps,contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or byphoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds andrelease the programmed HomeLink but-ton up to two separate times to activatethe door. If the door does not activate,press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkbutton and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-stantly, programming is completeand your device should activate whenthe HomeLink button is pressed andreleased.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to aconstant light continue with “Pro-gramming” steps 4-6 to complete theprogramming of a rolling code equip-ped device (most commonly a garagedoor opener).

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}111

4. At the garage door opener receiver(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe “learn” or “smart” button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or“smart” button. (The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.)There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and release the pro-grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence a secondtime, and, depending on the brand of thegarage door opener (or other rolling codeequipped device), repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programmingprocess.

HomeLink should now activate your rollingcode equipped device.

Gate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require trans-mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev-eral seconds of transmission – which may notbe long enough for HomeLink to pick up thesignal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-culties programming a gate operator orgarage door opener by using the “Program-ming” procedures, replace “ProgrammingHomeLink” step 2 with the following:

• Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton while you press and release -every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indi-cator light changes from a slow to a rap-idly blinking light. Now you may releaseboth the HomeLink and hand-held trans-mitter buttons.

Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com-plete.

Resetting HomeLink ButtonsUse the following procedure to reset (eraseprogramming) from the three HomeLink but-tons (individual buttons cannot be reset butcan be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol-lowing section):

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkbuttons until the indicator light begins toflash.

2. Release both buttons.> HomeLink is now in the training (or

learning) mode and can be pro-grammed at any time beginning with“Programming” - step 1.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButtonTo program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, followthese steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. Without releasing the Home-Link button, proceed with “Programming”- step 1.

For questions or comments, contact Home-Link at: www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or byphoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operationis subject to the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) This device must accept anyinterference that may be received includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

03 Instruments and controls

03

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

The transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate thedevice.22

Volvo SensusVolvo Sensus is the core of the contact inter-face with your vehicle. Sensus provides infor-mation, entertainment and offers access tofunctions that make owning and operating aVolvo easier.

Volvo Sensus is the operating system in yourvehicle and it enables you to interact intui-tively with the vehicle’s various features andfunctions, including accessing the Internet,when it suits you.

Volvo Sensus uses the center console screento display information and menus, and tooffer a user interface that enables you tomake personalized settings for e.g., vehicle,infotainment and climate system functions.

The buttons on the center console or thesteering wheel keypad are used to activate/deactivate functions and change numeroussettings.

Pressing the MY CAR button on the centerconsole displays all of the settings related todriving and operating the vehicle, such asCity Safety, lock and alarm functions, auto-matic blower speed, setting the clock, etc.

Pressing the source buttons on the centerconsole (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, , NAV* andCAM*, etc.) make it possible to select e.g.,AM or FM radio, play a CD or DVD, use theBluetooth® hands-free feature, the navigationsystem* or the park assist camera*.

See your on-board owner’s manual or theseparate printed supplements for detailedinformation about the functionality offered byVolvo Sensus.

22 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

Center console control panel

Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV:see the separate VNS manual for operat-ing instructions.

Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL)

Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR.

Internet connected vehicle.

Climate system.

Park assist camera - CAM*.

Related information• My Car – introduction (p. 76)

• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-duction (p. 236)

Information display – menu controlsThe controls on the left steering wheel leverare used to access the menus (p. 114) thatare displayed in the instrument panel (p. 68).The menus displayed depend on the currentignition mode (p. 79).

Analog Instrument panel and menu controls

Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls

OK: access to the list of mes-sages (p. 114) and message confirma-tion.

Thumb wheel: browse among menus andoptions in the list of functions.

RESET: reset the active function. Used incertain cases to select/activate a func-tion, see the explanation under eachrespective function.

The menus shown on the information displaysin the instrument panel are controlled with theleft lever. The menus displayed depend onignition mode. Press OK to erase a messageand return to the menus.

03 Instruments and controls

03

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information display – menu overviewThe menus displayed depend on the currentignition mode (p. 79).

The following menu alternatives may vary,depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle.

Analog instrument panelDigital speed

Trip comp. opt.

Service status

Messages (##)23

Digital instrument panel*Settings

Themes

Contrast mode/Color mode

Service status

Messages

Trip computer reset

Related information• Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

• Information display – menu controls(p. 113)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

Information display – messagesThe controls on the left steering wheel leverare used to scroll among messages displayedin the instrument panel and to confirm selec-tions.

When information, indicator or warning sym-bols illuminate, an explanatory message willbe displayed in the instrument panel.

When a warning (p. 74), information (p. 72) orindicator symbol (p. 72) comes on, a corres-ponding message appears in the informationpanel. An error message is stored in a mem-ory list until the fault is rectified.

Press OK to acknowledge and scroll amongthe messages.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while youare using the trip computer, the messagemust be read and confirmed by pressingOK before the previous activity can beresumed.

Message Description

StopengineA

Stop and switch off theengine as soon as possi-ble. Serious risk of dam-age. Contact an author-ized Volvo workshop.

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off theengine. Serious risk ofdamage. Contact anauthorized Volvo work-shop.

ServiceurgentA

Have the vehicle checkedby an authorized Volvoworkshop immediately.

ServicerequiredA

Have the vehicle checkedby an authorized Volvoworkshop as soon as pos-sible.

See man-ualA

Read the owner's manual.

Book timefor mainte-nance

Time to book service at anauthorized Volvo retailer.

23 Number of messages in parentheses

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}115

Message Description

Time forregularmainte-nance

Time for regular service atan authorized Volvo work-shop. The timing is deter-mined by the number ofmiles driven, number ofmonths since the lastservice, engine runningtime.

Mainte-nance over-due

If the service intervals arenot followed, the warrantydoes not cover any dam-aged parts. Contact anauthorized Volvo work-shop for service.

TemporarilyOFFA

A function has been tem-porarily switched off andis reset automatically whiledriving or after startingagain.

Low batteryPower savemode

The audio system isswitched off to save cur-rent. Charge the battery.

A There will also be a system-specific part of this message

Related information• Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

• Information display – menu overview(p. 114)

• Information display – menu controls(p. 113)

Trip computer – introduction The content and appearance of the trip com-puter varies depending on whether the vehi-cle is equipped with an Analog or Digitalinstrument panel.

Analog information display and controls

Digital information displays and controls

||03 Instruments and controls

03

116

The instrument panel illuminates as soon asthe vehicle is unlocked and trip computer set-tings can be made. If none of the trip com-puter's controls are used within 30 secondsafter the driver's door has been opened, theinstrument panel lighting will go out and thetrip computer cannot be used again until:

• the ignition is put in mode II24

• the engine is started

NOTE

If a warning message appears while youare using the trip computer, this messagemust be acknowledged in order to returnto the trip computer function. Acknowl-edge a message by pressing OK.

Related information• Trip computer – functions, analog instru-

ment panel (p. 117)

• Trip computer – functions, digital instru-ment panel (p. 120)

• Trip computer – Supplementary informa-tion (p. 122)

• Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)

24 See Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the various ignition modes.

03 Instruments and controls

03

}}117

Trip computer – functions, analoginstrument panel

Information display and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer'sfunctions or acknowledge/confirm/erasea message

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list oftrip computer information headings andto scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func-tion after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menugroups:

• Trip computer functions

• Trip computer information headings in theinstrument panel

FunctionsTo open and make settings in the trip com-puter functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computercontrols are being used in a commandsequence; reset them by pressing RESETtwice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among thefunctions and select/confirm your choiceby pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit bypressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the analog trip com-puter's functions:

||03 Instruments and controls

03

118

Function Description

Digital speed

– km/h

– mph

– None

This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel

• Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressingENTER.

Trip comp. opt.

– Distance to empty

– Fuel consumption

– Average speed

– Trip odometer T1 and total dist.

– Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have alreadybeen selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked andare displayed in gray:

1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel.

2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked.

3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 113).

Information headingsAny of the information headings in the follow-ing table can be displayed. To do so:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computercontrols are being used in a commandsequence; reset them by pressing RESETtwice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display-ing the information headings. Stop on thedesired heading.

3. See the table for an explanation of theheading or the actions that can be taken.

03 Instruments and controls

03

119

Information headings in the instrumentpanel

Description

Trip odometer T1 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Trip odometer T2 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Distance to empty See Distance to empty in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 122).

Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption.

Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of informationheadings.

Scroll among the trip computer informationheadings at any time by turning the thumbwheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Related information• Trip computer – introduction (p. 115)

• Trip computer – functions, digital instru-ment panel (p. 120)

• Trip computer – Supplementary informa-tion (p. 122)

• Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)

03 Instruments and controls

03

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Trip computer – functions, digitalinstrument panel

Information displays and controls

OK–press to access the trip computer'sfunctions or to activate a selection

Thumb wheel–turn to access the list oftrip computer information headings andto scroll among the alternatives

RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func-tion after a selection has been made

The trip computer has two different menugroups:

• Trip computer functions

• Trip computer information headings in theinstrument panel

FunctionsTo open and make settings in the trip com-puter functions:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computercontrols are being used in a commandsequence; reset them by pressing RESETtwice.

2. Press OK to open the list of functions.

3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among thefunctions and select/confirm your choiceby pressing OK.

4. After completing your selection, exit bypressing RESET twice.

The following table lists the digital trip com-puter's functions:

Function Description

Trip computer reset

– Average fuel consumption

– Average speed

NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see Trip computer – Supplementary information(p. 122) for a description of how this is done.

Messages For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 113).

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see Information displays – intro-duction (p. 68).

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

03 Instruments and controls

03

121

Function Description

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headingsThree trip computer headings can be dis-played at the same time; one in each of thedisplays (see the previous illustration). One ofthe combinations of information headings inthe following table can be displayed. To doso:

1. Ensure that none of the trip computercontrols are being used in a commandsequence; reset them by pressing RESETtwice.

2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display-ing the combinations of information head-ings. Stop on the desired combination.

3. See the table for an explanation of theheading or the actions that can be taken.

Scroll among the combinations of trip com-puter information headings at any time byturning the thumb wheel until the desiredcombination is displayed.

Heading combinations Description

Average fuel consump-tion

Trip odometer T1 + mile-age

Average speed • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1.

Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mile-age

Distance to empty • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2.

Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>km/h Change between mph<>km/h – see "Digital speed display" in Tripcomputer – Supplementary information (p. 122).

- No trip computer informa-tion displayed

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin-ning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer informationheadings at any time by turning the thumbwheel until the desired heading is displayed.

Related information• Trip computer – introduction (p. 115)

• Trip computer – functions, analog instru-ment panel (p. 117)

• Trip computer – Supplementary informa-tion (p. 122)

• Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)

03 Instruments and controls

03

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Trip computer – SupplementaryinformationGeneral information for both Analog and Digi-tal trip computer functions.

Average fuel consumptionFuel consumption since the last time thisfunction was reset.

Average speedThe vehicle's average speed since the lasttime this function was reset.

Current fuel consumptionCurrent fuel consumption is calculatedapproximately once a second. When the vehi-cle is moving at low speed, fuel consumptionis displayed per unit of time. At higherspeeds, it is displayed in terms of distance.

Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see theheading "Changing units".

Distance to emptyThis function shows the approximate dis-tance that can be driven on the fuel remainingin the tank. When Distance to empty shows"----", there is very little useable fuel remain-ing in that tank; refuel as soon as possible.The calculation is based on average fuel con-sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) ofdriving and the amount of fuel remaining inthe tank (the accuracy of this figure may varyif your driving style changes). An economical

driving style will generally increase this dis-tance.

See Economical driving (p. 280) for informa-tion about driving economically.

Digital speed display*Speed is expressed in the unit not used bythe instrument panel's speedometer e.g., ifthe normal speedometer is in mph, the tripcomputer will display in the speed in km/hand vice versa.

Resetting an analog instrument panel

Trip odometer(s) and average speed1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Aver-

age speed.

2. Press and hold RESET until selectedfunction is reset.

Each trip computer heading must be resetindividually.

Resetting a digital instrument panel

Trip odometer1. Turn the thumb wheel to select the com-

bination of headings containing the tripodometer to be reset.

2. Press and hold RESET until selected tripodometer is reset.

Average speed and fuel consumption1. Select Trip computer reset and press

OK.

2. Select one of the following alternativesusing the thumb wheel and press OK:

• mpg

• mph

• Reset both

3. Finish by pressing RESET.

Changing unitsTo change the unit (miles/km) used to meas-ure distance and speed, go to MY CARSettings System options Distanceand fuel units.

NOTE

In addition to changing units in the tripcomputer, this also changes the units usedin the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*.

Related information• Trip computer – introduction (p. 115)

• Trip computer – functions, analog instru-ment panel (p. 117)

• Trip computer – functions, digital instru-ment panel (p. 120)

• Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)

03 Instruments and controls

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

Trip computer – Trip statisticsTrip information from previous trips regardingaverage fuel consumption and average speedis stored and can be displayed in the form ofa bar chart.

Function

Trip statistics25

Each bar represents a driving distance of1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the currentscale; the bar at the far right shows the valuefor the current mile/10 miles.

Use TUNE to change between 1 mile and10 miles; the marker at the right will alsochange according to the scale selected.

SettingsSettings can be made in the MY CAR menusystem as follows:

MY CAR My XC60 Trip statistics:

• Start new trip: press ENTER to erase allpervious statistics. Exit the menu bypressing EXIT.

• Reset for every driving cycle: select bypressing ENTER. Exit the menu by press-ing EXIT.

Selecting Reset for every driving cycle era-ses all trip statistics automatically if the igni-tion is switched off for at least 4 hours. Whenthe engine is restarted, new statistics will bestored.

To get new statistics if the engine is restartedbefore 4 hours have elapsed, the existingones have to be erased manually by selectingStart new trip.

For additional information, see Informationdisplay – menu controls (p. 113).

See also the information about Eco Guide inEco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 71).

Related information• Trip computer – introduction (p. 115)

• Trip computer – functions, analog instru-ment panel (p. 117)

• Trip computer – functions, digital instru-ment panel (p. 120)

• Trip computer – Supplementary informa-tion (p. 122)

25 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

CLIMATE

04 Climate

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125

Climate – general informationThe vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli-mate Control (ECC) (p. 129) that cools, heatsor dehumidifies the air in the passenger com-partment.

Air conditioning

NOTE

• The air conditioning can be switchedoff, but to ensure the best possible cli-mate comfort in the passenger com-partment and to prevent the windowsfrom misting, it should always be on.

• In warm weather, a small amount ofwater may accumulate under the carwhen it has been parked. This water iscondensation from the A/C systemand is normal.

Side windows and laminated panoramicroofTo ensure that the air conditioning worksoptimally, the side windows, and the lamina-ted panoramic roof should be closed.

Fog on the inside of the windowsThe defroster function (p. 132) should beused to remove fog or mist from the inside ofthe windows. Keeping the windows cleanwith a commercially available window wash-ing spray will also help prevent fogging ormisting.

Temporary shut-off of the airconditioningThe air conditioning (p. 132) is momentarilydisengaged during full acceleration or whendriving uphill with a trailer. This may result ina temporary increase in cabin temperature.

Ice and snowAlways keep the air intake grille at the base ofthe windshield free of snow.

Climate system maintenanceSpecial tools and equipment are required tomaintain and carry out repairs on the climatesystem. Work of this type should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

RefrigerantVolvo cares about the environment. The airconditioning system in your car contains aCFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substancewill not deplete the ozone layer. The air con-ditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) ofR134a. The systems uses PAG oil.

Related information• Climate – sensors (p. 125)

• Climate – menu settings (p. 127)

Climate – sensorsThe climate system utilizes a number of sen-sors to help regulate the temperature andhumidity level in the passenger compartment.

Sensor location• The sunlight sensor is located on the top

side of the dashboard.

NOTE

The sunlight sensor monitors which side ofthe car that is most exposed to sunlight.This can mean that the temperature maydiffer between the right and left-side airvents, even if the temperatures set for bothsides of the passenger compartment arethe same.

• The temperature sensor for the passen-ger compartment is located below the cli-mate control panel.

• The outside (ambient) temperature sensoris located on the door mirror.

• The humidity sensor* is located in theinterior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors withclothing or other objects.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

04 Climate

04

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air qualityThe passenger compartment has beendesigned to be pleasant and comfortable,even for people with asthma and contactallergies.

Passenger compartment filterReplace the cabin air filter with a new one atthe recommended intervals. Please refer toyour Warranty and Service Records Informa-tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician for these intervals.The filter should be replaced more often whendriving under dirty and dusty conditions. Thefilter cannot be cleaned and therefore shouldalways be replaced with a new one.

NOTE

There are different types of cabin air filters.Ensure that the correct type is installed.

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)A multifilter helps reduce gases and particlesin the incoming air, thereby reducing the lev-els of odors and contaminants entering thevehicle. The air quality sensor detectsincreased levels of contaminants in the out-side air. When the air quality sensor detectscontaminated outside air, the air intake closesand the air inside the passenger compart-ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air entersthe vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculatedpassenger compartment air.

NOTE

Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air fil-ter replacement intervals.

Materials used in the cabinThe materials used in the cabin have beendeveloped to help minimize the amount ofdust and make the cabin easier to keepclean. All floor mats can be easily removedfor cleaning. Use car cleaning products rec-ommended by Volvo. See also the informa-tion in Cleaning the interior (p. 363).

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*(p. 126)

• Climate – menu settings (p. 127)

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*The Air Quality System (IAQS) consists of amultifilter and an air quality sensor. The filterhelps remove gases and particles from theincoming air, thereby reducing the amounts ofodors and contaminants entering the vehicle.

The air quality (p. 126) sensor detectsincreased levels of contaminants in the out-side air. When the air quality sensor detectscontaminated outside air, the air intake closesand the air inside the passenger compart-ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air entersthe vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculatedpassenger compartment air. When theAUTO (p. 131) button is depressed the airquality sensor is always engaged.

Activate or deactivate this function in Climatesettings Interior air quality system.

NOTE

• The air quality sensor should alwaysbe engaged in order to obtain the bestair in the passenger compartment.

• Recirculation is limited in cold weatherto avoid fogging.

• If the insides of the windows start fog-ging, disengage the air quality sensor.Use the defroster function to increaseairflow to the front, side, and rear win-dows.

04 Climate

04

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Max. defroster and electrically heatedwindshield* (p. 132)

Climate – menu settingsThe default settings for four of the climatesystem's (p. 125) functions can be changed inthe menu system.

• Blower speed (p. 131) in automaticmode (p. 131).

• Recirculation timer (p. 134) for passengercompartment air.

• Automatic rear window defrost-ing (p. 104).

• The optional Interior Air Quality Sys-tem (p. 126) (IAQS).

The functions can also be returned to factorysettings in the menu system.

See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for adescription of the menu system.

Related information• Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 129)

Air distribution – generalThe incoming air is distributed through anumber of different vents in the passengercompartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTOmode (p. 131).

If desired, air distribution can be controlledmanually, see Air distribution – function(p. 133).

||04 Climate

04

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow

Direct the outer air vents toward the side win-dows to defrost.

Direct the vents into the passenger compart-ment to help maintain the desired tempera-ture in the rear seat.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Air distribution – table (p. 135)

• Air distribution – recirculation (p. 134)

• Max. defroster and electrically heatedwindshield* (p. 132)

04 Climate

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Electronic climate control (ECC)ECC (Electronic Climate Control) helps main-tain the selected temperature in the passen-ger compartment and the temperature can be

set separately on the driver's and passenger'ssides.

The AUTO function (p. 131) automaticallyregulates the temperature, air conditioning,blower speed, recirculation and air distribu-tion.

Temperature control (p. 131), driver'sside

Heated driver's seat* (p. 130)

Defroster (maximum effect), electricallyheated windshield* (p. 132)

Blower (p. 131)

Manual air distribution (p. 127)—floor

Manual air distribution—dashboard airvents

Manual air distribution—defroster

Heated rear window and door mir-rors (p. 104)

Heated front passenger's seat* (p. 130)

Temperature control (p. 131), passeng-er's side

Recirculation (p. 134)

AUTO (p. 131)

A/C (p. 132) on/off

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

04 Climate

04

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Heated seatsThe front seat heating has three levels toincrease comfort for the driver and passengerin cold weather.

The rear outboard seat heating has three lev-els to increase comfort for the passengers incold weather.

Heated front seats*

The current seat temperature setting is shown inthe center console display

Press the lower section ofthe button repeatedly untilthe desired number of indi-cator lights illuminate:

Highest heat level – threeindicator lights.

Medium heat level – two indicator lights.

Lowest heat level – one indicator light.

If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seatheating is switched off.

Seat heating will automatically switch offwhen the engine is switched off.

Starting the seat heating automaticallyThis setting starts heating the driver's seat (atthe highest level) automatically when theengine is started if the ambient temperature isbelow approx. 50° F (10° C).

Activate/deactivate this function in theMY CAR menu system, under SettingsClimate settings Auto start driver seatheater.

Heated rear seats*1

Heat control for the outboard seating posi-tions is done in the same way as for the frontseats.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 129)

1 Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

04 Climate

04

131

Temperature and blower controlWhen the vehicle is started, the most recentsetting is resumed.

The blower should always be activated tohelp avoid condensation and fogging on thewindows.

Temperature controlThe temperatures on thedriver and passenger sidescan be set separately.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be speeded upby selecting a higher/lower temperaturethan the actual temperature required.

Blower controlTurn the control clockwise toincrease or counterclockwiseto decrease the blowerspeed. If AUTO (p. 131) isselected, blower speed willbe regulated automaticallyand this will override manual

adjustment.

NOTE

If the blower is turned off completely, theair conditioning is disengaged, which mayresult in fogging on the windows.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 129)

• Air conditioning (p. 132)

• Climate – sensors (p. 125)

Automatic climate controlThe Auto function automatically controls tem-perature (p. 131), air conditioning (p. 132),blower speed (p. 131), recirculation (p. 134)and air distribution (p. 127).

If you select one or moremanual functions, the otherfunctions continue to becontrolled automatically. Theair quality (p. 126) sensor isengaged and all manual set-tings are switched off when

AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTOCLIMATE.

Blower speed in automatic mode can be setunder Climate settings Automatic bloweradjustment. Choose between Low, Normalor High.

NOTE

Selecting the lowest blower speed mayincreases the risk of fog forming on thewindows.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

04 Climate

04

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air conditioningThe air conditioning function cools and dehu-midifies the air in the passenger compart-ment.

When the indicator light inthe button is on, the air con-ditioning is controlled auto-matically. This cools/heatsand dehumidifies the incom-ing air. When the indicatorlight in the button is off, the

air conditioning is disengaged. Other func-tions are still controlled automatically. Whenmaximum defroster (p. 132) is selected, theair conditioning system is set for maximumblower speed and dehumidifies the cabin asquickly as possible.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Automatic climate control (p. 131)

Max. defroster and electrically heatedwindshield*The heated windshield and max. defrosterfunctions are used to clear the windshield andfront side windows of condensation and iceas quickly as possible.

The selected settings are shown in the centerconsole display

Electrical heating*

Max. defroster

Models without an electrically heated wind-shield

• Press the button once to startdefrosting/de-icing the windshield andfront side windows. The indicator light (2)in the defroster button illuminates whenthe function is active.

• Press the button twice to switch off thedefroster (the indicator light will switchoff).

Models with an electrically heated wind-shield*

• If this feature is switched off, press thebutton once to start heating the wind-shield2. Symbol (1) will illuminate in thecenter console display.

• Press the button twice to start both thedefroster and the windshield heating.Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in thecenter console display.

• If these features are on, press the buttonto switch them off. The symbols will nolonger be displayed.

2 If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see Digital compass* (p. 105).

04 Climate

04

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133

NOTE

• Triangular areas at the far sides of thewindshield are not heated electricallyand will take slightly longer todefrost/de-ice.

• The heated windshield may affect theperformance/range of e.g., transpond-ers used to automatically pay highwaytolls or other communication equip-ment.

The following occurs when the defroster/windshield heating functions have been acti-vated:

• Blower speed increases automaticallyand the air conditioning (p. 132) willswitch on (if not already on and if the pas-senger compartment blower is not turnedoff) to dehumidify the air in the passengercompartment. Air conditioning can beswitched off by pressing the AC button.

• Recirculation (p. 134) will not functionwhile defrost is engaged.

The climate system will return to its previoussettings when the defroster/windshield heat-ing function is switched off.

See also Heated windshield*, rear windowand door mirror defrosters (p. 104) for addi-tional information.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Automatic climate control (p. 131)

Air distribution – functionThe air distribution function consists of threebuttons.

Manual air distribution—defroster

Manual air distribution—dashboard airvents

Manual air distribution—floor

When a button is pressed, the correspondingfigure will appear in the display with an arrowindicating which manual air flow has beenselected (see the following illustration). Seealso the air distribution chart (p. 135).

||04 Climate

04

134

Air distribution is shown in the center consoledisplay

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Air distribution – general (p. 127)

• Air distribution – recirculation (p. 134)

Air distribution – recirculationRecirculation can be used to shut out exhaustfumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger com-partment.

The air in the passengercompartment is then recircu-lated, i.e., no air from outsidethe car is taken into the carwhen this function is acti-vated. The indicator light inthe button will illuminate

when recirculation is selected.

If the air in the car recirculates for too long,there is a risk of condensation forming on theinsides of the windows, especially in winter.

TimerThe timer function minimizes the risk of fog-ging, or stale air when the recirculation func-tion is selected by automatically switching offthe function after a certain length of time,depending on the ambient temperature. Acti-vate/deactivate the function under Climatesettings Recirculation timer. See My Car– introduction (p. 76) for a description of themenu system.

NOTE

When Defroster is selected, recirculation isalways deactivated.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Air distribution – general (p. 127)

• Air distribution – function (p. 133)

• Air distribution – table (p. 135)

04 Climate

04

}}135

Air distribution – tableAir distribution (p. 127) is selected using thebuttons in the center console climate panel.

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some airflows from the dashboard airvents. The air is not recircula-ted. Air conditioning is alwaysengaged.

To remove de-fog/de-ice the front side win-dows and windshieldquickly.

Air to the floor andwindows. Some airflows from the dash-board air vents.

To ensure comfortableconditions and good de-fogging in cold or humidweather.

Air to windshield and side win-dows. Some air flows from theair dashboard vents.

In cold or humidweather (blowerspeed should bemoderate to high).

Air to floor and fromdashboard air vents.

In sunny weather withcool outside tempera-tures.

Airflow to windows and fromdashboard air vents.

To ensure good com-fort in warm, dryweather.

Air to floor. Some airflows to the dashboardair vents and windows.

To warm or cool thefeet.

Airflow to the head and chestfrom the dashboard air vents.

To ensure efficientcooling in warmweather.

Airflow to windows,from dashboard airvents and to the floor.

To cool the feet or pro-vide warmer air to theupper body in coldweather or hot, dryweather.

||04 Climate

04

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Air distribution – function (p. 133)

• Max. defroster and electrically heatedwindshield* (p. 132)

LOADING AND STORAGE

05 Loading and storage

05

138

Storage spacesThe following is an overview of the storagecompartments in the passenger compart-ment.

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of thefront seat cushions

Glove compartment (p. 141)

Storage compartment (p. 140), 12-voltsocket (p. 140) and AUX input/USB con-nector*

Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Related information• Vanity mirror (p. 141)

• 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)

05 Loading and storage

05

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tunnel consoleThe tunnel console is located between thefront seats.

Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.)under armrest, AUX input/USB connec-tor.

Includes cup holder for driver and pas-senger, 12-volt socket (p. 140) and asmall storage compartment.

Related information• Storage spaces (p. 138)

Tunnel console – 12-volt socketsThe electrical sockets can be used for 12-voltaccessories such as cell phone chargers andcoolers. For the socket to supply current, theignition must be in at least mode I (p. 79). Thesockets are located between the cup holdersin the tunnel console and on the rear side ofthe tunnel console (p. 140) for rear seat pas-sengers.

12-volt socket in the front tunnel console

G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console

The maximum current consumption is 10A(120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets inthe passenger compartment is in use. If boththe front and rear sockets are used at thesame time, the maximum current consump-tion per socket is 7.5A (90W).

The auxiliary sockets can also be used topower a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarettelighters and ashtrays can be purchased fromyour Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Always keep the sockets covered whennot in use.

Related information• Storage spaces (p. 138)

• 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)

05 Loading and storage

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

Glove compartmentThe glove compartment provides a lockablestorage compartment for small items.

The owner's manual and maps can be kepthere. There are also holders for pens and fuelcards. The glove compartment can be lockedmanually with the key blade, see Locking/unlocking – glove compartment (p. 165).

Related information• Storage spaces (p. 138)

Vanity mirrorThe vanity mirrors are located on the upperside of the sun visors.

Vanity mirror with lighting

The light comes on automatically when thecover is lifted.

Related information• Storage spaces (p. 138)

• Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 342)

12-volt socket in the cargo area*The 12-volt socket can be used e.g., to con-nect the tire sealing system's compressor(certain models) and other 12-volt accesso-ries.

Fold down the cover to access the electricalsocket.

NOTE

The 12-volt socket in the cargo area pro-vides electrical current even when the igni-tion is switched off. Using the socket whilethe engine is not running will drain the bat-tery.

Related information• Storage spaces (p. 138)

• Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 140)

05 Loading and storage

05

142

Loading – generalThe load carrying capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by factors such as the number ofpassengers, the amount of cargo, the weightof any accessories that may be installed, etc.

To increase loading space, the rear seatbackrests can be folded down, see Rearseats – folding backrest (p. 86).

When loading the cargo area, keep the fol-lowing in mind:

• Load objects in the cargo area againstthe backrest whenever possible.

• Unstable loads can be secured to theload anchoring eyelets with straps or weblashings to help keep them from shifting.

• Stop the engine and apply the parkingbrake when loading or unloading longobjects. The gear selector can beknocked out of position by long loads,which could set the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

• Stop the engine, put the gear selectorin P, and apply the parking brakewhen loading or unloading longobjects.

• The vehicle's driving characteristicsmay change depending on the weightand distribution of the load.

• A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces aforce of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in ahead-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).

• The cargo area and rear seat shouldnot be loaded to a level higher than2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge ofthe rear side windows. Objects placedhigher than this level could impede thefunction of the Inflatable Curtain.

Related information• Load anchoring eyelets (p. 143)

• Steel cargo grid (p. 147)

• Loading – roof load carriers (p. 142)

Loading – roof load carriers

Using load carriersLoad carriers are available as Volvo accesso-ries. Observe the following points when inuse:

• To avoid damaging your vehicle and toachieve maximum safety when driving,we recommend using the load carriersthat Volvo has developed especially foryour vehicle.

• Volvo-approved removable roof racks aredesigned to carry the maximum allowableroof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg).For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man-ufacturer's weight limits for the rack.

• Never exceed the rack manufacturer'sweigh limits and never exceed the maxi-mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg).

• Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loadsevenly.

• Place heavier cargo at the bottom of theload.

• Secure the cargo correctly with appropri-ate tie-down equipment.

• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured.

• Remember that the vehicle's center ofgravity and handling change when youcarry a load on the roof.

05 Loading and storage

05

143

• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuelconsumption will increase with the size ofthe load.

• Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fastcornering and hard braking.

Related information• Loading – general (p. 142)

• Load anchoring eyelets (p. 143)

Load anchoring eyeletsThe load anchoring eyelets on both sides ofthe vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., tohelp anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING

The two upper hooks shown in the illustra-tion are for holding grocery bags only.They are not intended for anchoring heavyobjects.

WARNING

• Cover sharp edges on long loads tohelp prevent injury to occupants.Secure the load to help prevent shift-ing during sudden stops.

• Always secure large and heavy objectswith a seat belt or cargo retainingstraps.

• Always secure the load to help preventit from moving in the event of suddenstops.

• Switch off the engine, apply the park-ing brake and put the gear selector inP when loading and unloading thevehicle.

Related information• Loading – general (p. 142)

05 Loading and storage

05

144

Grocery bag holderThe grocery bag holder holds shopping bagsin place.

G017745

Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargoarea

The grocery bag holder holds shopping bagsin place.

1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargoarea.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

Related information• Loading – general (p. 142)

Cargo net – general informationThe cargo net helps protect passengers fromobjects in the cargo area in the event of asudden stop or hard braking.

The cargo net is available in two versions.

G034213

Version 1

Version 2

Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargonet made of strong nylon fabric that helpsprevent objects in the cargo area from mov-ing forward into the passenger compartment.

The net can be attached in two different pla-ces:

• Rear position: behind the rear seat back-rest

• Front position: behind the front seatbackrests

WARNING

• Be sure that the cargo net's upperattachment hooks are properlyinserted in the brackets and that thelower straps are correctly attachedand pulled taut.

• A damaged cargo net should never beused.

• Objects in the cargo area should besecurely anchored, even if the cargonet is correctly installed and in use.

Related information• Cargo net – mounting/removing (p. 145)

05 Loading and storage

05

}}145

Cargo net – mounting/removing

Mounting the cargo net (version 1)The cargo net is easiest to put in placethrough one of the rear doors.

1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure thatthe upper hinged rod is straight andlocked in position.

2. Insert one end of the rod into the front orrear bracket (near the ceiling). Be surethat the lock on the lower strap is facingtoward you.

3. Insert the other end of the rod in theopposite bracket.

– Be sure to press the end hooks on therod as far forward as possible in thebrackets.

Cargo net in rear position

4. Mounting in the rear position: With thenet's rod attached to the rear upperbrackets, hook the lower straps in thefloor eyelets in the cargo area. Pull the netstrap taut.

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With thenet's rod attached to the front upperbrackets, hook the lower straps in theeyelets in the front seat rails. Attachingthe net is easier if the front seat backrestsare upright and the seats are movedslightly forward.

If the front seats are moved rearward,they should not press hard against thenet.

CAUTION

Pressure from the front seats against thecargo net could damage the net and/or itsbrackets.

5. Pull the net strap taut.

Mounting the cargo net (version 2)The easiest way to mount the cargo net isthrough one of the rear doors.

Cargo net in rear position

1. Fold out the cargo net.

2. Insert one of the net's upper attachmentsinto the front or rear bracket near the roofliner with the net's storage pockets facingrearward.

||05 Loading and storage

05

146

3. Insert the net's other attachment into thebracket on the opposite side of the vehi-cle. It is spring-loaded to help makemounting easier.

Be sure to press the hooks as far forwardinto the brackets as possible.

4. Mounting in the rear position: With thenet's hooks inserted into the rear upperbrackets, attach the lower hooks to thefloor eyelets in the cargo area.

Cargo net in front position

Mounting in the front position: With thenet's upper attachments in front upper brack-ets, attach the lower hooks to the eyelets inthe front seat rails. Attaching the net is easierif the front seat backrests are upright and theseats are moved slightly forward.

If the front seats are moved rearward, theyshould not press hard against the net.

CAUTION

Pressure from the front seats against thecargo net could damage the net and/or itsbrackets.

Removing and storing the cargo net(version 1)

Press the release buttons on the locks onthe straps and pull out a small section ofthe strap.

Press in the catches on the straps' hooksand remove the hooks from the eyelet.

Fold up the net's rod at the center androll up the net.

When not in use, the cargo net can be storedunder floor of the cargo area.

Removing and storing the cargo net(version 2)

Release the lower hooks.

Remove the net's upper attachmentsfrom the ceiling brackets.

Fold the net.

When not in use, the cargo net can be storedunder floor of the cargo area.

Related information• Cargo net – general information (p. 144)

05 Loading and storage

05

}}147

Cargo area coverThe cargo area cover can be used to concealobjects in the cargo area.

G031977

Use• Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it

into the holes in the rear cargo area pil-lars.

• To retract (roll up) the cover, release itfrom the holes and guide it toward therear seat backrest.

Installing the cover1. Press the end piece on one side of the

cargo area cover into the retainingbracket in the side panel of the cargoarea .

2. Do the same on the opposite side .

3. Press both sides of the cover until theyclick into place . The red mark will nolonger be visible.

4. Check that both ends of the cover aresecurely locked in place.

Removing the cover1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover

inward.

2. Pull the cover carefully upward and out-ward. The other end will release automati-cally from its retaining bracket.

Folding down the cargo area cover'srear flapThe cargo area cover's rear flap points hori-zontally when the cover is retracted (rolledup). To fold it down:

– Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup-ports and fold it down.

NOTE

On models equipped with this cover, itshould be removed before a child seat isattached to the child restraint anchors.

Related information• Loading – general (p. 142)

Steel cargo gridYour vehicle can be equipped with a steel gridthat helps prevent objects in the cargo areafrom moving forward into the passenger com-partment.

G031978

Folding the grid up/downGrasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull itrearward/upward, or push it downward/forward.

NOTE

If the steel grid is to be used with theoptional cargo area cover, the grid mustbe folded down before the cargo areacover is put in place.

||05 Loading and storage

05

148

Installing the steel cargo gridFor information about the necessary toolsand procedures for installing/removing thesteel cargo grid, please refer to the assemblyinstructions1 that were included when the gridwas purchased.

Related information• Cargo area cover (p. 147)

1 Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

LOCKS AND ALARM

06 Locks and alarm

06

150

Remote key and key bladeTwo remote keys are provided with your vehi-cle. They enable you to unlock the doors andtailgate, and also function as ignition keys tostart the vehicle or operate electrical compo-nents. The remote keys contain detachablemetal key blades for manually locking orunlocking the driver's door and the glovecompartment. The visible ends of these keyblades are unique to make it easier to identify"your" remote key. Up to six remotes can beprogrammed for use on the same vehicle.

WARNING

Never leave the remote key in the ignitionslot if children are to remain in the vehicle.

For more information on the various ignitionmodes, see Ignition modes (p. 79).

Related information• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

• Remote key – range (p. 154)

Remote key – lossIf either of the remote keys (p. 150) is lost, theother should be taken with the vehicle to aVolvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, thecode of the lost remote key must be erasedfrom the system.

NOTE

Additional or duplicate remote control keyscan be obtained from any authorized Volvoretailer.

You can also obtain additional or duplicateremote control keys from certain inde-pendent repair facilities and locksmithsthat are qualified to make remote controlkeys. Each key must be programmed towork with your vehicle.

California Only:

A list of independent repair facilities and/orlocksmiths known to Volvo that can cutand code replacement keys can be found:

• on the Volvo website athttp://www.volvocars.com/us/keys

• by calling Volvo Customer Care at1-800-458-1552

The number of registered keys for the vehiclecan be found by pressing MY CAR and goinginto Settings Information Number ofkeys. For a description of the menu system,see My Car – introduction (p. 76).

USA-5WK49264

FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO5WK49236

FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266

FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO5WK49233

FCC ID:KR55WK49233

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules and RSS-210. Operation is subject tothe following conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Canada-5WK49264

IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO5WK49236

IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266

IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO5WK49233

IC:267T-5WK49233

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Related information• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

06 Locks and alarm

06

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Key memoryThe memory in the remote key makes it possi-ble to store certain personal settings.

The position of the side door mirrors, powerdriver's seat* and the selected instrumentpanel theme1 are stored in the remote keyswhen the vehicle is locked. The next time thedriver's door is unlocked with the sameremote key and the door is opened within2 minutes, the power driver's seat and sidedoor mirrors will automatically move to theposition that they were in when the doorswere most recently locked with the sameremote key. If the seat/mirrors have not beenreadjusted since the vehicle was locked, theywill already be in the position stored in thatparticular remote key and will not move. Formore information on this feature, see Frontseats – power seat (p. 81).

This feature can be activated or deactivatedin the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CARand going into Settings Car settingsCar key memory. For a description of themenu system, see My Car – introduction(p. 76).

NOTE

If the vehicle is locked with the remote keyor is left unlocked for more than 30minutes, the key memory function will bedeactivated.

To reactivate the key's memory:

• Press the unlock button on the remotekey.

For information regarding vehicles with theoptional keyless drive, see Keyless drive*–locking/unlocking (p. 159).

Related information• Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 151)

Locking/unlocking confirmationSettings can be made in the menu system foraudible and visual confirmation when thevehicle has been locked or unlocked. Withthese functions activated, the following willoccur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked:

Locking confirmation• The turn signals flash once, an audible

signal sounds and the door mirrors willfold* in.

Confirmation will only be given when all doorsand the tailgate are properly closed andlocked.

NOTE

If you do not receive confirmation whenlocking the vehicle, check whether a dooror the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature hasbeen turned off in the menu.

Unlocking confirmation• The turn signals will flash twice and the

door mirrors will fold* out.

1 Optional digital instrument panel only

||06 Locks and alarm

06

152

Making a settingDifferent alternatives for locking/unlockingconfirmation can be selected in the menus bypressing MY CAR on the center console con-trol panel.

• To activate visual confirmation: go toSettings Car settings Lightsettings and select Door lockconfirmation light and/or Unlockconfirmation light by pressing OK/MENU.

• To activate audible confirmation: go toSettings Car settings Locksettings and select Audibleconfirmation by pressing OK/MENU.

For a description of the menu system, see MyCar – introduction (p. 76).

Lock indicator

Lock/alarm indicator light

A flashing indicator light at the base of thewindshield verifies that the vehicle is locked.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 163)

• Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

• Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

Immobilizer (start inhibitor)The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helpsprevent unauthorized persons from startingthe engine.

Each of the keys supplied with your vehiclecontains a coded transponder. The code inthe key is transmitted to an antenna in theignition slot where it is compared to the codestored in the start inhibitor module. The vehi-cle will start only with a properly coded key. Ifyou misplace a key, take the other keys to atrained and qualified Volvo service technicianfor reprogramming as an anti-theft measure.The following messages (which may appear inthe instrument panel display) are related tothe immobilizer:

06 Locks and alarm

06

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

Message Meaning

Insert carkey

Remote key not recognizedduring start. Try to start thevehicle again.

Car keynot found

Vehicles with keyless drive*only. Remote key not recog-nized during start. Try tostart the vehicle again.

If the problem continues,insert the remote key into theignition slot and try to startthe vehicle again.

Immobil-izer Trystartagain

Remote key fault duringstart. Contact an authorizedVolvo workshop.

CAUTION

Never use force when inserting the remotekey in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannotbe started if the transponder is damaged.

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the followingcondition: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO

Operation is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

For information on starting the vehicle, seeStarting the engine (p. 247).

Remote key – functionsThe remote key is used e.g., to unlock thedoors and start the engine.

Remote key

Lock

Unlock

Approach lighting

Tailgate unlock

Panic alarm

Buttons on the remote Lock – Press the Lock button on the

remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate.The turn signals will flash once to confirmlocking.

Unlock – Press the Unlock button on theremote once to unlock the driver's door.

||06 Locks and alarm

06

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

After a short pause, press the Unlock buttona second time within 10 seconds to unlockthe other doors and the tailgate.

This function can be changed so that alldoors unlock at the same time by pressingMy Car and going to Settings Carsettings Lock settings Change doorsunlock setting. For a description of the menusystem, see My Car – introduction (p. 76).

Approach lighting – As you approachthe vehicle, press the button on the remotekey to light the interior lighting, parking lights,license plate lighting and the lights in the doormirrors*.

These lights will switch off automatically after30, 60 or 90 seconds. For a description of themenu system, see My Car – introduction(p. 76).

Unlock tailgate – Press the button twicewithin several seconds to disarm the alarmsystem (the alarm indicator light on the dash-board will go out), and unlock only the tail-gate.

Pressing this button for several seconds alsoopens the tailgate on models equipped withthe optional power tailgate.

NOTE

As an added safety precaution, the parkinglights will come on automatically for ashort period when the tailgate has beenopened.

After closing, the tailgate will not automati-cally relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearmthe alarm.

For information on opening the tailgate fromthe passenger compartment, see Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

Panic alarm – This button can be usedto attract attention during emergency situa-tions.

To activate the panic alarm, press and holdthis button for at least 3 seconds or press ittwice within 3 seconds. The turn signals andhorn will be activated. The panic alarm willstop automatically after 2 minutes and45 seconds.

To deactivate, wait approximately 5 secondsand press the button again.

The Panic alarm button will not unlock thevehicle.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

• Locking/unlocking – from the outside(p. 163)

• Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 151)

Remote key – rangeThe remote key has a range of approximately60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle.

NOTE

Buildings or other obstacles may interferewith the function of the remote key. Thevehicle can also be locked or unlockedwith the key blade, see Alarm-related func-tions (p. 171).

If the remote key is removed from the vehiclewhile the engine is running or if the ignition isin mode I or II and all of the doors are closed,a message will appear in the instrument paneldisplay and there will be an audible signal.

When the remote key is returned to the vehi-cle, the message will be erased and the audi-ble signal will stop after one of the followinghas been done:

• The remote key is inserted in the ignitionslot

• The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph(30 km/h)

• The OK button on the left steering wheellever is pressed

Related information• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

06 Locks and alarm

06

155

Detachable key blade – generalinformationEach remote key contains a detachable metalkey blade (p. 150) for mechanically locking orunlocking the driver's door and the glovecompartment. The key blades have a uniquecode, which is used if new ones need to beproduced. This code is available at an author-ized Volvo retailer.

The visible ends of these key blades areunique to make it easier to identify "your"remote key.

Related information• Detachable key blade – unlocking

(p. 156)

• Detachable key blade – detaching/rein-serting (p. 155)

Detachable key blade – detaching/reinsertingThe detachable key blade (p. 155) can beremoved or reinserted in the remote key asfollows:

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

Pull the key blade straight out of theremote key.

Reinserting the blade1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the

key blade up.

2. Carefully slide the key blade into itsgroove.

3. Gently press the key blade in the grooveuntil it clicks into place.

Related information• Detachable key blade – unlocking

(p. 156)

• Child safety locks (p. 61)

06 Locks and alarm

06

156

Detachable key blade – unlockingYour vehicle's remote key (p. 150) contains ametal, detachable key blade that can be usedto unlock the driver's door, lock the glovecompartment, etc.

Driver's door keyhole cover

If the remote key does not function normally(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can beunlocked with the detachable key blade.

1. Remove the detachable keyblade (p. 155) from the remote key.

2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)straight up in the hole on the underside ofthe keyhole cover.> The cover will come off due to the

pressure exerted when the key blade ispushed upward.

3. Insert the key blade as far as possible inthe driver's door lock. Turn the key bladeto unlock the driver's door. This will trig-ger the alarm.

4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remotekey in the ignition slot. This also appliesto vehicles equipped with the optionalkeyless drive.

5. Press the cover back into place after thedoor has been unlocked.

Related information• Remote key and key blade (p. 150)

• Remote key – replacing the battery(p. 157)

Private lockingBy utilizing the remote key with the key bladeremoved, the private locking feature enablesyou to block access to the glove compart-ment and disconnect the tailgate from thecentral locking system for e.g., valet parkingor when the vehicle is brought to the retailerfor service.

G017869

Normal locking/unlocking points

06 Locks and alarm

06

}}157

G017870

Locking/unlocking points with private lockingactivated.

With the private locking function activated:

• The vehicle's doors can be locked orunlocked with the remote

• The engine can be started

• The glove compartment cannot beunlocked

• The tailgate cannot be unlocked oropened with the remote

• The rear floor hatch cannot be opened

Activating the private locking function

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-ment lock.

Turn the key blade180 degrees clock-wise.

Remove the key blade from the lock. Amessage will appear in the instrumentpanel display.

Deactivating the private lockingfunctionTurn the key blade 180 degrees counter-clockwise in the glove compartment lock todeactivate private locking.

For information on locking the glove compart-ment normally, without activating the privatelocking function, see Locking/unlocking theglove compartment (p. 165).

Remote key – replacing the batteryThe remote key can be opened if the batteryneeds to be replaced.

The battery should be replaced if:

• The information symbol illuminates andLow battery in remote control. Pleasechange batteries. is shown in the dis-play and/or

• if the locks do not react after severalattempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

NOTE

The remote key's range is normallyapproximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehi-cle.

||06 Locks and alarm

06

158

Opening the remote key

The remote key has one CR 2430, 3V batteryonly

To open the remote key

Slide the spring loaded catch to theside.

Pull the key blade straight out of theremote key.

Insert a small screwdriver in the holebehind the spring loaded catch and care-fully pry up the cover. Turn the remotekey with the buttons upward so that thebattery does not fall out when the cover isremoved.

Inserting a new battery

CAUTION

When handling batteries, avoid touchingtheir contact surfaces as this could resultin poor battery function in the remote key.

Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–)sides.

1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old bat-tery.

2. Insert a new one with the (+) side down-ward.

Closing the remote key1. Press the remote key's cover into place.

2. Hold the remote key with the slot for thekey blade up.

3. Carefully slide the key blade into itsgroove.

4. Gently press the key blade in the grooveuntil it clicks into place.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries usedin the remote control meet the UN Manualof Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section38.3.

Batteries installed in the key from the fac-tory and batteries exchanged by anauthorized Volvo workshop fulfill the abovecriteria.

Old batteries should be disposed of prop-erly at a recycling center or at your Volvoretailer.

Related information• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

Keyless drive*– locking/unlockingThis system makes it possible to unlock andlock the vehicle without having to press anybuttons on the remote key. It is only neces-sary to have a keyless drive remote key inyour possession to operate the central lockingsystem.

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft(1.5 meters)

NOTE

• The gear selector must in the P posi-tion before the vehicle can be lockedand the alarm can be armed.

• The buttons on the keyless driveremote key can also be used to lockand unlock the vehicle. For more infor-mation, see Remote key and key blade(p. 150).

Both of the remote keys provided with thevehicle have the keyless function, and addi-tional ones can be ordered. The system canaccommodate up to six remote keys.

The red rings in the illustration indicate thearea around the vehicle that is within range ofthe keyless drive antennas.

Locking the vehicle

Models with keyless drive have a button on theoutside door handles

The doors and the tailgate can be locked bypressing the lock button in any of the outsidedoor handles.

NOTE

On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selec-tor must be in the Park (P) position, alldoors and the tailgate must be closed andthe ignition must be switched off beforethe vehicle can be locked.

Unlocking the vehicle• A keyless drive remote key must be on

the same side of the vehicle as the doorto be opened, and be within 5 feet(1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tail-gate (see the shaded areas in the illustra-tion).

• Pull a door handle to unlock and open thedoor or pull the tailgate opening control.

The number of doors that are unlocked at thesame time can be set in the vehicle's menusystem. Press MY CAR and go to Carsettings Lock settings Keyless entry.For a description of the menu system, see MyCar – introduction (p. 76).

Related information• Alarm indicator (p. 170)

06 Locks and alarm

06

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive* – unlocking with keybladeIf the remote key does not function normally(weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can beunlocked with the detachable key blade.

Driver's door keyhole cover

1. Remove the key blade from the remotekey (see Detachable key blade – detach-ing/reinserting (p. 155) for instructions).

2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm)straight up in the hole on the underside ofthe keyhole cover.> The cover will come off due to the

pressure exerted when the key blade ispushed upward.

3. Insert the key blade as far as possible inthe driver's door lock. Turn the key bladeto unlock the driver's door. This will trig-ger the alarm.

4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remotekey in the ignition slot. This also appliesto vehicles equipped with the optionalkeyless drive.

5. Press the cover back into place after thedoor has been unlocked.

Related information• Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159)

• Alarm – general information (p. 169)

Keyless drive* – key memoryWhen you leave the vehicle with a remote keyin your possession and lock any door, the

06 Locks and alarm

06

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

position of the driver's seat2 and door mirrorswill be stored in the remote key's memory.

The next time a door is opened by a personwith the same remote key in his/her posses-sion, the driver's seat and door mirrors willautomatically move to the position that theywere in when the door was most recentlylocked.

NOTE

If several people carrying remote keysapproach the vehicle at the same time, thedriver's seat and door mirrors will assumethe positions they were in for the personwho opens the driver's door.

See also power seats (p. 81) for informationon adjusting and storing the seat's position inthe seat memory.

NOTE

If the vehicle is locked by pressing the but-ton on one of the door handles or bypressing the lock button on the remotekey, or if it is left unlocked for more than30 minutes, the key memory function willbe deactivated.

To reactivate the key's memory:

• Unlock the vehicle by pulling a doorhandle with the remote key in yourpossession or by pressing the unlockbutton on the remote key.

Related information• Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159)

• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Keyless drive* – messagesIf all of the remote keys are removed from thevehicle while the engine is running or if theignition modes (p. 79) is in mode II and all ofthe doors are closed, a message will appearin the instrument panel display and an audiblesignal will sound.

When at least one remote key has beenreturned to the car, the message will beerased in the display and the audible signalwill stop when:

• A door has been opened and closed

• The remote key has been inserted in theignition slot

• The OK button has been pressed. For thelocation of this button, see Informationdisplay – menu controls (p. 113)

2 Power seats only

06 Locks and alarm

06

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION

• Keyless drive remote keys shouldnever be left in the vehicle. In the eventof a break-in, a remote found in thevehicle could make it possible to startthe engine.

• Electromagnetic fields or metalobstructions can interfere with thekeyless drive system. The remote keyshould never be placed closer thanapproximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) tocell phones, metallic objects or e.g.,stored in a metal briefcase.

USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952,KR55WK48964

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

Siemens VDO

5WK48891

Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

For Automobile Use

Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952,267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891

NOTE

This device complies with RSS -210 of Indus-try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept interference received,including interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the manufacturer could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

Keyless drive* – antenna locationsThe keyless drive system has a number ofantennas located at various points in the vehi-cle.

On the tailgate, near the wiper motor

Left rear door handle

Under the floor of the cargo area, nearthe rear seat

Right rear door handle

Under the rear section of the center con-sole

Under the front section of the center con-sole

06 Locks and alarm

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

WARNING

People with implanted pacemakers shouldnot allow the pacemaker to come closerthan 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keylessdrive system's antennas. This is to helpprevent interference between the pace-maker and the keyless drive system.

Related information• Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159)

Locking/unlocking – from the outsideThe remote key (p. 150) is used to lock/unlockall of the doors and the tailgate at the sametime. Different settings for unlocking the vehi-cle can be selected, see Remote key – func-tions (p. 153).

Before the vehicle can be locked from theoutside with the remote key, the driver's doormust be closed. If the tailgate or any otherdoor is open, it will be locked and the alarmwill be armed.

NOTE

Be sure the remote key is outside of thevehicle before the other doors/tailgate areclosed to help avoid locking the remoteinside the vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optionalkeyless drive system, all doors/tailgate mustbe closed before the vehicle can be locked.

The first press on the unlock button unlocksthe driver's door and a second press unlocksthe other doors and the tailgate (see alsoremote key and key blade (p. 150)). This set-ting can be changed in the menu system. SeeMY CAR (p. 76) for a description.

If the locks repeatedly do not react when theunlock button is pressed, it may be necessaryto replace the battery in the remote, seeRemote key – replacing the battery (p. 157).

In this case the vehicle can be unlocked withthe detachable key blade (p. 156).

Related information• Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

06 Locks and alarm

06

164

Manual lockingIn certain situations (e.g., if there is no electri-cal current in the vehicle), the doors can belocked manually.

The detachable key blade (p. 155) can beused in the lock cylinder in the driver's doorto lock that door.

The other doors do not have lock cylindersand the slot on the rear edge of each doorhas to be used to lock it. This will lock thedoor from the outside but it can still beopened from inside the vehicle. To do so:

Manually locking a door

– Insert the key blade into the slot and turnit 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot ina particular door locks that door only).

In the horizontal position, the door cannotbe opened from the outside.

In the vertical position, the door can beopened from the inside and the outside.

NOTE

If the manual child safety lock (p. 61) isactivated for a rear side door and that dooris also locked manually, the door cannotbe opened from the outside or inside. Thedoor can only be unlocked with the remotekey or the central locking button.

Related information• Remote key – replacing the battery

(p. 157)

Locking/unlocking – from insideThe lock buttons on the door panel can beused to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-gate at the same time. Press to lock and

to unlock.

From inside the vehicle (central lockingbutton)

Central locking button

The lock buttons on the door panel can beused to lock or unlock all doors and the tail-gate at the same time. Press to lock and

to unlock.

UnlockingThe vehicle can be unlocked from inside thevehicle in two ways:

• By pressing the unlock button .

• The door can be unlocked by pulling thedoor handle once and opened by pullingthe handle again.

06 Locks and alarm

06

165

Locking• Press the lock button after the front

doors have been closed.

• Each door can be locked individually withthe lock button on the respective doors.The door must be closed first.

Alternative locking when parkingThe central locking button on the driver'sdoor can also be used to lock the vehiclewhen you leave it. To do so:

1. Open the door.

2. Press the lock section of the button.

3. Close the door. This will lock the vehiclecompletely and arm the alarm.

NOTE

Please be aware that locking the vehicle inthis way makes it possible to lock theremote key in the passenger compartment.To help avoid this, lock the vehicle fromthe outside by pressing the lock button onthe remote key.

If the vehicle is locked using the centrallocking button, be sure that the remote keyis in your possession before closing thedoor.

Automatic relockingIf the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-matically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm willre-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or thetailgate has been opened.

Automatic lockingWhen the vehicle starts to move, the doorsand tailgate can be locked automatically. Thisfeature can be turned on or off by pressingMY CAR and going to Car settings Locksettings Automatic door locking.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – from the outside

(p. 163)

• Alarm – general information (p. 169)

• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Locking/unlocking – glovecompartmentThe glove compartment can only be lockedand unlocked using the detachable key bladein the remote key. For information on remov-ing the key blade from the remote key, seeDetachable key blade – detaching/reinserting(p. 155).

Insert the key blade in the glove compart-ment lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Remove the key blade from the lock.

06 Locks and alarm

06

166

Locking/unlocking – tailgateThe tailgate can be opened, locked andunlocked in several ways.

Tailgate unlock button on the remote key

Unlocking the tailgate with the remotekey– Press the tailgate unlock button on the

remote key to unlock (but not open3) thetailgate. See Remote key and keyblade (p. 150) for more information.> The alarm indicator light on the dash-

board will go out to indicate that thealarm is not monitoring the entire vehi-cle.

NOTE

• If the doors are locked while the tail-gate is open, the tailgate will remainunlocked until the vehicle is relockedby pressing the Lock button on theremote key.

• On keyless drive vehicles, the gearselector must be in the Park (P) posi-tion, all doors and the tailgate must beclosed and the ignition must beswitched off before the vehicle can belocked.

Unlocking the tailgate from the driver'sseat

– Press the button on the lighting panel (1)to unlock (but not open4) the tailgate.

NOTE

The taillights will illuminate automaticallyfor a short period when the tailgate hasbeen opened.

Locking the tailgate with the remotekeyPress the lock button ( ) on the remote.See also (p. 150).

The alarm indicator on the dashboard willbegin flashing to show that the vehicle islocked and that the alarm has been armed.

Opening that tailgate manually

The tailgate is held closed by an electroniclocking mechanism. To open:

3 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (p. 167).4 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (p. 167).

06 Locks and alarm

06

}}167

1. Press lightly on the rubberized plateunder the handle to release the lock.

2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate.

CAUTION

• When pressing the rubberized plate,only light pressure is necessary torelease the tailgate's electronic lockingmechanism.

• When opening the tailgate, pull it upusing the handle. Too much pressureon the rubberized plate can damageits electrical connections.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

• Locking/unlocking – from the outside(p. 163)

Power tailgate – automatic opening/closingThe power tailgate can be opened/closedusing a button on the lighting panel or on theremote key.

Automatic openingThe power tailgate can be opened automati-cally in the three ways:

•By pressing and holding the but-ton on the lighting panel until the tailgatebegins to open.

•By pressing and holding the but-ton on the remote key until the tailgatebegins to open.

• By pressing the rubber-covered buttonunder the outer handle on the tailgate.

The taillights illuminate automatically whenthe automatic open function is used.

CAUTION

Be sure that there is adequate spaceabove and behind the vehicle before open-ing the tailgate automatically.

The vehicle should not be driven or movedwith the tailgate in the open position. How-ever, if the vehicle is moved with the tail-gate in the open position, the automaticclosing function will be inoperative untilone of the following occurs:

• The tailgate is closed manually

• The ignition is switched off and the keyis removed for approximately 10minutes (the tailgate will function againafter restart).

NOTE

If the tailgate has been opened and closedcontinuously too long, the automatic func-tion will be deactivated to avoid overload-ing the electrical system. The automaticfunction can be used again after approxi-mately 2 minutes.

If the vehicle's battery has been dis-charged or disconnected, or if the tailgatehas been open for more than 24 hours, thetailgate must be opened and closed oncemanually to reset the system.

||06 Locks and alarm

06

168

Automatic closingThe power tailgate can be closed by pressing

the -button on the tailgate (see theillustration) or by pressing it down.

WARNING

Be sure that no one is near the tailgatewhen it is opened or closed automatically.The tailgate should never be obstructed inany way when it is operated.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

Power tailgate – programmingThe tailgate's maximum opening angle can beprogrammed, which can be useful, for exam-ple, if the tailgate has to be opened in agarage with a low ceiling.

To do so:

• Open the tailgate manually, hold it at thedesired maximum opening angle andpress the tailgate's closing button for atleast 3 seconds. When the tailgate isreleased, programming is complete.

• To remove this programming, open thetailgate manually to a higher openingangle and press the tailgate's closing but-ton for at least 3 seconds.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

Power tailgate – interruptionAutomatic opening or closing the tailgate canbe interrupted in four ways:

•By pressing the button on thelighting panel.

•By pressing the button on theremote key.

• By pressing the button on the lower edgeof the tailgate.

• By pressing the rubber-covered buttonunder the outer handle on the tailgate.

If one of these actions is taken, the tailgatewill stop and reopen.

Pinch protectionIf the tailgate is obstructed while it is beingoperated, the pinch protection function isactivated.

• If the tailgate is being opened, the electri-cal function will be switched off and thetailgate will stop.

• If the tailgate is being closed, it will stopand reopen.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

06 Locks and alarm

06

169

Power tailgate – manual opening/closingThe power tailgate can be disconnected fromthe vehicle’s electrical system.

This is done by quickly pulling the outer han-dle twice. The tailgate can then be opened/closed manually.

Related information• Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

Alarm – general informationThe alarm system provides a warning if anattempt is made to break into the vehicle.

The alarm is automatically armed (p. 170)whenever the vehicle is locked with theremote key.

When armed, the alarm continuously monitorsa number of points on the vehicle. The follow-ing conditions will trigger the alarm:

• The hood is forced open.

• The tailgate is forced open.

• A door is forced open.

• The ignition slot is tampered with.

• An attempt is made to start the vehiclewith a non-approved key (a key notcoded to the car's ignition).

• The battery is disconnected (while thealarm is armed).

• The siren is disconnected when the alarmis disarmed.

A message will appear in the information dis-play if a fault should occur in the alarm sys-tem. Contact a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair any of the compo-nents in the alarm system yourself. Thiscould affect the insurance policy on thevehicle.

Related information• Alarm – turning off (p. 171)

• Alarm signal (p. 171)

• Alarm indicator (p. 170)

06 Locks and alarm

06

170

Alarm indicatorThe status of the alarm system is indicated bythe red indicator light on the dashboard (seeillustration):

• Indicator light off: the alarm is notarmed (p. 170)

• The indicator light flashes at one-secondintervals: the alarm is armed

• The indicator light flashes rapidly beforethe remote key is inserted in the ignitionslot and the ignition is put in mode I: thealarm has been triggered.

Related information• Alarm – general information (p. 169)

• Alarm – turning off (p. 171)

• Alarm signal (p. 171)

Alarm – arming/disarmingThe alarm system provides a warning if anattempt is made to break into the vehicle.

Arming the alarm– Press the Lock button on the remote key.

One long flash of the turn signals will con-firm that the alarm (p. 169) is armed.

Alarm confirmation settings can be changedin MY CAR, under Car settings Locksettings Keyless entry. For a descriptionof the menu system, see My Car – introduc-tion (p. 76).

USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3)This device complies with part 15 of the FCCrules. Operation is subject to the followingconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3)This device is subject to the following condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Disarming the alarm– Press the Unlock button on the remote

key.> Two short flashes from the car's direc-

tion indicators confirm that the alarmhas been deactivated and that alldoors are unlocked.

Related information• Alarm indicator (p. 170)

• Alarm signal (p. 171)

• Alarm – turning off (p. 171)

• Alarm-related functions (p. 171)

06 Locks and alarm

06

}}171

Alarm signalAn audible (p. 169) signal is given by a batterypowered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for30 seconds.

The visual alarm signal is given by flashing allturn signals for approximately 5 minutes oruntil the alarm is turned off.

Related information• Alarm indicator (p. 170)

• Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 170)

• Alarm – turning off (p. 171)

Alarm – turning offThe alarm system provides a warning if anattempt is made to break into the vehicle.

If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped bypressing the Unlock button on the remote keyor by inserting the remote key in the ignitionslot. Two short flashes from the car's turn sig-nals confirm that the alarm has been turnedoff.

Related information• Alarm indicator (p. 170)

• Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 170)

• Remote key – replacing the battery(p. 157)

Alarm-related functionsThe following is general information regardingthe alarm system in your vehicle.

Automatic re-armingIf the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto-matically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarmwill re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door orthe tailgate has been opened.

Remote key not functioningIf the remote key is not functioning properly,the alarm can be turned off and the vehiclecan be started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade.> This will trigger the alarm.

2. To turn off the alarm, insert the remotekey into the ignition slot (also on vehicleswith the optional keyless drive).

3. Start the engine.

||06 Locks and alarm

06

172

Related information• Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 156)

• Detachable key blade – general informa-tion (p. 155)

• Starting the engine (p. 247)

DRIVER SUPPORT

07 Driver support

07

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Active chassis* (Four C)Active chassis, Four-C (ContinuouslyControlled Chassis Concept), regulates thecharacteristics of the shock absorbers so thatthe vehicle's driving characteristics can beadjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,Sport and Advanced.

Operation

Chassis settings

Use the buttons in the center console tochange setting. The setting in use when theengine is switched off is activated the nexttime the engine is started.

NOTE

This system is available on Canadian mod-els only.

ComfortComfort mode offers a somewhat softer rideand the transmission shifts gears at lowerrpm. This mode is particularly suitable forlong-distance highway driving. The indicatorlight in the button will be on when this modeis selected.

SportIn this mode, the vehicle's body sway isreduced during cornering and steeringresponse is more immediate. The transmis-sion shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driv-ing. The indicator light in the button will be onto indicate that Sport mode has beenselected.

AdvancedIn this mode, body sway in curves is minimaland steering response is very direct. Gearshifting is done at high rpm in each gear fordynamic and active driving.

Related information• Adjustable steering force* (p. 179)

Stability system – introductionThe Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemconsists of a number of functions designed tohelp reduce wheel spin, counteract skiddingand to generally help improve directional sta-bility.

A pulsating sound will be audiblewhen the system is actively operat-ing and is normal. Acceleration willalso be slightly slower than normal.

WARNING

ESC is a supplementary aid and cannotdeal with all situations or road conditions.

The driver is always responsible for oper-ating the vehicle in a safe manner inaccordance with current traffic regulations.

ESC consists of the following functions:

• Traction control

• Spin control

• Active Yaw Control

• Engine Drag Control

• Corner Traction Control

• Trailer Stability Assist

07 Driver support

07

}}175

Traction Control (TC)This function is designed to help reducewheel spin at low speeds by transferringpower from a drive wheel that begins to losetraction to the wheel on the opposite side ofthe vehicle (on the same axle).

Spin Control (SC)The SC function is designed to help preventthe drive wheels from spinning while the vehi-cle is accelerating.

Active Yaw Control (AYC)This function helps maintain directional stabil-ity, for example when cornering, by brakingone or more of the wheels if the vehicleshows a tendency to skid or slide laterally.

Corner Traction Control (CTC)CTC compensates for understeering andhelps provide additional stability when accel-erating through a curve by preventing theinside wheel from spinning. This is particularlyuseful when accelerating on a curving high-way on-ramp.

CTC is most effective if the stability system'sSport mode is selected. See the sectionabout Sport mode.

Engine Drag Control (EDC)EDC helps keep the engine running if thewheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., whenshifting down in the Geartronic manual shift-ing mode or while using the engine's brakingfunction on a slippery surface. If the engine

were to stop, power steering would not func-tion, making the vehicle more difficult tosteer.

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)1The TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is tow-ing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer havebegun to sway. See Trailer Stability Assist(TSA) (p. 284) for more information.

This system is automatically deactivated if thedriver selects Sport mode.

Related information• Stability system – operation (p. 175)

• Stability system – symbols and messages(p. 177)

• Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 284)

Stability system – operation

Operation

Sport modeThe stability system is always activated andcannot be switched off.

However, the driver canselect Sport mode, whichoffers more active drivingcharacteristics.

Sport mode can be selectedin the MY CAR menus, see

My Car – introduction (p. 76).

In Sport mode, the engine management sys-tem monitors movement of the acceleratorpedal and steering wheel for sportier drivingby allowing more lateral movement of the rearwheels before ESC is activated.

Under certain circumstances, such as whendriving with snow chains, or driving in deepsnow or loose sand, it may be advisable totemporarily use Sport mode for maximumtractive force.

If the driver releases pressure on the acceler-ator pedal, ETC will also activate to help sta-bilize the vehicle.

To switch to Sport mode:

Sport mode remains active until the driverswitches it off in the menu or until the engine

1 Included when a Volvo trailer hitch is installed

||07 Driver support

07

176

is switched off. ETC will return to normalmode when the engine is restarted.

Related information• Stability system – introduction (p. 174)

• Stability system – symbols and messages(p. 177)

07 Driver support

07

}}177

Stability system – symbols andmessages

Symbols and messages in the maininstrument panelA text message can be erased by pressingbriefly the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

ESC Temporarily OFF The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The functionreactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly.

• Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it.

• If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo work-shop to have the system inspected.

and

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel.

Steady glow for2 seconds.

The system is performing a self-diagnostic test.

||07 Driver support

07

178

Symbol Message Description

Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated.

Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

WARNING

The stability system is intended to helpimprove driving safety. It supplements, butcan never replace, the driver's judgmentand responsibility when operating the vehi-cle. Speed and driving style should alwaysbe adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information• Stability system – introduction (p. 174)

• Stability system – operation (p. 175)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

Adjustable steering force*Steering force increases with the speed of thevehicle to give the driver enhanced sense ofcontrol and stability. At low speed the vehicleis easy to steer in order to facilitate parking,etc.

Adjustable steering force*Steering force can be changed under MYCAR Car settings Steering wheelforce. Select Low, Medium or High. For adescription of the menu system, My Car –introduction (p. 76).

NOTE

This steering force level menu functioncannot be accessed when the vehicle is inmotion.

NOTE

In certain situations, the power steeringmay become too warm and will have to betemporarily cooled down. While this ishappening, the power steering effect willbe reduced slightly and somewhat moreeffort may be required to turn the steeringwheel.

If this occurs, a message will be displayedin the instrument panel.

Related information• Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 174)

Road Sign Information (RSI)* –introductionRSI is a feature that helps the driver see roadsigns with the posted speed limit.

Introduction

Examples of readable road signs

If the vehicle passes a sign showing thespeed limit, this will be displayed in the centerconsole.

WARNING

RSI does not function in all situations andis only intended to provide supplementaryinformation.

The driver is always responsible for oper-ating the vehicle safely.

Related information• Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation

(p. 180)

• Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations(p. 180)

07 Driver support

07

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Road Sign Information (RSI) –operation

Speed limit information

When RSI registers a road sign showing thespeed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbolon the instrument panel.

Settings in MY CAR

Possible settings in MY CAR

Displaying the speed limit indication can bedeactivated. To do so:

• Deselect the alternative in MY CARSettings Car settings Road SignInformation or cancel by pressing EXIT.

Speed alertThe driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicleexceeds the posted speed limit by more than3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when thesymbol with the posted speed limit in theinstrument panel begins to flash.

To activate speed alert:

• Check the Speed alert box in MY CARSettings Car settings Speed alertor cancel by pressing EXIT.

Related information• Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-

tion (p. 179)

• Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations(p. 180)

• My Car – introduction (p. 76)

Road Sign Information (RSI) –limitations

RSI's camera has the same limitations as thehuman eye. See The camera’s limitations(p. 217) for more information about the cam-era's limitations.

Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit(such as a sign with a town's name and thepermitted speed limit) will not be registeredby RSI.

Other factors that may interfere with RSIinclude:

• Faded signs

• Signs located in a curve

• Twisted or damaged signs

• Obstructed signs

• Signs that are partially covered by snow,ice, etc.

Related information• Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-

tion (p. 179)

• Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation(p. 180)

• The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

07 Driver support

07

}}181

Cruise control (CC) – introductionCruise control is designed to assist the driverby maintaining a set speed. It is primarilyintended for use on long straight roads insteady traffic, such as on highways and othermain roads.

Operation

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicatesstandby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (graysymbol indicates standby mode)

Related information• Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set-

ting speed (p. 181)

• Cruise control (CC) – deactivating(p. 183)

Cruise control (CC) – engaging andsetting speedCruise control is designed to assist the driverby maintaining a set speed. It is primarilyintended for use on long straight roads insteady traffic, such as on highways and othermain roads.

Engaging the cruise control function

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display

Standby mode

Resume set speed

Deactivating

Activate/set speed

Selected speed (gray symbol indicatesstandby mode)

Cruise control active: white symbol (graysymbol indicates standby mode)

||07 Driver support

07

182

Before a speed can be set, the cruise controlsystem must be engaged (put in standbymode).

– Press the CRUISE button (1).> The symbol illuminates and the text

(---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con-trol is in standby mode.

NOTE

Putting cruise control in standby modedoes not set a cruising speed.

Setting a speedUse the or buttons set the vehicle'scurrent speed. The set speed is shown in thedisplay.

NOTE

Cruise control cannot be engaged atspeeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).

Adjusting the set speedAfter a speed has been set, it can beincreased or decreased by using the or buttons.

1. Press or briefly and release thebutton to increase or decrease vehiclespeed by approximately 1 mph or 1 km/h.> This will become the set speed when

the button is released.

2. Press and hold one of these buttons toincrease/decrease the speed in 1-mph or1-km/h increments. Release the buttonwhen you have reached the desiredspeed.

NOTE

• A temporary increase in speed bypressing the accelerator pedal, for lessthan 1 minute (e.g. when passinganother car), does not affect the cur-rent cruise control setting. The vehiclewill automatically return to the previ-ously set speed when the acceleratorpedal is released.

• If one of the cruise control buttons iskept depressed for more than approx.1 minute cruise control is disengaged.The engine must then be switched offin order to reset cruise control.

Related information• Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181)

• Cruise control (CC) – deactivating(p. 183)

07 Driver support

07

}}183

Toggling between ACC and CC(standard Cruise Control)Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) helps thedriver maintain a safe distance/time interval tothe vehicle ahead.

Switching from ACC to CCThis may be useful if, for example, the radarsensor is obstructed in some way. SeeAdaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193)for additional information.

• Press and hold the button; the symbolin the instrument panel will switch from

to .

> This activates the standard cruise controlfunction (see Cruise control (CC) – intro-duction (p. 181)).

WARNING

Switching from ACC to CC means that:

• Your vehicle will no longer automati-cally maintain a set distance to a vehi-cle ahead.

• Only the set speed will be maintainedand the driver will have to apply thebrakes when needed.

Switching from CC to ACCSwitch off cruise control by pressing onceor twice as needed according to the instruc-tions in the previous section "Turning ACC off

completely." The next time the system isswitched on, ACC will be reactivated.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – function(p. 185)

Cruise control (CC) – deactivatingCruise control is designed to assist the driverby maintaining a set speed. It is primarilyintended for use on long straight roads insteady traffic, such as on highways and othermain roads.

Automatic deactivationThe cruise control is automatically deacti-vated temporarily if one of the followingoccurs:

• If the speed drops below approximately20 mph (30 km/h).

• When the brake pedal is depressed.

• If the gear selector is moved to positionN.

• During wheel spin or wheel lock-up.

• If the vehicle's speed is increased byusing the accelerator pedal for more than1 minute.

• Engine speed (rpm) is too high or too low.

The currently set speed will be saved in thesystem's memory.

Temporary deactivationThe driver can temporarily deactivate thecruise control by pressing 0. The savedspeed is shown in brackets in the informationdisplay.

||07 Driver support

07

184

Resume set speedIf the cruise control has been deactivatedtemporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing

. The vehicle's speed returns to the mostrecently set speed.

WARNING

There may be a significant increase inspeed after the button has beenpressed.

DeactivationThe Cruise control is disengaged by pressing

or by switching off the engine. The setspeed is cleared.

WARNING

Cruise control should not be used in heavytraffic or when driving on wet or slipperyroads. Cruise control may not maintain setspeed on steep downgrades.

Related information• Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181)

• Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set-ting speed (p. 181)

Adaptive Cruise Control – introductionACC is an optional system designed to assistthe driver by maintaining a set speed or a settime interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primar-ily intended for use on long straight roads insteady traffic, such as on highways and othermain roads.

When the driver has set the desired speedand the time interval to the vehicle ahead,ACC functions as follows:

• If there are no other vehicles in the laneahead of you, your vehicle will travel atthe set speed.

• If ACC's radar sensor detects a slowermoving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys-tem will adapt your vehicle's speed tohelp maintain the set time interval to thevehicle ahead. When there are no longerslower moving vehicles ahead, your vehi-cle will accelerate to resume the setspeed.

If ACC is switched off completely or instandby mode and your vehicle comes tooclose to another vehicle ahead, the driver willbe warned by the Distance Alert system (seeDistance Alert – introduction (p. 198)).

WARNING

• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot coverall driving situations and traffic,weather and road conditions. The"Function" section provides informa-tion about limitations that the drivermust be aware of before using thisfeature.

• This system is designed to be a sup-plementary driving aid. It is not, how-ever, intended to replace the driver'sattention and judgement. The driver isresponsible for maintaining a safe dis-tance and speed and must intervene ifAdaptive Cruise Control does notmaintain a suitable speed or suitabledistance to the vehicle ahead.

• Maintenance of ACC components mayonly be performed by a trained andqualified Volvo technician.

07 Driver support

07

}}185

Operation

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

Decrease/increase time interval

Put in active mode and set a speed (eachadditional press increases/decreasesspeed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))

Set speed (shown in green when active,shown in white when in standby mode)

Time interval

ACC active (green symbol) or in standbymode (white symbol)

Related information• Toggling between ACC and CC (standard

Cruise Control) (p. 183)

• Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshooting(p. 197)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols andmessages (p. 195)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – setting timeinterval (p. 189)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed(p. 188)

• Radar sensor (p. 193)

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – QueueAssist (p. 191)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – passinganother vehicle (p. 191)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations(p. 193)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – function(p. 185)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging(p. 187)

• Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating(p. 189)

Adaptive Cruise Control – function

Function

Function overview2

Warning light, braking by driver required

Controls in steering wheel

Radar sensor in front grille

Adaptive Cruise Control consists of:

• A cruise control system to maintain a setspeed

• A system to maintain a set distance to thevehicle ahead, which is expressed as atime interval. For example, you canchoose to remain approximately 2 sec-onds behind the vehicle ahead. Theactual distance required to maintain a2-second interval will vary according thespeed of the vehicles.

||07 Driver support

07

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

• Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-sion avoidance system. The driver isalways responsible for applying thebrakes if the system does not detectanother vehicle.

• Adaptive Cruise Control does not reactto people or animals, or small vehiclessuch as bicycles and motorcycles. Italso does not react to slow moving,parked or approaching vehicles, orstationary objects.

• Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control indemanding driving conditions such ascity driving or other heavy traffic situa-tions, in slippery conditions, whenthere is a great deal of water or slushon the road, during heavy rain orsnow, in poor visibility, on windingroads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

The distance to the vehicle ahead (in thesame lane) is monitored by a radar sensor.Your vehicle's speed is regulated by acceler-ating and braking. The brakes may emit asound when they are being modulated by theadaptive cruise control system. This is nor-mal.

WARNING

The brake pedal moves when the adaptivecruise control system modulates thebrakes. Do not rest your foot under thebrake pedal.

The ACC system is designed to smoothlyregulate speed. However, the driver mustapply the brakes in situations that requireimmediate braking. This applies when thereare great differences in speed between vehi-cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly.

WARNING

Due to limitations in the radar sensor,braking may occur unexpectedly or not atall, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita-tions (p. 193).

Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in activemode at any permitted speed. However, if thevehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h)or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low,ACC disengages (goes into standby mode)and will no longer modulate the brakes. Thedriver will then have to maintain a safe dis-tance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

When Adaptive Cruise Control is instandby mode or is switched off com-pletely, the brakes will not be modulatedautomatically. The driver must assume fullcontrol over the vehicle.

Warning light—driver braking requiredAdaptive Cruise Control can exert brake forcethat is equivalent to approximately 40% ofthe vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa-tions requiring more brake force than ACCcan provide and if the driver does not applythe brakes, an audible signal from the Colli-sion Warning system will sound and warninglight will illuminate (see Collision warning* –function (p. 211)) in the windshield to alertthe driver to react.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme lightcontrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if thedriver is not looking straight ahead maymake the visual warning signal in the wind-shield difficult to see.

2 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

07 Driver support

07

187

WARNING

Adaptive Cruise Control only warns ofvehicles detected by the radar sensor, seeAdaptive Cruise Control – limitations(p. 193). In some cases there may be nowarning or the warning may be delayed.The driver should always apply the brakeswhen necessary.

Steep inclines and/or heavy loadsACC is primarily intended for use on fairlylevel roads. The system may have difficultymaintaining the correct distance to a vehicleahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is car-rying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. Inthese situations, the driver should always beprepared to apply the brakes if necessary.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging

Putting ACC in standby modeBefore ACC can be used to regulate speedand/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, itmust first be put in standby mode.

To do so:

Controls and display

Off/On/Standby mode

• Press (2).

> The same symbol (7) appears (in white) inthe instrument panel to indicate that ACCis in standby mode.

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and thedriver's seat belt must be fastened beforeACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver'sdoor is opened, ACC will return to standbymode.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

188

Adaptive Cruise Control – settingspeed

Setting a speedOnce ACC has been put in standby mode:

Controls and display

Put in active mode and set a speed (eachadditional press increases/decreasesspeed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h))

• Press or (4).

> The set speed, for example 60 mph (5),will be magnified for several seconds andthe frame around the speed will changecolors from white to green to indicatethat this speed has been stored (set).

When this symbol has changed col-ors from white to green, ACC is inactive mode and the vehicle will

maintain the set speed.

This symbol indicates thatyou are approaching a vehi-cle ahead.

ACC will switch from main-taining a set speed to main-taining a set distance from

that vehicle.

When this happens, a speedrange will be indicated onthe speedometer:

The higher speed (the cur-rently set speed (5)) will bemarked in green.

The lower speed in the range is the speed ofthe vehicle ahead.

Changing the set speed• After a speed has been set, it can be

increased or decreased by briefly press-ing the or buttons. Each time oneof these buttons is pressed, the vehicle'sspeed changes by 5 mph or 5 km/h. If thespeed is increased by pressing the accel-erator pedal, the vehicle's speed whenthe button is pressed will be set.

• Press and hold one of these buttons toincrease/decrease the speed in 1-mph or1-km/h increments. Release the buttonwhen you have reached the desiredspeed.

NOTE

• If one of the Adaptive Cruise Controlbuttons is pressed for more thanapproximately one minute, ACC will bedeactivated. The engine must then beswitched off and restarted to resetACC.

• In some situations Adaptive CruiseControl cannot be put in active mode.Cruise control Unavailable is shownin the display, see Adaptive CruiseControl – symbols and messages(p. 195).

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

}}189

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting timeinterval

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Decrease/increase time interval

The set time interval to vehicles ahead can beincreased by pressing and decreased bypressing . The current time interval isshown briefly in the display following adjust-ment.

Different time intervals canbe selected and are shown inthe instrument panel3 as 1–5horizontal bars. The greaterthe number of bars, thelonger the time interval. Onebar represents a time interval

of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approxi-mately 3 seconds.

To set/change a time interval:

• Press the / buttons (3).

At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi-cle ahead is short, ACC increases the timeinterval slightly. In order to follow the vehicleahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allowsthe time interval to vary considerably in cer-tain situations.

WARNING

• Only use a time interval that is suitablein current traffic conditions.

• A short time interval gives the driverlimited reaction time if an unexpectedsituation occurs in traffic.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

Adaptive Cruise Control –deactivating

Standby mode (temporary deactivation)To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it instandby mode):

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

•Press (2).

This symbol and the marking for the setspeed with change colors from green towhite.

The previously set speed and time interval areresumed by pressing (1).

3 The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)) is activated

||07 Driver support

07

190

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Standby mode due to action by thedriverACC is temporarily deactivated and put instandby mode:

• if the brakes are applied

• if the gear selector is moved to N

• if the driver drives faster than the setspeed for more than 1 minute.

In this happens, the driver will have to regu-late the vehicle's speed.

NOTE

If the accelerator pedal is only depressedfor a short time, such as when passinganother vehicle, ACC is deactivated tem-porarily and is reactivated when the pedalis released.

Automatic standby modeACC is linked to other systems such as thestability system. If this system is not function-ing properly, ACC will switch off automati-cally.

In the event of automatic deactivation, anaudible signal will sound and the message

Cruise control Cancelled is shown in theinstrument panel. The driver must then inter-vene and adapt the vehicle's speed to thesurrounding traffic and regulate the distanceto the vehicle ahead.

An automatic switch to standby mode may becaused if:

• engine speed (rpm) is too high/low

• The driver's door is opened

• The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt

• the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph(30 km/h)

• the wheels lose traction

• brake temperature is high

• the radar sensor is obstructed by, forexample, wet snow or rain.

Resuming the set speedIf ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva-ted by pressing the button on the steeringwheel keypad. The vehicle will return to themost recently set speed.

WARNING

The vehicle may accelerate quickly after has been pressed if its current speed is

considerably lower than the set speed.

Turning ACC off completely

Controls and display

Resume previous settings.

Off/On/Standby mode

• From standby mode, press (2) once.

• From active mode, press (2) twice.

The set speed and time interval are thencleared from the system's memory and can-not be resumed by pressing (1) .

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

}}191

Adaptive Cruise Control – passinganother vehicle

Passing another vehicleIf your vehicle’s speed is being regulated byACC and the driver indicates that he/shewould like to pass the vehicle ahead by usingthe left turn signal, ACC can assist by accel-erating briefly.

This function is active at speeds aboveapproximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

WARNING

Please be aware that this function will alsocause the vehicle to accelerate briefly incertain situations other than passinganother vehicle, for example using the leftturn signal to indicate a lane change or aturn toward a highway exit at speedsabove approximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) –Queue AssistQueue Assist is an added ACC feature that islinked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-sion.

IntroductionQueue Assist is an added ACC feature that islinked to your vehicle's automatic transmis-sion.

Queue Assist consists of the following func-tions:

• Enhanced speed interval (including whenthe vehicle is at a complete stop or ismoving at speed below 18 mph(30 km/h))

• Automatic standby mode when ACCchanges target vehicles

• No automatic braking when at a standstill

• The parking brake is applied automati-cally

Please note that the lowest speed that can beset is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC canmaintain a set speed/distance to a vehicleahead down to a standstill. Queue Assistconsists of the following features:

Enhanced speed interval

NOTE

The driver's door must be closed and thedriver's seat belt must be fastened beforeACC can be put in active mode. If the driv-er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver'sdoor is opened, ACC will return to standbymode.

Your vehicle can maintain the set time intervalto the vehicle ahead at any permissiblespeed, including a complete stop.

In order to activate ACC at speeds below18 mph (30 km/h):

• The vehicle ahead must be within a rea-sonable distance (not farther away thanapprox. 100 ft/30 meters)

• The lowest speed that can be selected is18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will alsohelp maintain the set time interval to thevehicle ahead at lower speeds, includinga complete stop.

During short stops (less than approximately3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehi-cle will begin moving again automatically assoon as the vehicle ahead begins to move.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicleahead to begin moving, ACC will be automat-ically go into standby mode.

||07 Driver support

07

192

The driver will then have to reactivate ACC inone of the following ways:

• By pressing

• By accelerating up to at least 3 mph(4 km/h). ACC will then resume followingthe vehicle ahead.

Your vehicle will then resume following thevehicle ahead at the set time interval.

NOTE

ACC can remain active and keep yourvehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes.After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parkingbrake will be engaged and ACC will go intostandby mode.

To reactivate ACC, the driver must releasethe parking brake (see Parking brake –general information (p. 269)).

Automatic standby mode when ACCchanges target vehicles

If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may bea stationary vehicle ahead

The following only applies at speeds belowapproximately 18 mph (30 km/h):

If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehiclethat the radar sensor has detected) from amoving vehicle to a stationary one, the sys-tem will apply the brakes in your vehicle.

WARNING

At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACCwill not react to a stationary vehicle andapply the brakes but will instead acceler-ate to the previously set speed. The drivermust actively apply the brakes to stop thevehicle.

ACC disengages and goes into standbymode if:

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph(15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine ifthe target object is a stationary vehicle orsome other type of object such as e.g., aspeed bump.

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph(15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns sothat ACC no longer has a target vehicle tofollow.

No automatic braking when at astandstillIn certain situations, ACC will no longer applythe brakes and go into standby mode whilethe vehicle is not moving. This means that thedriver will have to apply the brakes.

This happens if:

• The driver presses the brake pedal

• The parking brake is activated

• The gear selected is moved to P, N or R

• The driver presses the button to putACC in standby mode

The parking brake is appliedautomaticallyIn certain situations, ACC will apply the park-ing brake in order to continue keeping thevehicle at a standstill.

This happens if:

• The driver opens the door or takes offhis/her seat belt

• The stability system is put in Sport mode(see Stability system – operation (p. 175))

• ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstillfor more than 2 minutes

• The engine has been switched off

• The brakes have overheated

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

}}193

Radar sensorThe radar sensor is designed to help detectcars or larger vehicles driving in the samedirection as your vehicle, in the same lane.

The radar sensor and its limitationsIn addition to being used by the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), the radar sensor is alsoused by Distance Alert (see Distance Alert –introduction (p. 198)) and Collision Warningwith Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detec-tion (see Collision warning – introduction(p. 209)).

WARNING

• If there is visible damage to the frontgrille or you suspect that the radarsensor may be damaged in any way,contact a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician as soon as possible.The radar sensor may only functionpartially (or not at all) if it is damagedor is not securely fastened in place.

• Accessories or other objects, such asextra headlights, must not be installedin front of the grille.

• Modification of the radar sensor couldmake its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi-cles ahead is impeded:

• if the radar sensor is obstructed and can-not detect other vehicles, for example in

heavy rain, or if snow or other objects areobscuring the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensorclean.

• if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi-cantly different from your own speed.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)

Adaptive Cruise Control – limitationsThe ACC cannot cover all driving situationsand traffic, weather and road conditions.

Situations where ACC may not functionoptimally

WARNING

• The radar sensor has a limited field ofvision. In some situations it may detecta vehicle later than expected or notdetect other vehicles at all.

• If ACC is not functioning properly,cruise control will also be disabled.

||07 Driver support

07

194

Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink)

In certain situations, the radar sensorcannot detect vehicles at close quarters,for example a vehicle that suddenlyenters the lane between your vehicle andthe target vehicle.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, orvehicles not driving in the center of thelane may remain undetected.

In curves, the radar sensor may detectthe wrong vehicle or lose sight of the tar-get vehicle.

WARNING

• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot coverall driving situations and traffic,weather and road conditions. The"Function" section provides informa-tion about limitations that the drivermust be aware of before using thisfeature.

• This system is designed to be a sup-plementary driving aid. It is not, how-ever, intended to replace the driver'sattention and judgement. The driver isresponsible for maintaining a safe dis-tance and speed and must intervene ifAdaptive Cruise Control does notmaintain a suitable speed or suitabledistance to the vehicle ahead.

• Maintenance of ACC components mayonly be performed by a trained andqualified Volvo technician.

WARNING

• Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli-sion avoidance system. The driver isalways responsible for applying thebrakes if the system does not detectanother vehicle.

• Adaptive Cruise Control does not reactto people or animals, or small vehiclessuch as bicycles and motorcycles. Italso does not react to slow moving,parked or approaching vehicles, orstationary objects.

• Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control indemanding driving conditions such ascity driving or other heavy traffic situa-tions, in slippery conditions, whenthere is a great deal of water or slushon the road, during heavy rain orsnow, in poor visibility, on windingroads or on highway on- or off-ramps.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

}}195

Adaptive Cruise Control – symbolsand messages

Symbols and messages in the displayA text message can be erased by pressingbriefly on the OK button on the turn signallever.

Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

- Set ESC to Normal toenable Cruise

ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system is switched normal operating mode, seeStability system – introduction (p. 174) for more information.

- Cruise control Cancel-led

ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to thevehicle ahead.

- Cruise control Unavail-able

ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to:

• high brake temperature

• the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.)

Radar blocked Seemanual

ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detectother vehicles.

In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see Toggling between ACC and CC(standard Cruise Control) (p. 183)

See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

||07 Driver support

07

196

Symbol Message Description

- Cruise control Servicerequired

ACC is not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

- Press Brake To hold +an audible signal

The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keepthe vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll.

The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signalwill continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

- Below 30 km/h Onlyfollowing

This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicleahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

197

Adaptive Cruise Control –troubleshooting

If the message Radar blocked See manualis displayed, this means that the radar signals

from the sensor have been obstructed andthat a vehicle ahead cannot be detected.

This, in turn, means that the functions of theACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning

System with Auto-brake and PedestrianDetection will not function.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in someway.

Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of theradar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interferewith the radar signals.

No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affectthe function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in thedisplay.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect thatit is no longer obstructed.

Related information• Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction

(p. 184)

07 Driver support

07

198

Distance Alert – introductionDistance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-trol and is a function that provides informationabout the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

IntroductionDistance Alert is active at speeds aboveapproximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time inter-val information is only given for a vehicle thatis driving ahead of your vehicle in the samedirection. No information is provided for vehi-cles driving toward you, moving very slowly,or at a standstill.

Amber warning light4.

An amber warning light in the windshieldglows steadily if your vehicle is closer to theone ahead than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance Alert only monitors distance tothe vehicle ahead while Adaptive CruiseControl is in standby mode or off.

WARNING

Distance Alert only indicates the distanceto the vehicle ahead. It does not affect thespeed of your vehicle.

Related information• Distance Alert – operation (p. 198)

• Distance Alert – limitations (p. 199)

• Distance Alert – symbols and messages(p. 201)

Distance Alert – operationDistance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-trol and is a function that provides informationabout the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Press the button in the center instrumentpanel to switch this function on or off. Theindicator light in the button illuminates whenthe function is on.

Depending on the optional equipmentselected, there may not be room for a Dis-tance Alert button in the center console. Inthis case, the function is controlled throughthe menu system. Press MY CAR and go toSettings Car settings Distance alert

On/Off.

4 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

07 Driver support

07

}}199

Setting a time interval

Controls and display

Time interval: Increase/decrease

Time interval On

Press to increase the interval or todecrease it.

Five different time intervalscan be selected and areshown in the display as 1–5horizontal bars. The greaterthe number of bars, thelonger the time interval. Onebar represents approximately

1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars isapproximately 3 seconds.

NOTE

• The higher your vehicle’s speed, thegreater the distance to the vehicleahead, measured in feet (meters), for agiven time interval.

• The set time interval is also used byAdaptive Cruise Control, see AdaptiveCruise Control – setting speed (p. 188).

WARNING

Only use a time interval that is suitable incurrent traffic conditions.

Related information• Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)

• Distance Alert – limitations (p. 199)

• Distance Alert – symbols and messages(p. 201)

Distance Alert – limitationsDistance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-trol and is a function that provides informationabout the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

LimitationsDistance Alert uses the same radar sensorused by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col-lision Warning system. See Adaptive CruiseControl – limitations (p. 193) for more infor-mation on the radar sensor’s limitations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme lightcontrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if thedriver is not looking straight ahead maymake the visual warning signal in the wind-shield difficult to see.

WARNING

• Bad weather or winding roads mayaffect the radar sensor’s capacity todetect vehicles ahead.

• The size of the vehicle ahead, such asa motorcycle, may also make it difficultto detect. This may result in the warn-ing light illuminating at a shorter dis-tance than the one that has been set,or that the light will not come on at all.

||07 Driver support

07

200

Related information• Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)

• Distance Alert – operation (p. 198)

• Distance Alert – symbols and messages(p. 201)

07 Driver support

07

201

Distance Alert – symbols andmessagesDistance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con-trol and is a function that provides informationabout the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Symbols and text messagesA text message can be erased by pressingbriefly on the OK button on the turn signallever.

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked Seemanual

Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and can-not detect other vehicles. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for information on the radarsensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Serv-ice required

Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning prop-erly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information• Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)

• Distance Alert – operation (p. 198)

• Distance Alert – limitations (p. 199)

07 Driver support

07

202

City Safety – introductionCity Safety™5 is a support system designedto help the driver avoid low speed collisionswhen driving in slow-moving, stop-and-gotraffic.

City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’sspeed is below approximately 2 mph(4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ willnot react if your vehicle approaches anothervehicle at very low speed, for example, whenparking.

The function is active at speeds up toapproximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assiststhe driver by applying the brakes automati-cally, thereby avoiding or helping to reducethe effects of a collision.

City Safety™ is designed to intervene as lateas possible to help avoid unnecessary activa-tion.

City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking ifa low-speed collision is imminent. However,the system will not intervene in situationswhere the driver actively steers the vehicle orapplies the brakes, even if a collision cannotbe avoided. This is done in order to alwaysgive the driver’s actions highest priority.

City Safety™ activates in situations where thedriver has not applied the brakes in time,

which means that the system cannot help thedriver in all situations.

City Safety™ should not be used to alter theway in which the driver operates the vehicle.The driver should never rely solely on thissystem to safely stop the vehicle.

Normally, the occupants of the vehicle willnot be aware of City Safety™ except whenthe system intervenes when a low-speed col-lision is imminent.

If the vehicle is also equipped with theoptional Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection system, thetwo systems interact. For more informationabout the Collision Warning with Auto-brakesystem, see Collision warning – introduction(p. 209) .

WARNING

• City Safety™ is a supplemental aid tothe driver. It can never replace thedriver’s attention to traffic conditionsor his/her responsibility for operatingthe vehicle in a safe manner.

• City Safety™ does not function in alldriving situations or in all traffic,weather or road conditions.

WARNING

• City Safety™ only reacts to vehiclestraveling in the same direction as yourvehicle and does not react to smallvehicles or motorcycles or to people oranimals.

• City Safety™ is not activated whenyour vehicle is backing up.

• City Safety™ functions at speeds upto 30 mph (50 km/h). This system canhelp prevent a collision if the differ-ence in speed between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead is less than9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference inspeed is greater, a collision cannot beavoided but the speed at which thecollision occurs can be reduced. Thedriver must apply the vehicle’s brakesfor full braking effect.

• City Safety™ will not intervene in apotential collision situation if the vehi-cle is being driven actively. The driveris always responsible for maintaining asafe distance to a vehicle or objectahead.

Related information• City Safety – function (p. 203)

• City Safety – operation (p. 204)

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

5 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

07 Driver support

07

203

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205)

• City Safety – symbols and messages(p. 207)

• City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

City Safety – function

Function

Location of the laser sensor in the windshield6

City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of youusing a laser sensor mounted in the uppersection of the windshield. If a collision isimminent, City Safety™ will automaticallyapply the brakes, which may feel like hardbraking.

If the difference in speed between your vehi-cle and the vehicle ahead is more thanapproximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™alone cannot prevent a collision from takingplace. The driver must apply the brakes tohelp avoid a collision or reduce its effect.

When the function activates and applies thebrakes, a message will appear in the informa-

tion display to indicate that the system is/hasbeen active.

NOTE

• When City Safety™ applies thebrakes, the brake lights will illuminate.

• In cases where City Safety™ has stop-ped the vehicle, the system will thenrelease the brakes. The driver mustapply the brakes to keep the vehicle ata standstill.

Related information• City Safety – introduction (p. 202)

• City Safety – operation (p. 204)

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205)

• City Safety – symbols and messages(p. 207)

• City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

6 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

07 Driver support

07

204

City Safety – operation

Using City Safety™

NOTE

The City Safety™ function is activatedautomatically each time the engine hasbeen switched off and restarted.

On and OffIn certain situations, it may be desirable toswitch City Safety™ off, such as when drivingin close quarters where leaves, branches, etc.may obscure the hood and windshield.

When the engine is running, City Safety™ canbe switched off as follows:

Press My Car in the center console controlpanel and go to Settings Car settingsDriver support systems City Safety.Select Off.

If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ willreactivate when the engine is restarted.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-tion is in mode II or higher, even if CitySafety™ has been switched off.

To switch City Safety™ on again:

• Follow the same procedure as for switch-ing City Safety™ off but select On.

Related information• City Safety – introduction (p. 202)

• City Safety – function (p. 203)

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205)

• City Safety – symbols and messages(p. 207)

• City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

• My Car – introduction (p. 76)

City Safety – limitations

Limitations

WARNING

The laser sensor has certain limitationsand its function may be reduced (or it maynot function at all) in conditions such asheavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog orthick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa-tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshieldmay also interfere with the sensor’s func-tion.

The sensor used by City Safety™ is designedto detect cars and other larger motor vehiclesahead of your vehicle in both daylight anddarkness.

Objects such as warning flags hanging fromlong objects on the roof or accessories suchas auxiliary lights or protective arches on thefront of the vehicle that are higher than thehood may also impede the sensor’s function.

Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increa-ses on slippery road surfaces, which mayreduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli-sion. In situations like this, the stability sys-tem (see Stability system – introduction(p. 174)) will help provide the best possiblebraking capacity and stability.

City Safety™ emits a laser beam and meas-ures the way in which the light is reflected.

07 Driver support

07

}}205

Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec-tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally,the license plate and taillight reflectors givethe rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficientreflective surfaces to be detected.

NOTE

• Keep the windshield in front of thelaser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt,etc., see City Safety – function(p. 203).

• Snow or ice on the hood deeper than2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen-sor. Keep the hood free of ice andsnow.

• Do not mount or in any way attachanything on the windshield that couldobstruct the laser sensor.

Related information• City Safety – introduction (p. 202)

• City Safety – function (p. 203)

• City Safety – operation (p. 204)

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205)

• City Safety – symbols and messages(p. 207)

• City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

City Safety – troubleshooting

TroubleshootingIf Windscreen Sensors blocked appears inthe information display, this indicates that theCity Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed insome way and cannot detect vehicles aheadof you, which means that the system is notfunctioning.

However, this message will not be displayedin all situations in which the sensor isobstructed. For this reason, the driver mustensure that the area of the windshield in frontof the sensor is always kept clean.

The following table shows some of the situa-tions that can cause the message to be dis-played and suggested actions.

Cause Action

The area of the wind-shield in front of the sen-sor is dirty or covered byice or snow.

Clean thewindshield orremove the ice/snow.

The laser sensor's fieldof view is obstructed.

Remove theobstruction.

NOTE

If a crack, scratch or stone chip shouldoccur in the section of the windshield infront the laser sensor, contact a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician torepair or replace the windshield (see theillustration showing the location of the sen-sor in City Safety – function (p. 203)). Fail-ing to do so may result in reduced CitySafety™ functionality.

To help prevent limited or reduced func-tionality, please also observe the following:

• Volvo recommends that cracks,scratches or stone chips on the wind-shield in front of the laser sensorshould not be repaired; in such cases,the entire windshield should bereplaced.

• Before the windshield is replaced,contact a Volvo retailer to ensure thatthe correct windshield is ordered andinstalled. If the wrong type of wind-shield is used, this may cause CitySafety™ to function improperly or notat all. Volvo recommends the use ofonly Genuine Volvo ReplacementWindshields.

• When replacing windshield wipers, usethe same type or ones approved byVolvo.

||07 Driver support

07

206

Related information• City Safety – introduction (p. 202)

• City Safety – function (p. 203)

• City Safety – operation (p. 204)

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

• City Safety – symbols and messages(p. 207)

• City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

07 Driver support

07

207

City Safety – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages in the displayWhen City Safety™ automatically applies thebrakes, one or more of the symbols in the

main instrument panel may illuminate and itsassociated message will be displayed.

A text message can be erased by pressingbriefly on the OK button on the turn signallever.

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by CitySafety

City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically.

Windscreen Sensorsblocked

The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction.

• Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s).

For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see City Safety – limitations (p. 204).

City Safety Servicerequired

City Safety™ is not functioning.

• If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Related information• City Safety – introduction (p. 202)

• City Safety – function (p. 203)

• City Safety – operation (p. 204)

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205)

• City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

07 Driver support

07

208

City Safety – Laser sensor

The laser sensor

The upper decal describes the laser beam'sclassification and contains the following text:

Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directlywith optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class1M laser product.

The lower decal describes the laser beam'sphysical data and contains the text:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies withFDA performance standards for laser prod-ucts except for deviations pursuant to LaserNotice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001

The laser beam's physical data is listed in thefollowing table:

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse length 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal × verti-cal)

28° × 12°

NOTE

The function of aftermarket laser detectorsmay be affected by City Safety's laser sen-sor.

WARNING

The laser sensor emits light when the igni-tion is in mode II or higher, even if CitySafety™ has been switched off.

WARNING

Eye injury may occur if any of the followingpoints are not followed:

• It is essential that all pertinent instruc-tions be followed when handling laserinstruments. Testing, repairing, remov-ing, adjusting and/or replacing anycomponents in the laser sensor mayonly be done by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• Do not remove the laser sensor(including removal of the lenses). Alaser sensor that has been removedbelongs to laser class 3B according tostandard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laserclass 3B present a risk of injury to theeyes.

• The laser sensor’s connector must bedisconnected before the sensor isremoved from the windshield.

• The laser sensor must be mounted inplace on the windshield before con-necting the sensor’s connector.

• Do not view the laser sensor (whichemits spreading, invisible laser beams)with optical instruments from a dis-tance of less than 4 inches (100 mm).

Related information• City Safety – introduction (p. 202)

• City Safety – function (p. 203)

• City Safety – operation (p. 204)

07 Driver support

07

}}209

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205)

• City Safety – symbols and messages(p. 207)

Collision warning – introductionPedestrian and Cyclist Detection with FullAuto Brake is designed to assist the driver ifthere is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian,a cyclist, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstillor one that is moving in the same direction asyour vehicle.

This system consists of the following threefunctions:

• Collision Warning warns the driver of apotential collision situation.

• Brake Support helps the driver brakeefficiently in a critical situation.

• Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati-cally if a collision with a pedestrian, acyclist or another vehicle cannot be avoi-ded and the driver does not apply thebrakes in time or steer around the per-son/vehicle. Auto-brake can help preventa collision or reduce the speed at which acollision occurs.

Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake is activated in circumstanceswhere the driver should have begun brakingmuch sooner, the system will not be able toassist the driver in all situations.

This system is designed to activate as late aspossible to help avoid unnecessary interven-tion.

The system should not be used in such a waythat the driver changes his/her way of operat-

ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely onthe system, the chances of an accident even-tually occurring increase considerably.

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with FullAuto Brake and City Safety™ systems sup-plement each other. See City Safety – intro-duction (p. 202) for detailed information aboutCity Safety™.

WARNING

No automatic system can be guaranteedto function 100% correctly in all situations.For that reason, never test the Auto-brakesystem by driving toward a person orobject. This could result in serious injury ordeath.

||07 Driver support

07

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

• Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake does not work in alldriving, traffic, weather and road con-ditions. It does not react to vehiclesnot traveling in the same direction asyour vehicle.

• Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake does not react to ani-mals.

• Warnings are only provided when therisk of collision is high. The "Function"section provides information aboutlimitations that the driver must beaware of before using Collision Warn-ing.

• Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake will not provide awarning or brake the vehicle forpedestrians or cyclists at speedsabove 50 mph (80 km/h).

WARNING

• Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake will not provide awarning or brake the vehicle forpedestrians in darkness or in tunnels,even if there is street lighting in thearea.

• The auto-brake function can help pre-vent a collision or reduce the speed atimpact but the driver should alwaysapply the brakes for the best possiblebraking effect, even if auto-brake isactively applying the brakes.

• Never wait for a collision warning. Thissystem is designed to be a supple-mentary driving aid. It is not, however,intended to replace the driver's atten-tion and judgement. The driver isresponsible for maintaining a safe dis-tance and speed, even when the colli-sion warning system is in use.

• Maintenance of the Pedestrian andCyclist Detection with Full Auto Brakesystem's components must only beperformed by a trained and qualifiedVolvo technician.

Related information• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

• The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211

Collision warning* – function

Function overview

Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk

Radar sensor

Camera

Collision WarningThe radar sensor and the camera worktogether to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, sta-tionary vehicles and vehicles that are movingin the same direction as your vehicle. If thereis a risk of collision with a vehicle, a cyclist ora pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flash-ing red warning light and an audible warningsignal. The system is active at speeds above3 mph (4 km/h).

Brake SupportIf the risk of collision continues to increaseafter the collision warning has been given,Brake Support is activated. Brake Supportprepares the brake system to react quickly,and the brakes are applied slightly. This maybe experienced as a light tug.

If the brakes are applied quickly, full brakingeffect will be provided. Brake Support alsoincreases brake force if the system deter-mines that the driver has not applied ade-quate pressure on the brake pedal.

Auto-brakeIf a collision is imminent and the driver hasnot applied the brakes or begun to steeraround the vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist,the auto-brake function is activated withoutthe driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brakeforce is applied to help reduce the vehicle’sspeed when the collision occurs or limitedbrake force is applied if this is sufficient toavoid the collision.

NOTE

The auto-brake and brake support func-tions are always on and cannot be turnedoff.

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

07 Driver support

07

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Collision warning* – operation

Settings are made by pressing MY CAR onthe center console control panel and usingthe menus displayed.

Activating/deactivating both warningsignalsTo switch the system's audible and visualsignals on or off at the same time, press MYCAR on the center console control panel andgo to Settings Car settings Driversupport systems Collision Warning. IfPedestrian and Cyclist Detection with FullAuto Brake is on, the system will perform aself-test each time the engine is started bybriefly illuminating the warning light. See MyCar – introduction (p. 76) for a description ofthe menu system.

When the engine is switched on, the systemsetting that was being used when it wasswitched off will be the default setting.

NOTE

The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclistdetection features are always on, even ifthe audible and visual warning signalshave been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the audiblewarning signal onlyThe audible warning signal can be activated/deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen-

ter console control panel and going toSettings Car settings Driver supportsystems Warning sound if risk ofcollision.

Setting a warning distanceThis setting determines the distance at whichthe visual and audible warnings are triggered.Select Long, Normal or Short by pressingMY CAR on the center console control paneland going to Settings Car settingsDriver support systems CollisionWarning Warning distance.

The warning distance determines the level ofsensitivity used by the system. The warningdistance Long provides an earlier warning.Begin by using Long and if the system givestoo many warnings, try changing to Normal.

WARNING

• The setting Short should only be usedin situations where traffic is light andmoving at low speeds.

• Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake alerts the driver to therisk of a collision but this function can-not reduce the driver’s reaction time.

• For the system to be as effective aspossible, it is recommended that Dis-tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see Dis-tance Alert – operation (p. 198).

NOTE

• When Adaptive Cruise Control is used,the warning light and signal will beused by that function, even if thewarnings provided by Pedestrian andCyclist Detection with Full Auto Brakehave been deactivated by the driver.

• In situations where traffic is moving atconsiderably different speeds, or if thevehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn-ings may be considered to be late,even if the setting Long has beenselected.

Checking settingsThe current system settings can be checkedby pressing MY CAR on the center consolecontrol panel and going to Settings Carsettings Driver support systemsCollision Warning.

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

07 Driver support

07

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

Collision warning* – Cyclist detectionThe system can detect a cyclist and auto-brake if certain parameters are fulfilled.

Optimal example of what the system considersto be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straightfrom behind and directly in front of the vehicle

In order to help detect a cyclist, the systemhas to receive clear information about thecontours of the cyclist's body and the bike. Ithas to able to clearly detect the bike, thecyclist's head, arms, shoulders, legs andupper and lower body combined with the per-son's pattern of movement when cycling.

The function only detects cyclists from behindwho are moving in the same direction as yourvehicle

The Cyclist Detection feature requires the fol-lowing in order to function:

• The cyclist must be an adult riding an"adult-size" bike

• The bike must be equipped with anapproved and clearly visible rear-facingred reflector that is mounted at least27 in. (70 cm) above the road surface

• The feature can only detect a cycliststraight from behind and who is moving inthe same direction as your vehicle

• A cyclist who is to the left or right of yourvehicle may be detected late or not at all.

• The camera's capacity to see a cyclist atdawn or dusk is limited, much as it is forthe human eye.

• The camera's function is deactivated andwill not detect a cyclist in darkness or in

||07 Driver support

07

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

tunnels, even if there is street lighting inthe area.

• For optimal cyclist detection, CitySafety™ must be activated.

WARNING

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with FullAuto Brake is designed to be a supple-mentary driving aid. It is not, however,intended to replace the driver's attentionand judgement. The driver is alwaysresponsible for operating the vehicle in asafe manner.

The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if:

• He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothingthat may obscure body contours

• The bike is approaching your vehiclefrom the side

• The bike is not equipped with a rear-facing red reflector

• The bike is carrying large objects

• Most of the cyclist's body or the bikeitself cannot be "seen" by the system'scamera

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

Collision warning* – Pedestriandetection

The system cannot identify all pedestrians

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with FullAuto Brake system can only identify anddetect a pedestrian who is standing upright.This person can be standing still, walking orrunning.

This means that the system has to be able toidentify a person's head, arms, shoulders,legs, the upper and lower parts of the bodyand a person's pattern of movement whenwalking or running.

If parts of the body are not visible to the cam-era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian.

The following conditions apply:

• In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys-tem must have a full view of the person's

07 Driver support

07

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

entire body and the person must be atleast 32 in. (80 cm) tall.

• The system cannot detect a pedestriancarrying a large object.

• The camera's capacity to see a pedes-trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much asit is for the human eye.

• The camera's function is deactivated andwill not detect a pedestrian in darkness orin tunnels, even if there is street lighting inthe area.

WARNING

• Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection withFull Auto Brake is designed to be asupplementary driving aid. It is not,however, intended to replace the driv-er's attention and judgement. Thedriver is always responsible for operat-ing the vehicle in a safe manner.

• The system cannot detect all pedes-trians in all situations, such as in dark-ness/at night and cannot detect parti-ally hidden pedestrians, people whoare less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm)tall, or people wearing clothing thatobscures the contours of their bodies.

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

Collision warning* – limitations

Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme lightcontrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if thedriver is not looking straight ahead may makethe visual warning signal in the windshield dif-ficult to see. For this reason, always activatethe audible warning signal.

Slippery driving conditions increase brakingdistance, which can reduce the system'scapacity to avoid a collision. In these condi-tions, the ABS and stability systems providethe best possible braking effect while helpingto maintain stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal may be tempo-rarily disengaged in the event of high pas-senger compartment temperature due tostrong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, theaudible warning signal will be used, even ifit has been deactivated in the menu sys-tem.

||07 Driver support

07

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

• In certain situations, the system can-not provide warnings or warnings maybe delayed if traffic conditions or otherexternal factors make it impossible forthe radar sensor or camera to detect apedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicleahead.

• Warnings may not be provided if thedistance to the vehicle ahead is short,or if movements of the steering wheel/brake pedal are great, such as duringactive driving.

• The sensor system has a limited rangefor pedestrians/cyclists and provideswarnings and braking effect mosteffectively at speeds up to 30 mph(50 km/h). For stationary or slow-mov-ing vehicles, the system functions bestif your vehicle’s speed is belowapproximately 45 mph (70 km/h).

• Warnings for stationary or slow-mov-ing vehicles may not be provided indark conditions or in poor visibility.

The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with FullAuto Brake system uses the same radar sen-sors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For moreinformation on the radar sensor and its limita-tions, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita-tions (p. 193).

NOTE

If warnings are given too frequently, thewarning distance can be reduced (see Col-lision warning* – operation (p. 212)). Thiscauses the system to provide later warn-ings, which decreases the total number ofwarnings provided.

WARNING

• The system is not activated at speedsunder approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There-fore, it will not brake your vehicle if youapproach a vehicle ahead at very lowspeed, such as when parking.

• The driver's actions always have high-est priority and override the Pedestrianand Cyclist Detection with Full AutoBrake system. This means that thesystem will not intervene in situationswhere the driver is actively steering,braking or pressing the acceleratorpedal, even if a collision is imminent.

• When Auto-brake has prevented a col-lision with a stationary object, yourvehicle will remain at a standstill forapprox. 1.5 seconds. If your vehiclehas been braked for a moving vehicleahead, your vehicle's speed will bereduced to the same speed as thatvehicle's.

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217

The camera’s limitationsThe camera has the same limitations as thehuman eye.

The camera is used by Pedestrian and CyclistDetection with Full Auto Brake Collision warn-ing – introduction (p. 209), Active High Beams(Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)), Road SignInformation (Road Sign Information (RSI)* –introduction (p. 179)) and Driver Alert System(Driver Alert System (p. 222)) with LaneDeparture Warning or Lane Keeping Aid.

NOTE

• To help protect the camera in very hotconditions, it may be temporarilyswitched off for approximately 15minutes after the engine has beenstarted.

• Keep the section of the windshield infront of the camera clean and free ofice, snow, or condensation.

WARNING

• The camera has the same type of limi-tations as the human eye, i.e., it can-not see as well in heavy snowfall orrain, thick fog or in heavy blowing dustor snow. In such conditions, systemsdepending on the camera may experi-ence greatly reduced functionality ormay be temporarily deactivated.

• Never place any objects, decals, etc.,on the windshield in front of the cam-era. This could reduce or block thecamera’s function, and could causeone or more of the systems that utilizethe camera to stop functioning.

• Strong sunlight, reflections from theroad surface, ice or snow covering theroad, a dirty road surface, or unclearlane marker lines may drasticallyreduce the camera’s capacity todetect the side of a lane, a pedestrian,a cyclist or another vehicle.

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

• Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc-tion (p. 179)

• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)

07 Driver support

07

218

Collision warning – troubleshooting

Fault tracing and actionsIf the message Windscreen Sensorsblocked is displayed, this means that thecamera is obscured and cannot detect

pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markerlines in front of the vehicle.

This, in turn, means that Pedestrian andCyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake, DriverAlert Control, Lane Departure Warning or

Lane Keeping Aid will not have full functional-ity.

The table lists possible causes for this mes-sage being displayed, and suitable actions.

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or coveredwith ice or snow.

Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of thecamera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in thedisplay.

Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to regis-ter visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera isdirty.

Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have thissurface cleaned.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor7.

In order to function properly, the camera andradar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice,snow, etc., will reduce the function of thesecomponents.

Remove ice and snow when necessary andwash these areas regularly with a suitable carwashing liquid.

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

• Collision warning – symbols and mes-sages (p. 220)

7 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

07 Driver support

07

220

Collision warning – symbols andmessagesThe table lists possible causes for collisionwarning-related messages being displayed,and suitable actions.

A text message can be erased by pressingbriefly on the OK button on the turn signallever.

Symbol Message Description

Collis'n warningOFF

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when theengine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK but-ton.

Collision WarningUnavailable

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed whenthe driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased bypressing the OK button.

Auto braking wasactivated

Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Windscreen Sen-sors blocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow,ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see The camera’slimitations (p. 217) for more information on the camera’s limitations.

Radar blocked Seemanual

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor isblocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detectother vehicles, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for more information on the radar sensor’slimitations.

Collision warn.Service required

Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning.

Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

Related information• Collision warning – introduction (p. 209)

• Collision warning* – function (p. 211)

• Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

• Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection(p. 214)

• Collision warning* – Cyclist detection(p. 213)

• Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

• Collision warning – troubleshooting(p. 218)

07 Driver support

07

222

Driver Alert SystemThe Driver Alert System is designed to help adriver who may be becoming fatigued or whois inadvertently leaving the lane.

IntroductionThe Driver Alert System consists of two differ-ent functions that can be switched ontogether or separately.

• Driver Alert Control (DAC), see DriverAlert Control (DAC) – introduction(p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW), seeLane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

When one or both of the functions has beenswitched on, it is in standby mode and is acti-vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of40 mph (65 km/h).

The function deactivates if the vehicle'sspeed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h).

Both functions use a camera that is depend-ent on the road/lane being clearly marked bypainted lines on each side.

WARNING

The Driver Alert System does not functionin all situations and is designed to be asupplementary aid. It is not, however,intended to replace the driver’s attentionand judgement.

Driver Alert Control (DAC) –introductionDAC is intended to alert the driver if his/herdriving becomes erratic, such as if the driveris distracted or fatigued.

DAC is designed to help detect a slowlychanging driving pattern. It is primarilyintended to be used on main roads and is notmeant for use in city traffic.

A camera monitors the painted lines markingthe lane in which the vehicle is traveling andcompares the direction of the road with thedriver’s movements of the steering wheel.The driver is alerted if the vehicle does notfollow the lane smoothly.

NOTE

The camera has certain limitations, seeAdaptive Cruise Control – limitations(p. 193).

WARNING

• DAC is not intended to extend theduration of driving. Always plan breaksat regular intervals to help remain alert.

• A warning from DAC should not beignored. A driver may not be aware ofhow fatigued he/she has become.

• In certain cases, fatigue may not affectthe driver’s behavior. In situations ofthis type, no warning will be provided.Therefore, it is important to takebreaks at regular intervals, regardlessof whether or not DAC has given awarning.

Related information• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function

(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations(p. 224)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols andmessages (p. 225)

07 Driver support

07

}}223

• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation

Operating DACSettings are made using menu system andthe display in the center console. See My Car– introduction (p. 76) for more information onthe menu system.

On/OffTo put Driver Alert in standby mode:

• In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Carsettings Driver support systemsDriver Alert and check the box. If the boxis not checked, the function is off.

Related information• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction

(p. 222)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations(p. 224)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols andmessages (p. 225)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction(p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function

FunctionDriver Alert is activated when the vehicleexceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and willremain active as long as the speed is overapprox. 37 mph (60 km/h).

If the vehicle is being driven errati-cally, the driver will be alerted by anaudible signal and the messageDriver Alert Time for a break is

displayed. The warning will be repeated aftera short time if the driving pattern remains thesame.

Press the OK button to erase a message.

WARNING

• An alert should be taken seriouslysince it is sometimes difficult for adriver to realize that he/she is fatigued.

• In the event of a warning or if thedriver feels fatigued, stop as soon aspossible in a safe place and rest.

Related information• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction

(p. 222)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations(p. 224)

07 Driver support

07

224

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols andmessages (p. 225)

• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

Driver Alert Control (DAC) –limitations

LimitationsIn certain situations, DAC may provide warn-ings even if the driver’s driving pattern hasnot become erratic:

• in strong crosswinds

• on grooved road surfaces.

• if the driver is testing the LDW function,see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –introduction (p. 227)

Related information• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction

(p. 222)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols andmessages (p. 225)

• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

07 Driver support

07

}}225

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbolsand messagesDepending on the situation, DAC may displaycertain symbols and text messages in theinstrument panel or center console screen.

Symbols and messagesInstrument panel

Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for abreak

The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message.

Windscreen Sensorsblocked

The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area ofthe windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for information on the cam-era’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Servicerequired

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the messageremains in the display.

||07 Driver support

07

226

Center console display

Symbol Message Description

- Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Available The function is active.

- Driver Alert Standby <65km/h

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h).

- Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the areaof the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for information on thecamera’s limitations.

Related information• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction

(p. 222)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation(p. 223)

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations(p. 224)

• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

07 Driver support

07

}}227

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –introductionThe LDW function is designed to help reducethe risk of accidents in situations where thevehicle unintentionally leaves its lane andthere is a risk of driving off the road or into theopposite lane.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

The illustration is generic

LDW uses the camera located at the center,upper edge of the windshield to monitor theroad's/lane’s side marker lines. If the vehiclecrosses a side marker line or the road’s cen-ter dividing line, the driver will be alerted byan audible signal.

WARNING

This feature is only intended to assist thedriver and does not function in all driving,weather, traffic or road conditions.

As the driver, you have full responsibilityfor operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

Related information• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbolsand messages (p. 230)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-tion (p. 227)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-tions (p. 229)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –operation

Operation and function

LDW can be switched on or off by pressingthe button on the center console. A light inthe button illuminates when the function ison. This is supplemented by graphic displaysin the instrument panel, for example:

||07 Driver support

07

228

LDW displayed in the instrument panel

• The LDW symbol has white side markerlines: – the function is active and "sees"one or both of the road's side markerlines.

• The LDW symbol has gray side markerlines: – the function is active but cannot"see" one or both of the road's sidemarker lines.

or

• The LDW symbol has gray side markerlines: – the function is in standby modebecause the vehicle's speed is below40 mph (65 km/h).

• The LDW symbol has no side markerlines: – the function is deactivated.

WARNING

The driver will only be warned once foreach time the wheels cross a marker line.No alarm will be given if a marker line isbetween the wheels.

SettingsSettings for Lane Departure Warning can bemade in the menu system by pressing MyCar. Go to Settings Car settingsDriver support systems Lane DepartureWarning.

There are two alternatives:

• On at start-up: This selection switchesLDW on each time the engine is started.Otherwise, the system will be in the modethat it was in when the engine wasswitched off.

• Increased sensitivity: This selectionincreases the function’s sensitivity. Warn-ings will be given at an earlier stage andfewer limitations apply. When this settingis being used, the system only needs tomonitor lane marker lines on one side ofthe vehicle to change status to LaneDepart Warn Available.

Related information• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbolsand messages (p. 230)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-tions (p. 229)

07 Driver support

07

229

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -limitations

LimitationsThe camera used by LDW has the same limi-tations as the human eye. See The camera’slimitations (p. 217) for more information aboutthe camera's limitations.

NOTE

No warning signal will be given in the cer-tain situations, such as:

• If the turn signal is being used

• The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal8

• The accelerator pedal is pressedquickly8

• If the steering wheel is moved quickly8

• In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’sbody to sway

Related information• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbolsand messages (p. 230)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-tion (p. 227)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

8 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

07 Driver support

07

230

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) –symbols and messages

Symbols and messagesA text message can be erased by pressingbriefly on the OK button on the turn signallever.

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart. WarningUnavailable at this speed

The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph(65 km/h).

- Lane Depart Warn Unavaila-ble

The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’slimitations (p. 217) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean thearea of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for informationon the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Servicerequired

The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the mes-sage remains in the display.

07 Driver support

07

231

Related information• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera-

tion (p. 227)

• Driver Alert System (p. 222)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro-duction (p. 227)

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-tions (p. 229)

07 Driver support

07

232

Park assist – introductionThe park assist system is designed to assistyou when driving into parking spaces,garages, etc. An audible signal and symbolsin the audio system’s display indicate the dis-tance to the object.

The park assist system utilizes ultrasoundsensors in the front bumper and rearbumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehi-cle or an object that may be close to the frontor rear of your vehicle.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integratedwith the vehicle's electrical system will beincluded in the measurement of the availa-ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Park Assist is an information system, NOTa safety system. This system is designedto be a supplementary aid when parkingthe vehicle. It is not, however, intended toreplace the driver's attention and judge-ment.

Related information• Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

• Park assist – function (p. 232)

• Park assist – operation (p. 234)

• Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function(p. 237)

Park assist – function

Signals from the park assist system

View in the display (warning for objects front left/right rear)

Visual indicatorThe audio system’s display gives an overviewof the vehicle’s position in relation to adetected object.

The marked sectors in the display indicatethat one or more of the sensors has detectedan object. The closer the car symbol comesto a sector, the closer the vehicle is to theobject.

If the infotainment system is switched off, thepark assist system will not be able to providea visual indicator. An audible signal will stillbe provided.

07 Driver support

07

}}233

Audible signalThe Park Assist system uses an intermittenttone that pulses faster as you come close toan object, and becomes constant when youare within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of anobject in front of or behind the vehicle. Ifthere are objects within this distance bothbehind and in front of the vehicle, the tonealternates between front and rear speakers.

NOTE

The level of the audible signal can be low-ered/raised with the infotainment volumecontrol. The level can also be set in the MYCAR menu system. See My Car – introduc-tion (p. 76) for a description of the menusystem.

If the volume of another source from theaudio system is high, this will be automati-cally lowered.

Rear park assist

The distance monitored behind the vehicle isapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signalcomes from the rear speakers.

The system must be deactivated when towinga trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mountedcarrier, etc, which could trigger the rear parkassist system's sensors.

NOTE

• Rear park assist is deactivated auto-matically when towing a trailer if Volvogenuine trailer wiring is used. If a non-Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it maybe necessary to switch off the systemmanually, see Park assist – operation(p. 234).

• The system will not detect highobjects, such as a loading dock, etc.

• Objects such as chains, thin shinypoles or low objects may temporarilynot be detected by the system. Thismay result in the pulsing tone unex-pectedly stopping instead of changingto a constant tone as the vehicleapproaches the object. In such cases,use caution when backing up or stopthe vehicle to help avoid damage.

||07 Driver support

07

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Front park assist

The distance monitored in front of the vehicleis approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audiblesignal comes from the audio system's frontspeakers.

It may not be possible to combine auxiliaryheadlights and front park assist since theselights could trigger the system's sensors.

NOTE

Front park assist is deactivated when theparking brake is applied and or when thegear selector is in the P position.

Related information• Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

• Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

• Park assist – operation (p. 234)

• Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function(p. 237)

Park assist – operation

Function

Park assist and CTA* button

The system is activated automatically whenthe vehicle is started. The indicator light in thebutton in the center console illuminates whenthe system is on.

• The front park assist system is activefrom the time the engine is started untilthe vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi-mately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also activewhen the vehicle is backing up.

• Rear park assist is active when the engineis running and reverse gear has beenselected.

07 Driver support

07

235

Activating/deactivatingThe system is activated automatically whenthe vehicle is started.

– Press the Park assist button on the centerconsole to temporarily deactivate the sys-tem(s).> The indicator light in the button will go

out when the system has been deacti-vated.

Park assist will be automatically reactivatedthe next time the engine is started, or if thebutton is pressed (the indicator light in thebutton will illuminate).

NOTE

Park assist is disengaged automaticallywhen the parking brake is applied.

Related information• Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

• Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

• Park assist – function (p. 232)

• Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function(p. 237)

Park assist – limitations

Cleaning the sensorsThe sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and a suitable car washing deter-gent.

G031402

Location of the front sensors

Location of the rear sensors

Ice and snow covering the sensors maycause incorrect warning signals.

NOTE

If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt,snow, or ice, this could result in falsewarning signals from the park assist sys-tem.

Related information• Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

• Park assist – function (p. 232)

• Park assist – operation (p. 234)

• Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function(p. 237)

07 Driver support

07

236

Park assist – troubleshooting

Faults in the systemIf the information symbol illuminates andPark assist syst Service required is shownon the information display, this indicates thatthe system is not functioning properly andhas been disengaged. Consult a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the park assistsystem may give unexpected warning sig-nals that can be caused by external soundsources that use the same ultrasound fre-quencies as the system. This may includesuch things as the horns of other vehicles,wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This doesnot indicate a fault in the system.

Related information• Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

• Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

• Park assist – function (p. 232)

• Park assist – operation (p. 234)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function(p. 237)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –introductionThe Park Assist Camera is designed to pro-vide the driver with a view of the area behindthe vehicle when backing up.

IntroductionPAC uses the display in the center console toshow the area behind the car while you arebacking up.

PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen image to indicate the direction that thevehicle will take as it moves rearward, whichhelps simplify parallel parking, backing into atight space or when attaching a trailer to thevehicle.

The images of vehicles in this section aregeneric and may not depict your specificmodel.

NOTE

A trailer hitch whose wiring is integratedwith the vehicle's electrical system will beincluded in the measurement of the availa-ble space behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• PAC is designed to be a supplemen-tary aid when parking the vehicle. It isnot, however, intended to replace thedriver’s attention and judgment.

• The camera has blind spots where itcannot detect objects or peoplebehind the vehicle.

• Pay particular attention to people oranimals that are close to the vehicle.

• Objects seen on the screen may becloser than they appear to be.

Related information• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-

tion (p. 237)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-tions (p. 240)

07 Driver support

07

}}237

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –function

Function

The driver sees what is behind the vehicleand if a person or animal should suddenlyappear from the side.

PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near theopening handle.

The camera has built-in electronics that helpreduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the imageshown on the screen is as natural as possi-ble. This may cause some objects on thescreen to “lean,” which is normal.

Ambient lighting conditionsThe camera automatically monitors the ambi-ent lighting conditions behind the vehicle andconstantly adjusts sensitivity to light. Thismay cause the brightness and quality of theimage on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv-

ity to light is increased in dark conditions or inbad weather, which may affect image quality.

If the image on the screen seems too dark,brightness can be increased with the thumbwheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE

In order to function properly, the cameralens should always be kept clean. This isparticularly important in bad weather.Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

Related information• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-

duction (p. 236)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-tion (p. 237)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-tions (p. 240)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –operation

Activation

PAC is activated when the gear selector ismoved to R if the system is selected in theMY CAR menu system or by pressing theCAM button in the center console. See MyCar – introduction (p. 76) for a description ofthe menu system.

If PAC is not activated when the gear selectoris moved to R, press the CAM button on thecenter console.

PAC will automatically override the view cur-rently on the screen and will display the cam-era's view behind the vehicle.

Trailer hitchesThe camera can be useful when attaching atrailer. With the camera zoomed in on the

||07 Driver support

07

238

trailer hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch'spath toward the trailer will be projected.

The guiding lines for the wheels and for thetrailer hitch cannot be displayed at the sametime. To select a view:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view isdisplayed.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Tow bartrajectory guide line.

3. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU andpress EXIT.

ZoomWhen necessary, the camera view can bezoomed:

• PressCAM or turn TUNE. Pressing orturning again returns you to normal view.

If there are additional alternatives, press/turnuntil the desired camera view is displayed.

Automatic zoomAutomatic zoom is a feature that is availableon models equipped with a trailer hitch andthe optional (p. 232)Park assist system. Withthis alternative selected, the camera willzoom in on the trailer hitch automatically ifthe vehicle approaches an object/trailer.

See also the "Settings" section below.

DeactivationMove the gear selector from R to anothergear. The camera remains active for approx.

5 seconds after the gear selector has beenmoved from R or until the vehicle's forwardspeed exceeds 6 mph/10 km/h(21 mph/35 km/h in reverse). The screen willthen revert to the view that was displayedbefore R was selected.

NOTE

If any button on the center console controlpanel is pressed, the camera image willdisappear from the display. Pressing CAMwill return the camera image to the display.

SettingsBy default, PAC is set to activate when thegear selector is moved to R

To change PAC settings when a camera viewis displayed:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view ison the screen. A menu will be displayed.

2. Turn TUNE to scroll to the desired set-ting.

3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting andexit the menu by pressing EXIT.

Summary• Pressing CAM will activate the camera

even if the gear selector is not in Reverse.

• Toggle between normal view and zoomby pressing CAM or by turning TUNE.

Related information• Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

• Park assist – function (p. 232)

• Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

• Park assist – limitations (p. 235)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-duction (p. 236)

07 Driver support

07

}}239

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –guiding and marker lines

Guiding lines

The lines on the screen are projected as ifthey were a path on the ground behind thevehicle and are directly affected by the way inwhich the steering wheel is turned. This ena-bles the driver to see path the vehicle willtake, even if he/she turns the steering wheelwhile backing up.

NOTE

When backing up with a trailer, the guidinglines show the path that the vehicle willtake, not the trailer.

WARNING

Keep in mind that the image on the screenonly shows the area behind the vehicle.The driver must always watch for people,animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sidesof the vehicle when turning while backingup.

Marker lines

The PAC system's lines

The unobstructed area behind the vehicle

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) indicates the clear zone ofapproximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind thebumper. These lines also indicate the outer-most limits that any object (door mirrors, cor-ners of the body, etc.) extends out from thevehicle, even when it turns.

The "wheel tracks" (2) show where the wheelswill roll and can extend up to approximately10.5 ft (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there areno objects in the way.

Vehicles equipped with Park Assist

Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicatedistance

If the vehicle is equipped with the optionalPark Assist system (see Park assist – intro-duction (p. 232)), the distance to an objectwill be indicated more exactly and coloredmarkers in the display indicate which of thesensor(s) has detected the object.

Color Distance to object

Pale yellow 2.3–5 ft (0.7–1.5 m )

Yellow 1.6–2.3 ft (0.5–0.7 m)

||07 Driver support

07

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Color Distance to object

Orange 1–1.6 ft (0.3–0.5 m)

Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m)

Related information• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-

tion (p. 237)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita-tions (p. 240)

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) –limitations

LimitationsEven if a fairly small section of the screenimage appears to be obstructed, this maymean that a relatively large area behind thevehicle is hidden and objects there may notbe detected until they are very near the vehi-cle.

NOTE

Bicycle carriers or other accessoriesmounted on the tailgate may obstruct thecamera's field of view.

Keep in mind• Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice

and snow. Remove ice and snow care-fully to avoid scratching the lens.

• Clean the lens regularly with warm waterand a suitable car washing detergent.

Related information• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro-

duction (p. 236)

• Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera-tion (p. 237)

• Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

BLIS* – introductionThe Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) isan information system that indicates the pres-ence of another vehicle moving in the samedirection as your vehicle on roads with severallanes.

Location of the BLIS indicator light9.

Indicator light

BLIS symbol

BLIS and CTA10 are activated when theengine is started; this is confirmed when theindicator lights on the front door panels flashonce.

9 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model10 Cross Traffic Alert

07 Driver support

07

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

NOTE

The door panel indicator light illuminateson the side of the vehicle where the sys-tem has detected another vehicle. If yourvehicle is passed on both sides at thesame time, both lights will illuminate.

The system helps provide information about:

• Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blindarea"

• Vehicles that are about to pass your vehi-cle in the left and/or right lanes

• Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supple-mentary BLIS function intended todetect vehicles crossing behind yourvehicle while you are backing up.

WARNING

• BLIS and CTA are information sys-tems, NOT warning or safety systemsand do not function in all situations.

• BLIS and CTA do not eliminate theneed for you to visually confirm theconditions around you, and the needfor you to turn your head and should-ers to make sure that you can safelychange lanes or back up.

• As the driver, you have full responsibil-ity for changing lanes/backing up in asafe manner.

Related information• BLIS* – function (p. 241)

• BLIS* – operation (p. 242)

• BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243)

• BLIS* – limitations (p. 244)

• BLIS* – messages (p. 245)

BLIS* – function

When does BLIS functionThe system functions when your vehicle ismoving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passingvehicles

BLIS is designed to react to:

• Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blindarea"

• Vehicles that are passing your vehicle

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or apassing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light inthe door panel will glow steadily. If the driverthen uses the turn signal on the side on whichthe warning is given, the indicator light willflash and become brighter.

||07 Driver support

07

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

• BLIS does not function in sharpcurves.

• BLIS does not function when yourvehicle is backing up.

Related information• BLIS* – introduction (p. 240)

• BLIS* – operation (p. 242)

• BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243)

• BLIS* – limitations (p. 244)

• BLIS* – messages (p. 245)

BLIS* – operation

Activating/deactivating BLIS

Button for activating/deactivating BLIS

BLIS and CTA11 are activated when theengine is started; this is confirmed when theindicator lights on the front door panels flashonce.

BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated bypressing the button on the center console.

The number or combinations of options onthe vehicle may not leave a space availableon the center console for the BLIS button. Ifthis is the case, BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated in the MY CAR menu system, seeMy Car – introduction (p. 76)

• Select Off or On in Settings Carsettings BLIS.

When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, theindicator lights will go out/illuminate (the indi-cators will also flash once when the functionis reactivated) and a message will appear inthe instrument panel.

To erase the message:

• Press the OK button on the left steeringwheel lever

or

• Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the mes-sage to disappear

Related information• BLIS* – introduction (p. 240)

• BLIS* – function (p. 241)

• BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243)

• BLIS* – limitations (p. 244)

• BLIS* – messages (p. 245)

11 Cross Traffic Alert

07 Driver support

07

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementaryBLIS12 function intended to detect vehiclescrossing behind your vehicle while you arebacking up.

Park assist/CTA button

On vehicles equipped with the optional Parkassist system (p. 232), Cross Traffic Alert(CTA) can be deactivated/reactivated bypressing the Park assist button on the centerconsole. The BLIS indicator lights on the frontdoors will flash when CTA is reactivated bypressing the button.

WARNING

• BLIS and CTA are information sys-tems, NOT warning or safety systemsand do not function in all situations.

• BLIS and CTA do not eliminate theneed for you to visually confirm theconditions around you, and the needfor you to turn your head and should-ers to make sure that you can safelychange lanes or back up.

• As the driver, you have full responsibil-ity for changing lanes/backing up in asafe manner.

When does CTA function

How CTA works

CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driverof crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for

example, when backing out of a parkingspace.

It is primarily designed to detect another vehi-cle but in certain cases may also detectpedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy-cles.

CTA is only activated when the vehicle isbacking up and is activated automaticallywhen the gear selector is put in reverse.

• An audible signal indicates that CTA hasdetected something that is approachingfrom the side. The signal will come fromeither the left or right audio systemspeakers, depending on which the side ofyour vehicle the approaching vehicle/object has been detected.

• CTA also provides a warning by illuminat-ing the BLIS indicator lights.

• An icon will also illuminate in the Parkassist graphic on the center console dis-play.

LimitationsCTA has limitations in certain situations, forexample, the CTA sensors cannot "see"through other parked vehicles or obstruc-tions.

The following are several examples whereCTA's "field of vision" may initially be limitedand approaching vehicles cannot be detecteduntil they are too close:

12 Blind Spot Information System

||07 Driver support

07

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space

CTA's blind area

CTA's "field of vision"

In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" onone side

However, as you back your vehicle out of aparking space, CTA's "field of vision"expands.

Examples of other limitations include:

• Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensorsmay reduce the system's function ormake it impossible to detect other vehi-cles or objects.

• Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on thesurface of the sensors (see the illustrationin the following "Maintenance" section).

• BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer'swiring is connected to the vehicle's elec-trical system.

Related information• BLIS* – introduction (p. 240)

• BLIS* – function (p. 241)

• BLIS* – operation (p. 242)

• BLIS* – limitations (p. 244)

• BLIS* – messages (p. 245)

BLIS* – limitations

Maintenance

Location of the BLIS/CTA sensors13

The BLIS/CTA14 sensors are located on theinside of the rear fenders/bumper.

The surfaces in front of the sensors must bekept clean for the system to function opti-mally.

CAUTION

Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/orrepainting the rear bumper should only bedone by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician.

Related information• BLIS* – introduction (p. 240)

• BLIS* – function (p. 241)

• BLIS* – operation (p. 242)

07 Driver support

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245

• BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243)

• BLIS* – messages (p. 245)BLIS* – messages

If BLIS/CTA15 are not functioning normally, asymbol will illuminate in the instrument paneland a text message will be displayed. Followany instructions that may be provided.

These messages include:

Message System status

CTA OFF CTA has been switched offmanually. BLIS remainsactive.

BLIS andCTA OFFTrailerattached

BLIS and CTA are tempo-rarily deactivated becausea trailer's wiring has beenconnected to the vehicle'selectrical system.

BLIS andCTA Serv-ice required

BLIS and CTA are notfunctioning normally.

• If this message recurs,the systems should beinspected by a trainedand qualified Volvoservice technician.

Messages can be erased by pressing the OKbutton on the left steering wheel lever.

Related information• BLIS* – introduction (p. 240)

• BLIS* – function (p. 241)

• BLIS* – operation (p. 242)

• BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243)

• BLIS* – limitations (p. 244)

13 Generic illustration14 Cross Traffic Alert15 Cross Traffic Alert

STARTING AND DRIVING

08 Starting and driving

08

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

Starting the engineThe engine can be started/switched off usingthe remote key and the START/STOPENGINE button.

Ignition slot with remote key inserted (see Igni-tion modes (p. 79) for more information on igni-tion modes)

WARNING

Before starting the engine:

• Fasten the seat belt.

• Check that the seat, steering wheeland mirrors are adjusted properly.

• Make sure the brake pedal can bedepressed completely. Adjust the seatif necessary.

WARNING

• Never use more than one floor mat ata time on the driver's floor. Beforedriving, remove the original mat fromthe driver's seat floor before using anyother type of floor mat. Any mat usedin this position should be securely andproperly anchored in the attachingpins. An extra mat on the driver's floorcan cause the accelerator and/orbrake pedal to catch. Check that themovement of these pedals is not impe-ded.

• Volvo's floor mats are specially manu-factured for your car. They must befirmly secured in the clips on the floorso that they cannot slide and becometrapped under the pedals on the driv-er's side.

1. Press the remote key into the ignition slotas far as possible, with the metallic keyblade pointing outward (not inserted intothe slot)1.

2. Depress the brake pedal2.

3. Press and release the START/STOPENGINE button. The autostart functionwill operate the starter motor until theengine starts or until its overheating func-tion stops it.

The starter motor operates for a maxi-mum of 10 seconds. If the engine has notstarted, repeat the procedure.

CAUTION

If the engine does not start after the thirdtry, wait for approximately 3 minutesbefore trying to start it again to give thebattery time to recover its startingcapacity.

NOTE

Keyless drive*

To start a vehicle equipped with the key-less drive feature, one of the remote keysmust be in the passenger compartment.Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 tostart the vehicle.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment.2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle.

||08 Starting and driving

08

248

WARNING

• Always remove the remote key fromthe ignition slot when leaving the vehi-cle and ensure that the ignition inmode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) forinformation about the ignition modes).

• On vehicles with the optional keylessdrive, never remove the remote keyfrom the vehicle while it is being drivenor towed.

• Always place the gear selector in Parkand apply the parking brake beforeleaving the vehicle. Never leave thevehicle unattended with the enginerunning.

• Always open garage doors fully beforestarting the engine inside a garage toensure adequate ventilation. Theexhaust gases contain carbon monox-ide, which is invisible and odorless butvery poisonous.

NOTE

• After a cold start, idle speed may benoticeably higher than normal for ashort period. This is done to help bringcomponents in the emission controlsystem to their normal operating tem-perature as quickly as possible, whichenables them to control emissions andhelp reduce the vehicle's impact onthe environment3.

CAUTION

• When starting in cold weather, theautomatic transmission may shift up atslightly higher engine speeds than nor-mal until the automatic transmissionfluid reaches normal operating tem-perature.

• Do not race a cold engine immediatelyafter starting. Oil flow may not reachsome lubrication points fast enough toprevent engine damage.

• The engine should be idling when youmove the gear selector. Never acceler-ate until after you feel the transmissionengage. Accelerating immediately afterselecting a gear will cause harshengagement and premature transmis-sion wear.

• Selecting P or N when idling at astandstill for prolonged periods of timewill help prevent overheating of theautomatic transmission fluid.

Related information• Switching off the engine (p. 249)

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249

Switching off the engineSwitch off the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the gear selector is not in the P position orif the vehicle is moving, press the START/STOP ENGINE button twice or press andhold it in until the engine switches off.

Related information• Ignition modes (p. 79)

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –introductionERS is a feature that makes it possible toremotely start the engine using the remotekey to cool or heat the passenger compart-ment before driving.

The climate/ and infotainment systems willstart using the same settings as when theengine was switched off.

When the engine is started using ERS, it willrun for a maximum of 15 minutes beforeautomatically switching off again. After 2 ERSstarts, the engine must be started in the nor-mal way before ERS can be used again.

NOTE

• Always adhere to applicable State,Province and/or Local laws regardingengine idling when using ERS.

• The service life of the remote key'sbattery is affected by ERS use. If thisfeature is used frequently, the batteryshould be replaced once a year, seeRemote key – replacing the battery(p. 157).

WARNING

Keep the following in mind before usingERS:

• The vehicle should be in view.

• The vehicle should be unoccupied.

• The vehicle must not be parkedindoors or in an enclosed area.Exhaust fumes are harmful to thehealth.

Related information• Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the

engine (p. 250)

• Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switchingoff the engine (p. 250)

08 Starting and driving

08

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – startingthe engine

Remote key buttons used for remote engine start

Lock

Approach lighting

Starting the engineThe maximum range for ERS is approximately100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle isunobstructed. The vehicle must also belocked.

To start the engine:

1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly.2. Immediately press the approach lighting

button (2) for approximately 2 seconds.

If the requirements for ERS have been met,the following will occur:

1. The turn signals will flash several times.2. The engine will start.3. The turn signals will illuminate for

3 seconds to indicate that the engine hasstarted.

After the engine has started, the vehicleremains locked but the alarm is disarmed.

Active functionsWhen the engine is started with ERS, the fol-lowing functions are activated:

• The climate control system

• The infotainment system.

Deactivated functionsWhen the engine is started with ERS, the fol-lowing functions are deactivated:

• Headlights

• Parking lights

• License plate lights

• Windshield wipers

Related information• Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching

off the engine (p. 250)

• Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction(p. 249)

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* –switching off the engine

Any of the following will switch off the engineif it has been started with ERS:

• Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlockbutton (2) on the remote key

• Unlocking the vehicle

• Opening a door

• Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal

• Moving the gear selector from the P posi-tion

• If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons(10 liters) of fuel in the tank

• More than 15 minutes have elapsed.

If the engine has been started with ERS andswitches off, the turn signals will illuminate for3 seconds.

Message in the instrument paneldisplayIf ERS is interrupted, a text message will bedisplayed in the instrument panel.

Related information• Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction

(p. 249)

• Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting theengine (p. 250)

08 Starting and driving

08

251

Jump startingFollow these instructions to jump start yourvehicle's dead battery or to jump start anothervehicle's dead battery using your vehicle.

G021347

Connecting the jumper cables

If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is inanother vehicle, check that the vehicles arenot touching to prevent premature comple-tion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump star-ting instructions provided for the other vehi-cle.

To jump start your vehicle:

1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition tomode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 79)).

2. First connect the red jumper cable to theauxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1).

3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+)terminal on your vehicle's battery (2),marked with a "+" sign, located under afolding cover.

4. Connect the black jumper cable to theauxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3)and to the ground point in your vehicle'sengine compartment (right engine mountat the top, on the outer screw) (4).

5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle,then start the engine in the vehicle withdead battery.

6. After the engine has started, first removethe negative (–) terminal jumper cable(black). Then remove the positive (+) ter-minal jumper cable (red).

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the state ofCalifornia to cause cancer and reproduc-tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Connect the jumper cables carefully toavoid short circuits with other componentsin the engine compartment.

WARNING

• Do not connect the jumper cable toany part of the fuel system or to anymoving parts. Avoid touching hotmanifolds.

• Batteries generate hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. Ifcontact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medi-cal help immediately if eyes are affec-ted.

• Never expose the battery to openflame or electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Failure to follow the instructions forjump starting can lead to injury.

Related information• Starting the engine (p. 247)

08 Starting and driving

08

252

Transmission – general informationThe transmission automatically shifts betweenthe various forward gears, based on the levelof acceleration and speed.

G021351

Shiftgate positions

Depress the button on the front of the gearselector knob to move the gear selectorbetween the R, N, D, and P positions.

The gear selector can be moved freelybetween the Geartronic (manual shifting) andDrive (D) positions while driving.

CAUTION

The transmission’s temperature is moni-tored to help prevent damage to the trans-mission or other drivetrain components. Ifthere is a risk of overheating, the warningsymbol on the instrument panel will illumi-nate and a text message will be displayed.Follow the instructions provided there.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)4HSA makes it easier to start or back up on ahill by retaining pressure on the brake pedalfor several seconds after the pedal has beenreleased in order to keep the vehicle at astandstill.

The brakes will be released after several sec-onds or when the driver presses the accelera-tor pedal.

Related information• Transmission – positions (p. 252)

• Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254)

• Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 256)

• All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 264)

• Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-ume (p. 380)

Transmission – positions

Park: position PSelect the P position when starting or park-ing.

4 Certain models only

08 Starting and driving

08

253

ShiftlockWhen P has been selected, the transmissionis mechanically blocked in this position. Thebrake pedal must be depressed and the igni-tion must be in at least mode II (see Ignitionmodes (p. 79)) before the gear lever can bemoved from the P position.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when thevehicle is parked, particularly when park-ing on a hill. The transmission's P modemay not be able to keep the vehicle sta-tionary if it is parked on an incline.

Press the control to apply the parking brake,see Parking brake – general information(p. 269).

CAUTION

The vehicle must be stationary when posi-tion P is selected.

Gear indicatorThe gear currently beingused is displayed on the rightside of the instrument panel.

The "S" symbol turns orangeif Sport mode is being used.

Reverse: position RThe vehicle must be stationary when positionR is selected.

Neutral: position NNo gear is engaged and the engine can bestarted with the gear selector in this position.Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta-tionary with the gear selector in position N. Inorder to move the gear selector from the Nposition, the brake pedal must be depressedand the ignition must be in at least mode II.

Drive: position DD is the normal driving position. The car auto-matically shifts between the various forwardgears, based on the level of acceleration andspeed. The car must be at a standstill whenshifting from position R to position D.

Related information• Transmission – general information

(p. 252)

• Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254)

• Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 256)

• Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-ume (p. 380)

08 Starting and driving

08

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Transmission – GeartronicGeartronic allows you to manually shift amongyour vehicle's forward gears. The manualposition (+S–) can be selected at any time.

Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–)To shift gears manually, move thegear selector to the side from Dtoward +S–. The +S– symbol in theinstrument panel will change from

white to orange and the number of the gearcurrently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be dis-played (see the following illustration)5.

• To return to automatic shifting mode from+S–, move the gear selector to the sidetoward D.

Gear shift indicator*

Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*6

This option indicates when to shift up ordown to help conserve fuel. A white arrow willappear above or below the number of thecurrent gear to prompt the driver to shift upor down.

While driving• If you select the manual shifting position

while driving, the gear that was beingused in the Drive position will also initiallybe selected in the manual shifting posi-tion.

• Move the gear selector forward (toward +)to shift to a higher gear or rearward(toward –) to shift to a lower gear.

• If you hold the gear selector toward "–",the transmission will downshift one gearat a time and will utilize the braking powerof the engine. If the current speed is toohigh for using a lower gear, the downshiftwill not occur until the speed hasdecreased enough to allow the lower gearto be used.

• If you slow to a very low speed, the trans-mission will automatically shift down.

Shiftlock: Neutral (N)If the gear selector is in the N position andthe vehicle has been stationary for at least3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engineis running) then the gear selector is locked.

In order to move the gear selector from N toanother gear position, the brake pedal mustbe depressed and the ignition must be in atleast position II, see Ignition modes (p. 79).

5 If Sport mode is being used, the symbol will change to "S".6 Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer.

08 Starting and driving

08

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

Geartronic: steering wheel paddles*In addition to the manual gearshift functionusing the gear selector, this option makes itpossible to manually shift gears from thesteering wheel.

Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles

"–": Shift down to a lower gear.

"+": Shift up to a higher gear.

In order to shift gears with the paddles, theyhave to first be activated. The gear selectorcan be in either the D or S position.

Activating the paddles:

• Pull either paddle toward the steeringwheel and release it; the D in the instru-ment panel will change to the number ofthe gear currently being used.

Shifting gears:

• Pull the paddle toward the steering wheeland release it.

Deactivating the paddles:

• Hold the "+" paddle for approximately3 seconds.

NOTE

If the gear selector was in D when paddleshifting was activated (D changed to thenumber of the gear being used), the trans-mission will automatically revert to D afterapproximately 5 seconds if the paddlesare not used to shift gears.

This will not occur:

• during active driving (e.g., on a wind-ing road, while accelerating, etc)

• if the gear selector was in S when thepaddles were activated

If the transmission reverts to D, the pad-dles will have to be reactivated (pull eitherpaddle toward the steering wheel andrelease it) before they can be used to shiftgears again.

The paddles can also be manually deacti-vated by pulling both paddles toward thesteering wheel and holding them until thegear number shown in the instrumentpanel changes to D.

Geartronic: Sport mode (S)7This transmission mode provides sportiershifting characteristics and enables a moreactive driving style by making it possible todrive at higher rpm in each gear before shift-ing up. The engine also responds faster whenthe accelerator pedal is pressed.

To access Sport mode from Drive (D), movethe gear selector to the left. The transmissionwill not switch to manual shifting mode untilthe gear selector is moved forward or rear-ward toward + or –.

Sport mode can be selected any time.

NOTE

• On vehicles equipped with Sportmode, the transmission symbol in themain instrument panel will changefrom D to S when the gear selector ismoved to the manual shifting mode. Ifthe gear selector is moved toward "+"or "-", the number of the gear currentlybeing used will be displayed, see Infor-mation displays – introduction (p. 68).

• Please be aware that using Sportmode may result in a slight decrease infuel economy. Driving in D can helpimprove fuel economy.

7 Certain models only

||08 Starting and driving

08

256

Geartronic: starting on slipperysurfacesSelecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manualshifting mode can help provide better tractionwhen starting off on slippery surfaces. To doso:

1. Depress the brake pedal and move thegear selector to the side from D toward+S–.

2. Press the gear selector forward andrelease it (this selects 2nd gear). Pressthe selector forward again and release itto select 3rd gear. The optional steeringwheel paddles can also be used; see theprevious section "Geartronic: steeringwheel paddles."

3. Release the brake pedal and press gentlyon the accelerator pedal.

Related information• Transmission – general information

(p. 252)

• Transmission – positions (p. 252)

• Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 256)

• Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-ume (p. 380)

Transmission – shiftlock overrideIf the vehicle cannot be driven, for examplebecause of a dead battery, the gear selectormust be moved from the P position before thevehicle can be moved8.

Shiftlock override

Lift away the rubber mat on the floor ofthe storage compartment behind the cen-ter console to expose the small openingfor overriding the shiftlock system.

Insert the key blade into the opening.Press the key blade down as far as possi-ble and keep it held down.

Move the gear selector from the P posi-tion. For information on the key blade,see Detachable key blade – general infor-mation (p. 155).

Related information• Transmission – general information

(p. 252)

• Transmission – positions (p. 252)

• Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254)

• Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-ume (p. 380)

8 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 251).

08 Starting and driving

08

}}257

Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)

When starting on steep hills, HSA (see Trans-mission – general information (p. 252)) retainspressure on the brake pedal for several sec-onds after the pedal has been released inorder to keep the vehicle at a standstill. Thebrakes will be released after several secondsor when the driver presses the acceleratorpedal. The pedal will return to its normal posi-tion somewhat slower than normal.

Related information• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – function (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – settings (p. 260)

• Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions(p. 258)

• Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions(p. 259)

• Start/Stop – symbols and messages(p. 261)

Start/Stop – introductionStart/Stop is a function that temporarilyswitches off the engine when the vehicle isnot moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at atraffic light to help reduce fuel consumption.

Start/Stop is available with certain engines/transmissions.

Related information• Start/Stop – function (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – settings (p. 260)

• Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions(p. 258)

• Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions(p. 259)

• Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)(p. 257)

• Start/Stop – symbols and messages(p. 261)

Start/Stop – function

Function and use

Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel

Start/Stop button on the center console

Start/Stop is activated automatically eachtime the engine is started9. The symbol in theinstrument panel will be displayed for severalseconds when the engine starts and the indi-cator light in the On/Off button will remainilluminated while the function is activated.

All of the vehicle's systems will function whilethe engine is auto-stopped, although thefunction of certain systems may reduced atthis time. For example, blower speed andhigh infotainment system volume may bereduced to help conserve the battery'scapacity.

9 Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, Starting the engine (p. 247)

||08 Starting and driving

08

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Auto-stopping the engineNormally, when Start/Stop is activated andthe brakes are applied until the vehicle comesto a standstill, the engine will auto-stop auto-matically if the driver keeps the brake pedaldepressed.

To remind the driver that the enginehas been auto-stopped, theStart/Stop symbol will illuminate inthe instrument panel and remain on

until the engine restarts.

If the ECO function* (ECO*(p. 262)) is activated, theengine may auto-stop beforethe vehicle comes to a com-plete standstill.

Auto-starting the engineThe engine restarts as soon as the driverreleases the brake pedal.

Deactivating Start/StopIn certain situations (e.g.,driving in heavy, stop-and-gotraffic), it may be preferableto deactivate Start/Stop.

This is done by pressing thebutton in the center console.

The indicator light in the button will go out.

Start/Stop will remain deactivated until thebutton is pressed again or until the engine isswitched off and restarted by the driver.

Related information• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – settings (p. 260)

• Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions(p. 258)

• Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions(p. 259)

• Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)(p. 257)

• Start/Stop – symbols and messages(p. 261)

Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions

In certain situations or conditions, the enginemay not auto-stop when the vehicle comesto a standstill, such as if:

Condition/situation

The vehicle's speed has not reached aspeed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) after themost recent auto-start or after the driverhas started the engine.

The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

The main battery's charge is below theminimum level.

The engine has not reached its normaloperating temperature.

The ambient temperature is below approx.25°F (-4°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C).

The windshield's heating function* is acti-vated.

The climate system cannot keep thedesired settings in the passenger compart-ment; the blower will operate at highspeed.

The vehicle is backing up.

The main battery's temperature is belowfreezing or too high.

08 Starting and driving

08

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

Condition/situation

The driver is turning the steering wheelhard.

The road's incline is very steep.

A trailer's electrical system is connected tothe vehicle.

The hood has been openedA.

The transmission has not reached its nor-mal operating temperature.

Atmospheric pressure is below a levelequivalent to an altitude of approx. 4,900–8,200 ft (1500–2500 m) above sea level.The actual pressure is also affected by cur-rent weather conditions.

The Adaptive Cruise Control's* QueueAssist feature is activated.

The gear selector is in the SB or "+/–" posi-tion.

A Certain engines onlyB Sport mode (where applicable)

Related information• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – function (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – settings (p. 260)

• Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions(p. 259)

• Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)(p. 257)

• Start/Stop – symbols and messages(p. 261)

Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions

In certain situations or conditions, the enginemay auto-start even though the driver is stillpressing the brake pedal, such as if:

Condition/situation

Condensation forms on the windows.

The climate system cannot keep thedesired settings in the passenger compart-ment.

Electrical current consumption is tempo-rarily high or the main battery's charge isbelow the minimum level.

The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.

The hood has been openedA.

The vehicle begins to move or increasesspeed slightly (if the engine auto-stoppedbefore the vehicle was at a standstill (seeECO* (p. 262))).

The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt whilethe gear selector is in the D or N positions.

The steering wheel is turnedA.

||08 Starting and driving

08

260

Condition/situation

The gear selector is moved from D to SB, Ror "+/–".

The driver's door is opened with the gearselector in D – an audible signal and a textmessage will inform the driver thatStart/Stop is active.

A Certain engines onlyB Sport mode (where applicable)

WARNING

Do not open the hood if the engine hasauto-stopped. The engine could suddenlyauto-start.

Before opening the hood:

• Switch off the ignition using theSTART/STOP ENGINE button.

• Be aware that if the engine has beenrunning, components in the enginecompartment will be very hot.

If the engine does not auto-start, thiscould be due to:

• The driver's seat belt is not fastened

• The gear selector is in P and the driver'sdoor is opened

In these cases, the driver will have to restartthe engine by pressing the START/STOPENGINE button.

Related information• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – function (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – settings (p. 260)

• Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions(p. 258)

• Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)(p. 257)

• Start/Stop – symbols and messages(p. 261)

Start/Stop – settings

Settings for the Start/Stop function can bemade in the MY CAR menu system.

Related information• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – function (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions(p. 258)

• Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions(p. 259)

• Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)(p. 257)

• Start/Stop – symbols and messages(p. 261)

08 Starting and driving

08

261

Start/Stop – symbols and messages

Text messagesCombined with the information sym-bol in the instrument panel, the

Start/Stop function may also display mes-sages in certain situations. Follow the instruc-tions provided in the message. The followingtable gives several examples.

Symbol Message Information/action

Auto Start/Stop Servicerequired

Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Autostart Engine running + anaudible signal

This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped.

- Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINEbutton.

- Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normallybe pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

- Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally bepressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the message does not disappear after thesuggested action has been taken, contact aVolvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Related information• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – function (p. 257)

• Start/Stop – settings (p. 260)

• Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions(p. 258)

• Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions(p. 259)

• Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)(p. 257)

08 Starting and driving

08

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ECO*Eco is a function10 developed by Volvo to givethe driver the opportunity to actively drivemore economically and to help reduce fuelconsumption.

IntroductionWhen Eco is activated, thefollowing functions are modi-fied:

• The automatic transmission's shiftingpoints

• The engine management system andaccelerator pedal response

• Stop/stop function (Start/Stop – introduc-tion (p. 257)): the engine can auto-stopbefore the vehicle has come to a full stop

• Eco Coast functionality is activated:engine braking is disabled

• Climate system settings: certain functions(e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarilyreduced or deactivated

NOTE

When Eco is activated, several climatesystem parameters are changed and thefunction of certain current-consuming sys-tems will be reduced.

Some of these functions can be restartedmanually but full functionality will not berestored until Eco is deactivated.

Function

ECO On/Off button in the center console

ECO symbol in the instrument panel

When the engine is switched off, ECO isdeactivated and must be reactivated eachtime the engine is started (with the exceptionof certain engines).

The ECO symbol will be displayed in theinstrument panel and the indicator light in theECO button will be on when Eco is activated.

Eco on or offWhen ECO is deactivated,the ECO symbol will not bedisplayed in the instrumentpanel and the indicator lightin the ECO button will be off.The function will remaindeactivated until the buttonis pressed again.

Eco CoastEco Coast is an integral part of the Eco func-tion and essentially deactivates engine brak-ing, allowing the vehicle to roll freely.

NOTE

To function optimally, Eco Coast shouldprimarily be used when the vehicle cancoast as far as possible.

When the driver releases the acceleratorpedal, the transmission is automatically dis-engaged from the engine and engine rpm willbe reduced to the idle level(approx. 700-800 rpm), which helps reducefuel consumption.

10 Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263

This feature is primarily intended to be usedin driving situations where a decrease inspeed is expected, such as when approach-ing an intersection or a traffic light.

Eco Coast enables proactive driving with aslittle braking as possible.

Combinations of On and OffDepending on the driving situation, Eco canbe used in different ways to help reduce fuelconsumption:

• With Eco activated: this enables EcoCoast, which allows the vehicle to rollfreely for as far as possible when thedriver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g.,when approaching a traffic light or inter-section).

or

• With Eco deactivated: engine brakingcan be used when the vehicle will onlyroll for a short distance (in heavy traffic,etc.) or when driving down hills.

To help keep fuel consumption as low aspossible, Eco Coast should not be used intraffic situations where the brakes have to beused frequently.

Activating Eco CoastEco Coast is activated when the acceleratorpedal is released completely if:

• Eco is activated

• The gear selector is in D

• The vehicle's speed is between approxi-mately 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). Alwaysobserve posted speed limits

• The gradient of a down-slope is less thanapproximately 6%

Deactivating Eco CoastIn certain situations, it may be advisable toswitch off the Eco Coast function, such as:

• When driving down steep hills, in order toutilize engine braking

• Prior to passing another vehicle, in orderto do so as safely as possible

Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivatingengine braking) can be done in the followingways:

• Press the ECO button on the center con-sole

• Move the gear selector to the manual "S+/–" position

• Change gears using the steering wheelpaddles*

• Press the brake or accelerator pedal

Eco Coast limitationsThis function will not be available if:

• Cruise control is activated

• The gradient of a down-slope is morethan approximately 6%

• The steering wheel paddles* are used tomanually change gears

• The engine and/or transmission have notreached their normal operating tempera-ture

• The gear selector is moved from D to themanual "S+/–" position

• The vehicle's speed is not within the40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). interval

Additional information and settings

Other ECO-related settings can be made inthe vehicle's MY CAR menu. See My Car –introduction (p. 76) for more information.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

• Transmission – general information(p. 252)

08 Starting and driving

08

264

All Wheel Drive (AWD)Your Volvo can be equipped with permanentAll Wheel Drive, which means that power isdistributed automatically between the frontand rear wheels.

Under normal driving conditions, most of theengine's power is directed to the frontwheels. However, if there is any tendency forthe front wheels to spin, an electronicallycontrolled coupling distributes power to thewheels that have the best traction.

NOTE

The message AWD disabled Servicerequired will be appear in the informationdisplay if an electrical fault should occur inthe AWD system. A warning light will alsoilluminate in the instrument panel. If thisoccurs, have the system checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian.

Related information• Transmission – general information

(p. 252)

• Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction(p. 264)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)12 –introductionHDC is a type of automatic engine brake andmakes it possible to increase or decrease thevehicle's speed on downhill gradients usingonly the accelerator pedal, without applyingthe brakes. The brake system functions auto-matically to maintain a low and steady speed.

IntroductionNormally, when the accelerator pedal isreleased while driving down hills, the vehicle'sspeed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm(the normal engine braking effect). However, ifthe downhill gradient becomes steeper and ifthe vehicle is carrying a load, speed increasesdespite the engine braking effect. In this sit-uation, the brakes must be applied to reducethe vehicle's speed.

HDC is particularly useful when driving downsteep hills with rough surfaces, and where theroad may have slippery patches.

WARNING

HDC does not function in all situations,and is a supplementary braking aid. Thedriver has full responsibility for driving in asafe manner.

12 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

08 Starting and driving

08

}}265

Related information• Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation

(p. 265)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)14 –operation

Function

• HDC can be switched on and off with thebutton in the center console. An indicatorlight in the button illuminates when HDCis activated.

• The indicator light in the instrumentpanel illuminates and a message is dis-played when the system is controlling thevehicle's speed.

• HDC only functions when first or reversegears are selected (1 will be shown in theinstrument panel display when first gearis selected).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated if the gear selec-tor is the D position.

Using HDCHDC allows the car to roll forward at a maxi-mum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph(7 km/h) in reverse. However, the acceleratorpedal can be used to select any speed that ispossible in first or reverse gears. When theaccelerator pedal is released, speed isquickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gearselected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It isnot necessary to apply the brakes.

• The brake lights illuminate automaticallywhen HDC is controlling the vehicle'sspeed.

• The driver can slow or stop the vehicle atany time by applying the brakes.

HDC is deactivated when:

• The button on the center console ispressed

• A gear higher than first gear is selected

• D is selected on vehicles with an auto-matic transmission

HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this isdone while driving down a steep hill, the sys-tem's braking effect will decrease gradually.

14 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

||08 Starting and driving

08

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Engine response to pressure on the accel-erator pedal may be slightly slower thannormal when HDC is activated.

Related information• Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction

(p. 264)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

Brakes – generalThe brake system is a hydraulic system con-sisting of two separate brake circuits. If aproblem should occur in one of these circuits,it is still possible to stop the vehicle with theother brake circuit.

If the brake pedal must be depressed fartherthan normal and requires greater foot pres-sure, the stopping distance will be longer.

A warning light in the instrument panel willlight up to warn the driver that a fault hasoccurred.

If this light comes on while driving or braking,stop immediately and check the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir.

NOTE

Press the brake pedal hard and maintainpressure on the pedal – do not pump thebrakes.

WARNING

If the fluid level is below the MIN mark inthe reservoir or if a brake system messageis shown in the information display: DONOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian and have the brake system inspected.

Brake pad inspectionOn vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi-tion of the brake pads can be checked byraising the vehicle (see Changing a wheel –removing wheel (p. 292) for informationabout using the jack and removing a wheel)and performing a visual inspection of thebrake pads.

WARNING

• If the vehicle has been driven immedi-ately prior to a brake pad inspection,the wheel hub, brake components,etc., will be very hot. Allow time forthese components to cool before car-rying out the inspection.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the Park (P) position.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

08 Starting and driving

08

267

WARNING

• Use the jack intended for the vehiclewhen changing a tire. For any otherjob, use stands to support the vehicle.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be dam-aged.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,non-slippery surface.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

• The jack must correctly engage thejack attachment.

• Never allow any part of your body tobe extended under a vehicle suppor-ted by a jack.

Power brakes function only when theengine is runningThe power brakes utilize vacuum pressurewhich is only created when the engine is run-ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop withthe engine switched off.

If the power brakes are not working, consid-erably higher pressure will be required on thebrake pedal to compensate for the lack ofpower assistance. This can happen for exam-ple when towing your vehicle or if the engineis switched off when the vehicle is rolling. Thebrake pedal feels harder than usual.

Water on brake discs and brake padsaffects brakingDriving in rain and slush or passing throughan automatic car wash can cause water tocollect on the brake discs and pads. This willcause a delay in braking effect when thepedal is depressed. To avoid such a delaywhen the brakes are needed, depress thepedal occasionally when driving through rain,slush, etc. This will remove the water from thebrakes. Check that brake application feelsnormal. This should also be done after wash-ing or starting in very damp or cold weather.

Severe strain on the brake systemThe brakes will be subject to severe strainwhen driving in mountains or hilly areas, orwhen towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usuallyslower, which means that the cooling of thebrakes is less efficient than when driving onlevel roads. To reduce the strain on thebrakes, shift into a lower gear and let theengine help with the braking. Do not forgetthat if you are towing a trailer, the brakes willbe subjected to a greater than normal load.

Cleaning the brake discsCoatings of dirt and water on the brake discsmay result in delayed brake function. Thisdelay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin-ings.

Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wetweather, prior to long-term parking, and afterthe vehicle has been washed. Do this by

braking gently for a short period while thevehicle is moving.

Related information• Parking brake – general information

(p. 269)

• Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)(p. 269)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

• Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 268)

• Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction(p. 264)

08 Starting and driving

08

268

Brakes – symbols

Symbols in the instrument panel

Symbol Specification

Steady glow – Check the brakefluid level. If the level is low, fillwith brake fluid and check forthe cause of the brake fluidloss.

Automatic function check:steady glow for two secondswhen the engine is started.

WARNING

If and come on at thesame time and the brake level is below theMIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake sys-tem-related message is shown in the infor-mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have thevehicle towed to a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician and have thebrake system inspected.

Related information• Brakes – general (p. 266)

• Parking brake – general information(p. 269)

Anti-lock braking system (ABS)The ABS system helps to improve vehiclecontrol (stopping and steering) during severebraking conditions by limiting brake lockup.

When the system "senses" impending lockup,braking pressure is automatically modulatedin order to help prevent lockup that couldlead to a skid.

The system performs a brief self-diagnostictest when the engine has been started anddriver releases the brake pedal. Another auto-matic test may be performed when the vehi-cle first reaches a speed of approximately6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsateseveral times and a sound may be audiblefrom the ABS control module, which is nor-mal.

Related information• Parking brake – general information

(p. 269)

• Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)(p. 269)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

Brake lightsThe brake lights come on automatically whenthe brakes are applied.

Adaptive brake lightsThe adaptive brake lights activate in the eventof sudden braking or if the ABS system isactivated. This function causes an additionaltaillight on each side of the vehicle to illumi-nate to help alert vehicles traveling behind.

The adaptive brake lights activate if:

• The ABS system activates for more thanapproximately a half second

• In the event of sudden braking while thevehicle is moving at speeds aboveapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

When the vehicle has come to a stop, thebrake lights and additional taillights remain onfor as long as the brake pedal is depressed oruntil braking force on the vehicle is reduced.

Related information• Brakes – general (p. 266)

• Parking brake – general information(p. 269)

08 Starting and driving

08

}}269

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)EBA is designed to provide full brake effectimmediately in the event of sudden, hardbraking.

Emergency Brake AssistanceThe EBA system is activated by the speedwith which the brake pedal is depressed.

When the EBA system is activated, the brakepedal will go down and pressure in the brakesystem immediately increases to the maxi-mum level. Maintain full pressure on thebrake pedal in order to utilize the systemcompletely. EBA is automatically deactivatedwhen the brake pedal is released.

NOTE

• When the EBA system is activated, thebrake pedal will go down and pressurein the brake system immediatelyincreases to the maximum level. Youmust maintain full pressure on thebrake pedal in order to utilize the sys-tem completely. There will be no brak-ing effect if the pedal is released. EBAis automatically deactivated when thebrake pedal is released.

• When the vehicle has been parked forsome time, the brake pedal may sinkmore than usual when the engine isstarted. This is normal and the pedalwill return to its usual position when itis released.

Related information• Parking brake – general information

(p. 269)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

• Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 268)

Parking brake – general informationThe electric parking brake helps to keep thevehicle stationary when it is parked.

Electric parking brake

Parking brake control

NOTE

• A faint sound from the parking brake'selectric motor can be heard when theparking brake is being applied. Thissound can also be heard during theautomatic function check of the park-ing brake.

• The brake pedal will move slightlywhen the electric parking brake isapplied or released.

Low battery voltageIf the battery voltage is too low, the park-ing brake cannot be applied or released.

||08 Starting and driving

08

270

Connect an auxiliary battery if the batteryvoltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 251).

Parking on a hill• If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the

front wheels so that they point away fromthe curb.

• If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn thefront wheels so that they point toward thecurb.

The parking brake should also be applied.

Related information• Parking brake – applying (p. 270)

• Parking brake – releasing (p. 271)

• Parking brake – symbols and messages(p. 272)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

Parking brake – applying

Applying the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

1. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

2. Push the control.>

The symbol in the instrumentpanel flashes while the parking brake isbeing applied and glows steadily whenthe parking brake has been fullyapplied.

3. Release the brake pedal and ensure thatthe vehicle is at a standstill.

4. When the vehicle is parked, the gearselector must be in position P.

NOTE

• In an emergency the parking brake canbe applied when the vehicle is movingby holding in the control. Braking willbe interrupted when the acceleratorpedal is depressed or the control isreleased.

• An audible signal will sound during thisprocedure if the vehicle is moving atspeeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Related information• Parking brake – general information

(p. 269)

• Parking brake – releasing (p. 271)

• Parking brake – symbols and messages(p. 272)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

08 Starting and driving

08

271

Parking brake – releasing

Releasing the electric parking brake

Parking brake control

Manual release1. Fasten the seat belt.

2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slotand press the START/STOP ENGINEbutton (or press the START/STOPENGINE button with a valid remote key inthe passenger compartment on vehicleswith the optional keyless drive).

3. Press firmly on the brake pedal.

4. Pull the parking brake control.

Automatic release1. Start the engine.

NOTE

• For safety reasons, the parking brake isonly released automatically if the engineis running and the driver is wearing aseat belt.

• The electric parking brake will bereleased immediately when the acceler-ator pedal is pressed and the gearselector is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt.

3. Move the gear selector to position D or Rand press the accelerator pedal. Theparking brake will release when the vehi-cle begins to move.

Heavy load uphillA heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause thevehicle to roll backward when the parkingbrake is released automatically on a steepincline. To help avoid this:

1. Keep the electric parking brake leverpushed in with the left hand while shiftinginto Drive with the right.

2. While pressing the accelerator pedal topull away, release the parking brake leveronly after the vehicle begins to move.

Related information• Parking brake – general information

(p. 269)

• Parking brake – applying (p. 270)

• Parking brake – symbols and messages(p. 272)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

08 Starting and driving

08

272

Parking brake – symbols andmessagesA text message can be erased by pressingbriefly on the OK button on the turn signallever.

Symbol and messages in the instrument panel

Symbol Message Description/action

"Message" Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situationthen this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

- Park brake notfully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev-eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error mes-sage showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake notapplied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it severaltimes. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error messageshowing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brakeService required

A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains

WARNING

If the vehicle must be parked before thefault has been corrected, always put thegear selector in P and turn the wheels sothat they point away from the curb if thevehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curbif it is pointing downhill.

Related information• Parking brake – general information

(p. 269)

• Parking brake – applying (p. 270)

• Parking brake – releasing (p. 271)

• Brakes – general (p. 266)

08 Starting and driving

08

273

Driving through waterThe vehicle should be driven with extremecaution if it is necessary to drive throughstanding water.

The vehicle can be driven through water up toa depth of approximately 13 in. (35 cm) atwalking speed to help prevent water fromentering the differential and the transmission.Water reduces the oil's lubricating capacityand may shorten the service life of thesecomponents.

• Take particular care when driving throughflowing water.

• Clean the electrical connections for trailerwiring after driving in mud or water.

• When driving through water, maintain lowspeed and do not stop in the water.

WARNING

• Avoid driving through standing orrushing water. Doing so can be dan-gerous and it may also be difficult todetermine the actual depth of thewater.

• If water cannot be avoided, after driv-ing through the water, press lightly onthe brake pedal to ensure that thebrakes are functioning normally. Wateror mud can make the brake liningsslippery, resulting in delayed brakingeffect.

CAUTION

• Engine damage will occur if water isdrawn into the air cleaner.

• If the vehicle is driven through waterdeeper than approximately 13 in.(35 cm), water may enter the differen-tial and the transmission. This reducesthe oil's lubricating capacity and mayshorten the service life of these com-ponents.

• Damage to any components, theengine, transmission, turbo-charger,differential or its internal componentscaused by flooding, vapor lock orinsufficient oil is not covered underwarranty.

• Do not allow the vehicle to stand inwater up to the door sills longer thanabsolutely necessary. This could resultin electrical malfunctions.

• If the engine has been stopped whilethe vehicle is in water, do not attemptto restart it. Have the vehicle towedout of the water.

Related information• Towing the vehicle (p. 285)

• Towing by tow truck (p. 286)

08 Starting and driving

08

274

Engine and cooling systemUnder special conditions, for example whendriving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or withheavy loads, there is a risk that the engine andcooling system will overheat.

Proceed as follows to avoid overheating theengine.

• Maintain a low speed when driving with atrailer up long, steep hills. For informa-tion, see Towing a trailer (p. 282)

• Do not turn the engine off immediatelywhen stopping after a hard drive.

WARNING

The cooling fan may start or continue tooperate (for up to 6 minutes) after theengine has been switched off.

• Remove any auxiliary lights from in frontof the grille when driving in hot weatherconditions.

• Do not exceed engine speeds of4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hillyterrain. The oil temperature could becometoo high.

Conserving electrical currentKeep the following in mind to help minimizebattery drain:

• When the engine is not running, avoidusing ignition mode II. Many electricalsystems (the audio system, the optionalnavigation system, power windows, etc)will function in ignition modes 0 and I.These modes reduce drain on the battery.

• Please keep in mind that using systems,accessories, etc., that consume a greatdeal of current when the engine is notrunning could result in the battery beingcompletely drained. Driving or having theengine running for approximately15 minutes will help keep the batterycharged.

• The optional 12-volt socket in the cargoarea (p. 141) area provides electrical cur-rent even with the ignition switched off,which drains the battery.

Before a long distance tripIt is always worthwhile to have your vehiclechecked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician before driving long distances.Your retailer will also be able to supply youwith bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiperblades for your use in the event that problemsoccur.

As a minimum, the following items should bechecked before any long trip:

• Check that engine runs smoothly and thatfuel consumption is normal.

• Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage.

• Have the transmission oil level (p. 380)checked.

• Check condition of drive belts.

• Check state of the battery's charge.

• Examine tires carefully (the spare tire aswell), and replace those that areworn (p. 291). Check tire pres-sure (p. 298).

• The brakes, front wheel alignment, andsteering gear should be checked by atrained and qualified Volvo service techni-cian only.

• Check all lights, including high beams.

• Reflective warning triangles are legallyrequired in some states/provinces.

• Have a word with a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician if you intend to

08 Starting and driving

08

275

drive in countries where it may be difficultto obtain the correct fuel.

• Consider your destination. If you will bedriving through an area where snow or iceare likely to occur, consider snowtires (p. 306).

Related information• Changing a wheel – removing wheel

(p. 292)

• Bulbs – introduction (p. 335)

Driving in cold weatherCheck your vehicle before the approach ofcold weather.

The following advice is worth noting:

• Make sure that the engine cool-ant (p. 332) contains 50 percent anti-freeze. Any other mixture will reducefreeze protection. This gives protectionagainst freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C).The use of "recycled" antifreeze is notapproved by Volvo. Different types ofantifreeze must not be mixed.

• Volvo recommends using only genuineVolvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator.

• Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – thishelps prevent the formation of condensa-tion in the tank. In addition, in extremelycold weather conditions it is worthwhileto add fuel line de-icer before refueling.

• The viscosity of the engine oil is impor-tant. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil)improves cold-weather starting as well asdecreasing fuel consumption while theengine is warming up. Full synthetic0W-30 oil is recommended for driving inareas with sustained low temperatures.

• The load placed on the battery is greaterduring the winter since the windshieldwipers, lighting, etc., are used moreoften. Moreover, the capacity of the bat-tery decreases as the temperature drops.In very cold weather, a poorly chargedbattery can freeze and be damaged. It is

therefore advisable to check the state ofcharge more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts.

• Volvo recommends the use of snow tireson all four wheels for winter driving, seeSnow tires/studded tires (p. 306).

• To prevent the washer fluid (p. 345)reser-voir from freezing, add washer solventscontaining antifreeze. This is importantsince dirt is often splashed on the wind-shield during winter driving, requiring thefrequent use of the washers and wipers.Volvo Washer Solvent should be dilutedas follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 partwasher solvent and 4 parts water Downto 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solventand 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C):1 part washer solvent and 2 parts waterDown to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washersolvent and 1 part water.

• Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks.

• Avoid using de-icing sprays as they cancause damage to the locks.

08 Starting and driving

08

276

Refueling – fuel requirementsVolvo recommends the use of detergent gas-oline to control engine deposits.

Deposit control gasoline (detergentadditives)Detergent gasoline is effective in keepinginjectors and intake valves clean. Consistentuse of deposit control gasolines will helpensure good drivability and fuel economy. Ifyou are not sure whether the gasoline con-tains deposit control additives, check with theservice station operator.

NOTE

Volvo does not recommend the use ofexternal fuel injector cleaning systems.

Unleaded fuelEach Volvo has a three-way catalytic con-verter and must use only unleaded gasoline.U.S. and Canadian regulations require thatpumps delivering unleaded gasoline belabeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumpshave nozzles which fit your vehicle's fillerinlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuelinto a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasolineonly". Leaded gasoline damages the three-way catalytic converter and the heated oxy-gen sensor system. Repeated use of leadedgasoline will lessen the effectiveness of theemission control system (p. 280) and could

result in loss of emission warranty coverage.State and local vehicle inspection programswill make detection of misfueling easier, pos-sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis-fueled vehicles.

NOTE

Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines con-tain an octane enhancing additive calledmethyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri-carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used,your Emission Control System perform-ance may be affected, and the CheckEngine Light (malfunction indicator light)located on your instrument panel maylight. If this occurs, please return yourvehicle to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician for service.

Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers,"Oxygenated fuels"Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing"oxygenates" which are usually alcohols orethers. In some areas, state or local lawsrequire that the service pump be marked indi-cating use of alcohols or ethers. However,there are areas in which the pumps areunmarked. If you are not sure whether there isalcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy,check with the service station operator. Tomeet seasonal air quality standards, someareas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel.

Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy-genated" fuels; however, the octane rat-ings (p. 277) listed must still be met.

Alcohol – EthanolFuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol-ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer-red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol".

Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to15% MTBE may be used.

MethanolDo not use gasolines containing methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practicecan result in vehicle performance deteriora-tion and can damage critical parts in the fuelsystem. Such damage may not be coveredunder the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

08 Starting and driving

08

}}277

Refueling – octane ratingVolvo recommends premium fuel for best per-formance, but using 87 octane17 or above willnot affect engine reliability.

Minimum octane

G028920

Typical pump octane label

NOTE

Vehicles equipped with the high perform-ance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 andB4204T10) require premium fuel18.

TOP TIER Detergent GasolineVolvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Deter-gent Gasoline” where available to help main-tain engine performance and reliability. TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand-

ard jointly established by leading automotivemanufactures to meet the needs of today’sadvanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail-ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify theirgasoline as having met the “TOP TIER Deter-gent Gasoline” standards.

NOTE

Information about TOP TIER DetergentGasoline is available atwww.toptiergas.com.

Demanding drivingIn demanding driving conditions, such asoperating the vehicle in hot weather, towing atrailer, or driving for extended periods athigher altitudes than normal, it may be advis-able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 orhigher) or to change gasoline brands to fullyutilize your engine's capacity, and for thesmoothest possible operation.

NOTE

When switching to higher octane fuel orchanging gasoline brands, it may be nec-essary to fill the tank more than oncebefore a difference in engine operation isnoticeable.

Fuel FormulationsDo not use gasoline that contains lead as aknock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi-tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis-sion control systems on your vehicle, leadhas been strongly linked to certain forms ofcancer.

Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent.Unburned benzene has been strongly linkedto certain forms of cancer. If you live in anarea where you must fill your own gas tank,take precautions. These may include:

• standing upwind away from the filler noz-zle while refueling

• refueling only at gas stations with vaporrecovery systems that fully seal themouth of the filler neck during refueling

• wearing neoprene gloves while handling afuel filler nozzle.

Use of AdditivesWith the exception of gas line antifreeze dur-ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick-eners, or other store-bought additives to yourvehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems.Overuse may damage your engine, and someof these additives contain organically volatilechemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourselfto these chemicals.

17 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2.18 Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information.

||08 Starting and driving

08

278

WARNING

Never carry a cell phone that is switchedon while refueling your vehicle. If thephone rings, this may cause a spark thatcould ignite gasoline fumes, resulting infire and injury.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color-less, and odorless gas. It is present in allexhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaustfumes inside the vehicle, make sure thepassenger compartment is ventilated, andimmediately return the vehicle to a trainedand qualified Volvo service technician forcorrection.

Related information• Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276)

Refueling – opening/closing fuel fillerdoorThe fuel filler door is located on the right rearfender (indicated by an arrow beside the fueltank symbol on the information display )

With the ignition switched off, press andrelease the button on the lighting panel tounlock the fuel filler door. Please note that thefuel filler door will remain unlocked until thevehicle begins to move forward. An audibleclick will be heard when the fuel filler doorrelocks.

• If you intend to leave your vehicle while itis being refueled, this feature enables youto lock the doors/tailgate while leavingthe fuel filler door unlocked.

• You can also keep the vehicle locked ifyou remain inside it during refueling. Thecentral locking button does not lock thefuel filler door.

• Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstruc-ted and is completely closed after refuel-ing.

• Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hotweather.

Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a clickindicates that it is closed.

CAUTION

Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. Inaddition to causing damage to the environ-ment, gasolines containing alcohol cancause damage to painted surfaces, whichmay not be covered under the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Manually opening the fuel filler door

1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (onthe same side as the fuel filler door).

2. Grasp the handle on the green cord.

08 Starting and driving

08

279

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward untilthe fuel filler door clicks open.

Related information• Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap

(p. 279)

• Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276)

• Refueling – octane rating (p. 277)

Refueling – opening/closing fuel capIf necessary, the fuel filler door can beopened manually.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open thefiller cap slowly.

After refueling, close the fuel filler cap byturning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

• Do not refuel with the engine run-ning19. Turn the ignition off or to posi-tion I. If the ignition is on, an incorrectreading could occur in the fuel gauge.

• Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do notpress the handle on the filler nozzlemore than one extra time. Too muchfuel in the tank in hot weather condi-tions can cause the fuel to overflow.Overfilling could also cause damage tothe emission control systems.

Related information• Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276)

• Refueling – octane rating (p. 277)

19 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle'sperformance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

08 Starting and driving

08

280

Emission controls

Three-way catalytic converter• Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain

engine malfunctions, particularly involvingthe electrical, fuel or distributor ignitionsystems, may cause unusually high three-way catalytic converter temperatures. Donot continue to operate your vehicle ifyou detect engine misfire, noticeable lossof power or other unusual operating con-ditions, such as engine overheating orbackfiring. A properly tuned engine willhelp avoid malfunctions that could dam-age the three-way catalytic converter.

• Do not park your vehicle over combusti-ble materials, such as grass or leaves,which can come into contact with the hotexhaust system and cause such materialsto ignite under certain wind and weatherconditions.

• Excessive starter cranking (in excess ofone minute), or an intermittently firing orflooded engine can cause three-way cat-alytic converter or exhaust system over-heating.

• Remember that tampering or unauthor-ized modifications to the engine, theEngine Control Module, or the vehiclemay be illegal and can cause three-waycatalytic converter or exhaust systemoverheating. This includes: altering fuelinjection settings or components, alteringemission system components or location

or removing components, and/or repea-ted use of leaded fuel.

NOTE

Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles withthree-way catalytic converters.

Heated oxygen sensorsThe heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy-gen content of the exhaust gases. Readingsare fed into a control module that continu-ously monitors engine functions and controlsfuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into theengine is continuously adjusted for efficientcombustion to help reduce harmful emis-sions.

Related information• Information displays – warning symbols

(p. 74)

• Engine and cooling system (p. 274)

Economical drivingBetter driving economy may be obtained bythinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts andstops and adjusting the speed of your vehicleto immediate traffic conditions.

Economical driving conserves naturalresourcesObserve the following rules:

• Bring the engine to normal operating tem-perature as soon as possible by drivingwith a light foot on the accelerator pedalfor the first few minutes of operation. Acold engine uses more fuel and is subjectto increased wear.

• Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi-cle for driving short distances. This doesnot allow the engine to reach normaloperating temperature.

• Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera-tion and hard braking.

• Use the transmission's Drive (D) positionas often as possible and avoid using kick-down.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281

• Using the engine's optional Eco func-tion20 can help improve fuel economy. Foradditional information, see ECO* (p. 262).

• Using the transmission's Sport mode21

may increase fuel consumption some-what. Use the transmission's Drive (D)position as often as possible. For addi-tional information about Sport mode, seeTransmission – Geartronic (p. 254).

• Do not exceed posted speed limits.

• Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extraload) in the vehicle.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tirepressure regularly (when tires are cold).

• Remove snow tires when threat of snowor ice has ended.

• Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc,increase air resistance and also fuel con-sumption.

• At highway driving speeds, fuel consump-tion will be lower with the air conditioningon and the windows closed than with theair conditioning off and the windowsopen.

• Using the onboard trip computer's fuelconsumption modes can help you learnhow to drive more economically.

Other factors that decrease gas mileageare:

• Dirty air cleaner

• Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter

• Dragging brakes

• Incorrect front end alignment

Some of the above mentioned items and oth-ers are checked at the standard maintenanceintervals.

WARNING

Driving with the tailgate open: Drivingwith the tailgate open could lead to poi-sonous exhaust gases entering the pas-senger compartment. If the tailgate mustbe kept open for any reason, proceed asfollows:

• Close the windows

• Set the ventilation system control to airflow to floor, windshield and side win-dows and the blower control to itshighest setting.

Handling and roadholdingAt the specified curb weight your vehicle hasa tendency to understeer, which means thatthe steering wheel has to be turned morethan might seem appropriate for the curva-ture of a bend. This ensures good stabilityand reduces the risk of rear wheel skid.Remember that these properties can alter

with the vehicle load. The heavier the load inthe cargo area, the less the tendency toundersteer.

• Vehicle load, tire design and inflationpressure all affect vehicle handling.Therefore, check that the tires are inflatedto the recommended pressure accordingto the vehicle load. Loads should be dis-tributed so that capacity weight or maxi-mum permissible axle loads are notexceeded.

• At the specified curb weight your vehiclehas a tendency to understeer, whichmeans that the steering wheel has to beturned more than might seem appropriatefor the curvature of a bend. This ensuresgood stability and reduces the risk of rearwheel skid. Remember that these proper-ties can alter with the vehicle load. Theheavier the load in the cargo compart-ment, the less the tendency to under-steer.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

20 Available on certain 4-cyl. engines21 Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

08 Starting and driving

08

282

Towing a trailerWhen towing a trailer, always observe thelegal requirements of the state/province.

NOTE

For the maximum trailer and tongueweights recommended by Volvo, seeWeights (p. 374).

• All Volvo models are equipped withenergy-absorbing shock-mounted bump-ers. Trailer hitch installation should notinterfere with the proper operation of thisbumper system.

Trailer towing does not normally present anyparticular problems, but take into considera-tion:

• Increase tire pressure to recommendedfull pressure, see Tire inflation – pressuretable (p. 301).

• When your vehicle is new, avoid towingheavy trailers during the first 620 miles(1,000 km).

• Maximum speed when towing a trailer:50 mph (80 km/h).

• Engine and transmission are subject toincreased loads. Therefore, engine cool-ant temperature should be closelywatched when driving in hot climates orhilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn offthe air conditioner if the temperaturegauge needle enters the red range.

• If the automatic transmission begins tooverheat, a message will be displayed inthe text window.

• Avoid overload and other abusive opera-tion.

• Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil-ity, and economy.

• It is necessary to balance trailer brakeswith the towing vehicle brakes to providea safe stop (check and observe state/local regulations).

• Do not connect the trailer's brake systemdirectly to the vehicle's brake system.

• More frequent vehicle maintenance isrequired.

• Remove the ball holder when the hitch isnot being used.

NOTE

• When parking the vehicle with a traileron a hill, apply the parking brakebefore putting the gear selector in P.Always follow the trailer manufactur-er's recommendations for wheelchocking.

• When starting on a hill, put the gearselector in D before releasing the park-ing brake.

• If you use the manual (Geartronic) shiftpositions while towing a trailer, makesure the gear you select does not puttoo much strain on the engine (usingtoo high a gear).

• The drawbar assembly/trailer hitchmay be rated for trailers heavier thanthe vehicle is designed to tow. Pleaseadhere to Volvo's recommended trailerweights.

• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclinesof more than 15%.

08 Starting and driving

08

}}283

CAUTION

The maximum trailer weights listed areonly applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft(1000 m) above sea level. With increasingaltitude the engine power and thereforethe car's climbing ability are impairedbecause of the reduced air density, so themaximum trailer weight has to be reducedaccordingly. The weight of the vehicle andtrailer must be reduced by 10% for everyfurther 3,280 ft (1000 m) (or part thereof).When towing 5,950 lbs (2,700kg) hill incli-nation is restricted to 14%.

WARNING

• Bumper-attached trailer hitches mustnot be used on Volvos, nor shouldsafety chains be attached to thebumper.

• Trailer hitches attaching to the vehiclerear axle must not be used.

• Never connect a trailer's hydraulicbrake system directly to the vehiclebrake system, nor a trailer's lightingsystem directly to the vehicle lightingsystem. Consult your nearest author-ized Volvo retailer for correct installa-tion.

• When towing a trailer, the trailer'ssafety chains or wire must be correctlyfastened to the attachment points pro-vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle.The safety chain or wire must never befastened to or wound around the tow-ing ball.

Trailer cableAn adapter is required if the vehicle's trailerhitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailerhas 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approvedby Volvo. Make sure the cable does not dragon the ground.

Related information• Detachable trailer hitch (p. 283)

• Loading – general (p. 142)

Detachable trailer hitchVolvo recommends the use of Volvo trailerhitches that are specially designed for thevehicle.

A

C

ED

B

G010496

Ball holder

Locking bolt

Cotter pin

Hitch assembly

Safety wire attachment

Installing the ball holder1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from

the locking bolt and slide the locking boltout of the hitch assembly.

2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem-bly.

||08 Starting and driving

08

284

3. Align the hole in the ball holder with theone in the hitch assembly.

4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitchassembly/ball holder.

5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the endof the locking bolt.

Removing the ball holder1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking

bolt and slide the locking bolt out of theball holder/hitch assembly.

2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitchassembly.

NOTE

A cover for the hitch assembly is alsoincluded in the kit.

Related information• Towing a trailer (p. 282)

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed tohelp stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailerwhen the vehicle and trailer have begun tosway and is part of the stability system. Forinformation on the stability system, see Stabil-ity system – introduction (p. 174)

FunctionA vehicle towing a trailer may begin to swayfor various reasons. Normally this only occursat high speeds but, for example, if the traileris overloaded or if the load is unevenly dis-tributed in the trailer, there is risk of swayingat speeds between approximately 45-55 mph(70-90 km/h).

Swaying may be caused by factors such as:

• The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud-den, strong crosswind

• The vehicle and trailer are traveling on anuneven road surface or drive over a bump

• Sudden movements of the steering wheel

Facts about TSA• TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi-

mately 40 mph (60 km/h)

• The stability system symbol in the instru-ment panel will flash when TSA is working

• If the driver switches off the stability sys-tem's Spin Control function, TSA will alsobe switched off (but will be on again thenext time the engine is started)

• TSA may not intervene when the vehicleand trailer begin to sway if the driver triesto compensate for the swaying motion bymoving the steering wheel rapidly

How TSA worksOnce swaying has begun, it can be very diffi-cult to stop, which makes it difficult to controlthe vehicle and trailer.

The TSA system continuously monitors thevehicle's movements, particularly lateralmovement. If the system detects a tendencyto sway, the brakes are applied individuallyon the front wheels, which has a stabilizingeffect on the vehicle and trailer. This is oftenenough to enable the driver to regain controlof the vehicle.

If this is not adequate to stop the swayingmotion, the brakes are applied to all of thewheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it isequipped with brakes, and engine power istemporarily reduced. As the swaying motionbegins to decrease and the vehicle-trailerhave once again become stable, TSA will nowstop regulating the brakes/engine power andthe driver regains control of the vehicle.

Related information• Towing a trailer (p. 282)

• Loading – general (p. 142)

08 Starting and driving

08

}}285

Towing the vehicleAlways check with state and local authoritiesbefore attempting to tow another vehiclebecause this type of towing is subject to reg-ulations regarding maximum towing speed,length and type of towing device, lighting, etc.

1. With the remote key fully pressed into theignition slot22, press START/STOPENGINE for approximately 2 seconds toactivate ignition mode II.

2. The remote key must remain in the igni-tion slot23 for the entire time that the vehi-cle is being towed.

3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towingvehicle slows down by applying lightpressure on the brake pedal. This willhelp prevent jarring movements of thevehicle being towed.

4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stopthe vehicle being towed.

CAUTION

General towing precautions:

• Please check with state and localauthorities before attempting this typeof towing, as vehicles being towed aresubject to regulations regarding maxi-mum towing speed, length and type oftowing device, lighting, etc.

• If the vehicle's battery is dead, seeJump starting (p. 251) to provide cur-rent for releasing the electric parkingbrake and to move the gear selectorfrom the P position to N. If this is notpossible, see Transmission – shiftlockoverride (p. 256) for information aboutmanually overriding the shiftlock sys-tem to move the gear selector from Pto N.

• Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h).Do not exceed the maximum allowabletowing speed.

• Maximum distance with front wheelson ground: 50 miles (80 km).

• The vehicle should only be towed inthe forward direction.

Related information• Towing eyelet (p. 285)

• Remote key – functions (p. 153)

Towing eyeletWhen used, the towing eyelet should alwaysbe securing attached.

Location of the towing eyelet

Attaching the towing eyelet

22 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.23 For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle.

||08 Starting and driving

08

286

Attaching the towing eyeletThe towing eyelet is located under thefloor of the cargo area, with the spare tireand may be partially concealed. This eye-let must be screwed into the positionsprovided on the right sides of either thefront or rear bumper (see illustration).

There are two different types of coversover the openings for the towing eyeletand they have to be opened differently.

• If the cover has a notch, insert a coin,etc., into the notch and pry open theedge of the cover. Open the covercompletely and remove it.

• If the cover has a mark along one edgeor in a corner, press the mark whileprying out the opposite side/cornerusing a coin, etc. Open the cover andremove it.

Screw the towing eyelet in place, first byhand and then using the tire iron until it issecurely in place.

After the vehicle has been towed, the eyeletshould be removed and returned to its stor-age location.

Press the cover for the attachment point backinto position.

WARNING

• When the vehicle is being towed, theignition should be in mode II (in modeI, all of the vehicle's airbags are deac-tivated). For more information, seeIgnition modes (p. 79)

• Never remove the remote key from theignition slot when the vehicle is beingtowed. For vehicles with keyless drive,the remote key must remain inside thevehicle.

• The power brakes and power steeringwill not function when the engine is notrunning. Approximately 5 times morepressure will be required on the brakepedal and the steering wheel will beconsiderably harder to turn.

• The towing eyelets must not be usedfor pulling the vehicle out of a ditch orfor any similar purpose involvingsevere strain.

Related information• Towing the vehicle (p. 285)

• Towing by tow truck (p. 286)

Towing by tow truckWhen necessary, call for professional helpfrom an authorized towing company. Volvorecommends the use of flat bed equipment.

CAUTION

In certain conditions, the towing eyeletmay be used to pull the vehicle onto aflatbed tow truck.

• The vehicle's position and groundclearance determine if it can be pulledup onto a flatbed tow truck using thetowing eyelet.

• If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp istoo steep or the ground clearanceunder the vehicle is insufficient, dam-age could occur by attempting to pullthe vehicle using the towing eyelet.

• If necessary, lift the vehicle using thetow truck’s lifting device.

WARNING

No person or object should be behind thetow truck while the vehicle is being pulledup onto the flatbed.

08 Starting and driving

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287

CAUTION

• The vehicle should always be towed inthe forward direction.

• Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)*that are being towed with the frontwheels off the ground should not betowed at a speed above approx.45 mph (70 km/h) and should not betowed farther than 30 miles (50 km).

Related information• Towing eyelet (p. 285)

WHEELS AND T IRES

09 Wheels and tires

09

289

Tires – general informationYour vehicle is equipped with tires accordingto the vehicle's tire information placard on theB-pillar (the structural member at the side ofthe vehicle, at the rear of the driver's dooropening).

Introduction

CAUTION

Some Volvo models are equipped with anUltra High Performance tire and wheelcombination designed to provide maxi-mum dry pavement performance with con-sideration for hydroplaning resistance.They may be more susceptible to roadhazard damage and, depending on drivingconditions, may achieve a tread life of lessthan 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if thisvehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advancedAWD or stability system, these tires are notdesigned for winter driving, and should bereplaced with winter tires when weatherconditions dictate.

The tires have good road holding characteris-tics and offer good handling on dry and wetsurfaces. It should be noted however that thetires have been developed to give these fea-tures on snow/ice-free surfaces.

Most models are equipped with "all-season"tires, which provide a somewhat higherdegree of road holding on slippery surfacesthan tires without the "all-season" rating.

However, for optimum road holding on icy orsnow-covered roads, we recommend suitablewinter tires on all four wheels.

When replacing tires, be sure that the newtires are the same size designation, type(radial) and preferably from the same manu-facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there isa risk of altering the car's roadholding andhandling characteristics.

Tire rotationYour vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tirewear is affected by a number of factors suchas tire inflation, ambient temperature, drivingstyle, etc.

NOTE

• If the tires are rotated, they shouldonly be moved from front to rear orvice versa. They should never be rota-ted left to right/right to left.

• Ideally, tire rotation should be done thefirst time after approximately 3,000miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals.Some customers find that tire rotationmay help to get extra mileage from tirelife.

• Tire rotation should only be performedif front/rear tire wear is fairly even andtread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm).

Related information• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Changing a wheel – direction of rotation(p. 292)

• Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291)

09 Wheels and tires

09

290

Tires – storage and ageWhen storing complete wheels (tires mountedon rims), they should be suspended off thefloor or placed on their sides on the floor.

New Tires

Remember that tires are perishable goods. Asof 2000, the manufacturing week and year(Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp)will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513means that the tire illustrated was manufac-tured during week 15 of 2013).

Tire ageTires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used. It is recommended that tiresgenerally be replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot climates, fre-quent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet(U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging

process. The temporary spare1 should alsobe replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it hasnever been used.

A tire's age can be determined by the DOTstamp on the sidewall (see the illustration).

A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discolorationshould be replaced immediately.

Storing wheels and tiresWhen storing completes wheels (tires moun-ted on rims), they should be suspended offthe floor or placed on their sides on the floor.

Tires not mounted on rims should be storedon their sides or standing upright, but shouldnot be suspended.

CAUTION

Tires should preferably be stored in a cool,dry, dark place, and should never bestored in close proximity to solvents, gaso-line, oils, etc.

WARNING

• The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvoare specified to meet stringent stabilityand handling requirements. Unap-proved wheel/tire size combinationscan negatively affect your vehicle'sstability and handling.

• Any damage caused by installation ofunapproved wheel/tire size combina-tions will not be covered by your newvehicle warranty. Volvo assumes noresponsibility for death, injury, orexpenses that may result from suchinstallations.

Related information• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Changing a wheel – direction of rotation(p. 292)

• Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291)

1 Option or accessory on some models

09 Wheels and tires

09

291

Tires – tread wear indicatorThe tires have wear indicator strips runningacross or parallel to the tread.

G021829

The letters TWI are printed on the side of thetire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) isleft on the tread, these strips become visibleand indicate that the tire should be replaced.Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offervery poor traction.

When replacing worn tires, it is recommendedthat the tire be identical in type (radial) andsize as the one being replaced. Using a tire ofthe same make (manufacturer) will preventalteration of the driving characteristics of thevehicle.

Related information• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Changing a wheel – direction of rotation(p. 292)

• Tires – storage and age (p. 290)

Tires – tire economyA smooth driving style and correct inflationpressure can help prolong the tires' servicelife.

• Maintain correct tire pressure. The tireinflation table, see Tire inflation – pressuretable (p. 301).

• Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tirescreeching.

• Tire wear increases with speed.

• Correct front wheel alignment is veryimportant.

• Unbalanced wheels impair tire economyand driving comfort.

• Tires must maintain the same direction ofrotation throughout their lifetime.

• When replacing tires, the tires with themost tread should be mounted on therear wheels to reduce the chance of over-steer during hard braking.

• Hitting curbs or potholes can damage thetires and/or wheels permanently.

09 Wheels and tires

09

292

Changing a wheel – direction ofrotationIncorrectly mounted tires impair the car'sbraking properties and ability to force asiderain, snow and slush.

Summer and winter tires

G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of thetire

• The tires with the most tread shouldalways be on the rear axle (to help reducethe risk of skidding).

• When switching between summer andwinter tires, mark the tires to indicatewhere they were mounted on the car,e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear

• Tires with tread designed to roll in onlyone direction are marked with an arrowon the sidewall.

• Contact a Volvo workshop if you areunsure about the tread depth.

Related information• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Tires – storage and age (p. 290)

• Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291)

Changing a wheel – removing wheelWheel changes should always be carried outcorrectly.

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293

Location of jack*, towing eyelet2 and tools*

Changing a wheel1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear

selector in P.

2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the toolfor removing the plastic covers on thewheel nuts, the towing eyelet and thewheel cover removal tool (certain modelsonly) stowed under the floor of the cargoarea.

3.

Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheelnuts

Remove the wheel cover (where applica-ble) using the removal tool or remove thewheel cover by hand.

4. Block the wheels that are on the groundwith wooden blocks or large stones.

Lug wrench and towing eyelet

5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lugwrench as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

The towing eyelet must be screwed intothe lug wrench as far as possible.

2 The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration Towing eyelet (p. 285) for its location.

||09 Wheels and tires

09

294

6. With the vehicle still on the ground,remove the plastic covers on the wheelnuts with the tool provided and use thelug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen thewheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down-ward (counterclockwise) pressure.

Jack attachment points

7. There are two jack attachment points oneach side of the vehicle. Position the jackunder the attachment point to be used ona level, firm, non-slippery surface andcrank it up until it is correctly aligned andseated in the attachment point. Beforeraising the vehicle, check that the jack isstill correctly positioned in the attach-ment.

WARNING

There are two attachment points near therear of the vehicle. Only the rear-mostattachment point is intended for the jack(see the illustration).

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to bechanged is lifted off the ground.

9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely andremove the wheel.

WARNING

• The jack must correctly engage thejack attachment.

• Be sure the jack is on a firm, level,non-slippery surface.

• Never allow any part of your body tobe extended under a vehicle suppor-ted by a jack.

• Use the jack intended for the vehiclewhen changing a tire. For any otherjob, use stands to support the vehicle.

• Apply the parking brake and put thegear selector in the Park (P) position.

• Block the wheels standing on theground, use rigid wooden blocks orlarge stones.

• The jack should be kept well-greasedand clean, and should not be dam-aged.

• No objects should be placed betweenthe base of jack and the ground, orbetween the jack and the attachmentbar on the vehicle.

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}295

NOTE

The jack provided with your vehicle isintended to be used only in temporary sit-uations such as changing wheels in theevent of a flat tire. Only the jack that camewith your particular model should be usedto lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to belifted more frequently or for a prolongedperiod, using a garage jack or hoist is rec-ommended. Always follow this device’sinstructions for use.

Related information• Changing a wheel – installing a wheel

(p. 296)

Changing a wheel – spare wheelWheel changes should always be carried outcorrectly.

Spare tireThe spare tire in your vehicle3 is called a"Temporary Spare".

Recommended tire pressure (see the placardon the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) shouldbe maintained irrespective of which positionon the vehicle the temporary spare tire isused on.

In the event of damage to this tire, a new onecan be purchased from your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the"Temporary Spare" tire other than as atemporary replacement for a puncturedtire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-ble by a standard tire. Road holding andhandling may be affected with the "Tem-porary Spare" in use. Do not exceed50 mph (80 km/h).

CAUTION

The vehicle must not be driven with wheelsof different dimensions or with a spare tireother than the one that came with the vehi-cle. The use of different size wheels canseriously damage your car's transmission.

Spare wheelThe spare wheel is only intended for tempo-rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel assoon as possible. The car's handling may bealtered by the use of the spare wheel. Thecorrect tire pressure for the spare wheel isstated in the tire pressure table, see Tire infla-tion – pressure table (p. 301) and in the tireinflation placard on the driver's side doorjamb at the rear of the driver's door opening.

WARNING

Current legislation prohibits the use of the“Temporary Spare” tire other than as atemporary replacement for a puncturedtire. It must be replaced as soon as possi-ble by a standard tire. Road holding andhandling may be affected with the “Tem-porary Spare” in use.

CAUTION

The vehicle must never be driven withmore than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheelwell with the rim side down. There are twofoam blocks, one under the spare wheel andone over/inside. The upper one contains alltools.

The same bolt runs through to secure thespare wheel and the foam blocks.

3 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system.

||09 Wheels and tires

09

296

Related information• Changing a wheel – installing a wheel

(p. 296)

• Changing a wheel – removing wheel(p. 292)

Changing a wheel – accessing thespare wheelThe following procedure explains how toaccess the spare wheel (where applicable).

1. Open the floor hatch.

2. Undo the retaining bolt.

3. Lift out the foam block.

4. Lift out the spare wheel.

The other two blocks can remain in the sparewheel well.

After useThe foam block and spare wheel must bereplaced in the reverse order. Note the arrowon the upper foam block. It should point for-ward.

Changing a wheel – installing a wheelIt is important to re-install wheels properly.

Re-installing the wheel1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel

and hub.

2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub.

Tighten the wheel nuts

3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten cross-wise until all nuts are snug.

4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter-nately tighten the bolts crosswise to103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm).

5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheelnuts and Install the wheel cover (whereapplicable). The opening in the wheelcover for the tire's inflation valve must bepositioned over the valve.

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}297

Related information• Changing a wheel – spare wheel (p. 295)

• Changing a wheel – removing wheel(p. 292)

Tire inflation – general informationCheck tire inflation pressure regularly.

Inflation placard

G032521

Tire inflation placard

Tire inflationSee the tire inflation table in Tire inflation –pressure table (p. 301). A tire inflation pres-sure placard is also located on the driver'sside B-pillar (the structural member at theside of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver'sdoor opening). This placard indicates the des-ignation of the factory-mounted tires on yourvehicle, as well as load limits and inflationpressure.

NOTE

• The placards shown indicate inflationpressure for the tires installed on thevehicle at the factory only.

• A certain amount of air seepage fromthe tires occurs naturally and tire pres-sure fluctuates with seasonal changesin temperature. Always check tirepressure regularly.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflationpressure, including the spare, at leastonce a month and before long trips. Youare strongly urged to buy a reliable tirepressure gauge, as automatic service sta-tion gauges may be inaccurate.

• Use the recommended cold inflationpressure for optimum tire performanceand wear.

• Under-inflation or over-inflation maycause uneven treadwear patterns.

WARNING

• Under-inflation is the most commoncause of tire failure and may result insevere tire cracking, tread separation,or "blow-out," with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk ofinjury.

• Under-inflated tires reduce the loadcarrying capacity of your vehicle.

||09 Wheels and tires

09

298

When weather temperature changes occur,tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree temperature drop causes a corres-ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pres-sure. Check your tire pressures frequentlyand adjust them to the proper pressure,which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor-mation placard or certification label.

Related information• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Tires – storage and age (p. 290)

• Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291)

• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

Tire inflation – checking pressureInflation pressure should be checked whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tiresThe tires are considered to be cold whenthey have the same temperature as thesurrounding (ambient) air.

This temperature is normally reached after thevehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours.

After driving a distance of approximately1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to behot. If you have to drive farther than this dis-tance to pump your tire(s), check and recordthe tire pressure first and add the appropriateair pressure when you get to the pump.

If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot,never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. Thetires are hot from driving and it is normal forpressures to increase above recommendedcold pressures. A hot tire at or below recom-mended cold inflation pressure could be sig-nificantly under-inflated.

To check inflation pressure:1. Remove the cap from the valve on one

tire, then firmly press the tire gauge ontothe valve.

2. Add air to reach the recommended airpressure.

3. Replace the valve cap.

CAUTION

• After inflating the tires, always reinstallthe valve cap to help avoid damage tothe valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal capscould corrode and become difficult toremove.

4. Visually inspect the tires to make surethere are no nails or other objectsembedded that could puncture the tireand cause an air leak.

5. Check the sidewalls to make sure thereare no gouges, cuts, bulges or otherirregularities.

6. Repeat this procedure for each tire,including the spare.

NOTE

• If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the cen-ter of the valve. Then recheck thepressure with your tire gauge.

• Some spare tires require higher infla-tion pressure than the other tires. Con-sult the tire inflation pressure table,see Tire inflation – pressure table(p. 301) or see the inflation pressureplacard.

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}299

Related information• Tire specifications (p. 299)

• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

• Tires – storage and age (p. 290)

• Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291)

Tire specificationsThe following information can be found on atire's sidewall.

Tire ratings

Speed ratingsThe speed ratings in the table translate as fol-low:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

Information on the sidewall

Federal law mandates that tire manufacturersplace standardized information on the side-wall of all tires (see the illustration).

The following information is listed on the tiresidewall:

The tire designation:

NOTE

Please be aware that the following tiredesignation is an example only and thatthis particular tire may not be available onyour vehicle.

||09 Wheels and tires

09

300

1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters)from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. Thelarger the number, the wider the tire.

2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to itswidth in percent.

3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the symbol indicate that the vehicle is

equipped with optional self-supportingrun flat tires4.

4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (ininches).

5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example,a load index of 95 equals a maximumload of 1521 lbs (690 kg).

6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi-mum speed at which the tire is designedto be driven for extended periods of time,carrying a permissible load for the vehi-cle, and with correct inflation pressure.For example, H indicates a speed ratingof 130 mph (210 km/h).

NOTE

The tire's load index and speed rating maynot appear on the sidewall because theyare not required by law.

7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = AllTerrain, AS = All Season

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number(TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT"and indicates that the tire meets all fed-eral standards. The next two numbers orletters are the plant code where it wasmanufactured, the next two are the tiresize code and the last four numbers rep-resent the week and year the tire wasbuilt. For example, 1510 means that thetire was manufactured during week 15 of2010. The numbers in between are mar-keting codes used at the manufacturer'sdiscretion. This information helps a tiremanufacturer identify a tire for safetyrecall purposes.

9. Tire Ply Composition and MaterialUsed: Indicates the number of plies indi-cates or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and side-wall. Tire manufacturers also must indi-cate the ply materials in the tire and thesidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly-ester, and others.

10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximumload in pounds and kilograms that can becarried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle'stire information placard located on the B-Pillar for the correct tire pressure for yourvehicle.

11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperaturegrades: see Tire specifications – UniformTire Quality Grading (p. 304) for moreinformation.

12. Maximum permissible inflationpressure: the greatest amount of airpressure that should ever be put in thetire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-turer.

4 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

09 Wheels and tires

09

301

Tire inflation – pressure tableThe following tire pressures are recom-mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to

the tire inflation placard (see Tire inflation –general information (p. 297) for its location) for

information specific to the tires installed onyour vehicle at the factory.

Some of the tire sizes listed here may notbe available for all models in all markets.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons

Front

psi (kPa)

Rear

psi (kPa)

235/60 R18

235/55 R19

255/45 R20

35 (240) 35 (240)

Temporary spare tire

T125/80R17

61 (420) 61 (420)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Partsdepartment for the most up-to-date speci-fications.

09 Wheels and tires

09

302

Loading specificationsProperly loading your vehicle will providemaximum return of vehicle design perform-ance.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your-self with the following terms for determiningyour vehicle's weight ratings, with or withouta trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa-tion placard:

Curb weightThe weight of the vehicle including a full tankof fuel and all standard equipment. It doesnot include passengers, cargo, or optionalequipment.

Capacity weightAll weight added to the curb weight, includingcargo and optional equipment. When towing,trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargoweight.

Permissible axle weightThe maximum allowable weight that can becarried by a single axle (front or rear). Thesenumbers are shown on the Federal/CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. The total load on each axlemust never exceed its maximum permissibleweight.

Gross vehicle weight (GVW)The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen-gers.

NOTE

• The location of the various labels inyour vehicle, see Label information(p. 368).

• A table listing important weight limitsfor your vehicle, see Weights (p. 374).

Loading specifications – load limitThe load limit of your vehicle is the combinedweight of the occupants and cargo.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit1. Locate the statement "the combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi-cle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of thedriver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo and lug-gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of lug-gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}303

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle.

WARNING

• Exceeding the permissible axle weight,gross vehicle weight, or any otherweight rating limits can cause tireoverheating resulting in permanentdeformation or catastrophic failure.

• Do not use replacement tires withlower load carrying capacities than thetires that were original equipment onthe vehicle because this will lower thevehicle's GVW rating. Use only tireswith the correct load carrying capacity.Consult your Volvo retailer for informa-tion.

Tire specifications – terminologyThe following is a glossary of tire-relatedterms.

The tire suppliers may have additional mark-ings, notes or warnings such as standardload, radial tubeless, etc.

• Tire information placard: A placardshowing the OE (Original Equipment) tiresizes, recommended inflation pressure,and the maximum weight the vehicle cancarry.

• Tire Identification Number (TIN): Anumber on the sidewall of each tire pro-viding information about the tire brandand manufacturing plant, tire size anddate of manufacturer.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of theamount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric orMetric tires designed to carry a maximumload at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metrictires]. Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will not increase thetires load carrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metrictires designed to carry a heavier maxi-mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) forMetric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres-sure beyond this pressure will notincrease the tire's load carrying capabil-ity.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres-sure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standardunit of air pressure.

• B-pillar: The structural member at theside of the vehicle behind the front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tirenext to the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between thebead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim-eter of the tire that contacts the roadwhen mounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tireor a tire and tube assembly upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

• Maximum load rating: a figure indicatingthe maximum load in pounds and kilo-grams that can be carried by the tire. Thisrating is established by the tire manufac-turer.

• Maximum permissible inflationpressure: the greatest amount of airpressure that should ever be put in thetire. This limit is set by the tire manufac-turer.

• Recommended tire inflation pressure:inflation pressure, established by Volvo,which is based on the type of tires thatare mounted on a vehicle at the factory.This information can be found on the tireinflation placard(s) located on the driver's

09 Wheels and tires

09

304

side B-pillar and in the tire inflation tablein this chapter.

• Cold tires: The tires are considered to becold when they have the same tempera-ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. Thistemperature is normally reached after thevehicle has been parked for at least3 hours.

Tire specifications – Uniform TireQuality GradingALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUSTCONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETYREQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESEGRADES.

Quality grades can be found, where appli-cable, on the tire sidewall between thetread shoulder and maximum sectionwidth. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEARThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when tes-ted under controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one half(1 ½) times as well on the government courseas a tire graded 100. The relative perform-ance of tires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and many departsignificantly from the norm due to variation indriving habits, maintenance practices and dif-ferences in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTIONThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con-trolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perform-

ance. The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on braking (straight-ahead) tractiontests and is not a measure of cornering (turn-ing) traction.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on braking (straight-ahead) tractiontests and is not a measure of cornering(turning) traction.

TEMPERATUREThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a minimum level of perform-ance that all passenger vehicle tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand-ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required by law.

09 Wheels and tires

09

305

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly infla-ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and tire failure.

Snow chainsSnow chains can be used on your Volvo withthe following restrictions:

• Snow chains should be installed on frontwheels only. Use only Volvo approvedsnow chains.

• If accessory, aftermarket or "custom"tires and wheels are installed and are of asize different than the original tires andwheels, chains in some cases CANNOTbe used. Sufficient clearances betweenchains and brakes, suspension and bodycomponents must be maintained.

• Some strap-on type chains will interferewith brake components and thereforeCANNOT be used.

• All Wheel Drive models: Snow chainsshould only be installed on the frontwheels.

• Certain size tires may not allow theassembly of snow chains/traction devi-ces.

Consult your Volvo retailer for additionalsnow chain information.

CAUTION

• Check local regulations regarding theuse of snow chains before installing.

• Use single-sided snow chains only.

• Always follow the chain manufactur-er's installation instructions carefully.Install chains as tightly as possible andretighten periodically.

• Never exceed the chain manufactur-er's specified maximum speed limit.(Under no circumstances should youexceed 31 mph (50 km/h).

• Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turnswhen driving with snow chains.

• The handling of the vehicle can beadversely affected when driving withchains. Avoid fast or sharp turns aswell as locked wheel braking.

09 Wheels and tires

09

306

Snow tires/studded tires5

Owners who live in or regularly commutethrough areas with sustained periods of snowor icy driving conditions are strongly advisedto fit suitable winter tires to help retain thehighest degree of traction.

Tires for winter use:• It is important to install winter tires on all

four wheels to help retain traction duringcornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail-ure to do so could reduce traction to anunsafe level or adversely affect handling.

• Do not mix tires of different design as thiscould also negatively affect overall tireroad grip.

• Winter tires wear more quickly on dryroads in warm weather. They should beremoved when the winter driving seasonhas ended.

• Studded tires should be run-in 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during whichthe vehicle should be driven as smoothlyas possible to give the studs the opportu-nity to seat properly in the tires. The tiresshould have the same rotational directionthroughout their entire lifetime.

NOTE

Please consult state or provincial regula-tions restricting the use of studded wintertires before installing such tires.

Tire pressure monitoring -introductionVolvo provides two different systems to moni-tor tire pressure: Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) or Tire Monitor.

Determining which tire monitoringsystem is in your vehicleTo see which system is installed in your vehi-cle, press the MY CAR button on the centerconsole. Go to Settings Car settings.

• If your vehicle has a menu called Tiremonitoring, see Tire Monitor - introduc-tion (p. 311).

• If your vehicle has a menu called Tirepressure, see Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) – general information(p. 307).

IntroductionEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitor-ing system that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale ( ) when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle's handling and stopping ability.Please note that a tire pressure monitoringsystem is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the system's low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. Themonitoring system's malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction, thetelltale will flash for approximately one minuteand then remain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

5 Where permitted

09 Wheels and tires

09

307

exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

System malfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the tire pressuremonitoring system from functioning properly.

Always check the system's malfunction tell-tale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the system to continue to functionproperly.

NOTE

The system indicates low tire pressure butdoes not replace normal tire maintenance.For information on correct tire pressure,please refer to the tire inflation pressuretable (see Tire inflation – pressure table(p. 301)), the tire inflation pressure placardlocated on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehi-cle, at the rear of the driver's door open-ing) or consult your Volvo retailer.

WARNING

Incorrect inflation pressure could lead totire failure, resulting in a loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) – general informationTPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valvesto check inflation pressure levels. When thevehicle is moving at a speed of approximately20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensorstransmit inflation pressure data to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

NOTE

USA – FCC ID: KR5S180052050

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

When low inflation pressure is detected or if asensor is not functioning properly, TPMS willlight up the tire pressure warning light ( )(also referred to as a telltale) in the instrumentpanel and will display one of the followingmessages: Tire pressure low, Tire needsair now or Tire press. syst Servicerequired.

NOTE

If a malfunction occurs in the system, thetire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute and then remainilluminated. Tire press. syst Servicerequired will be displayed.

Related information• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

– recalibrating (p. 309)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– messages (p. 310)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– activating/deactivating (p. 309)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– changing wheels (p. 308)

09 Wheels and tires

09

308

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) – changing wheels

Please keep the following in mind whenchanging or replacing the factory installedTPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle:

• Not all aftermarket wheels are equippedwith TPMS sensors in the valves.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo-rary spare tire, this tire does not have aTPMS sensor.

• If wheels without TPMS sensors aremounted on the vehicle, a text messagewill displayed in the instrument paneleach time the vehicle is driven above20 mph (30 km/h) for 10 minutes or more.

• Once TPMS sensors are properly instal-led, the warning message should notreappear. If the message is still displayed,drive the vehicle for several minutes at aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster toerase the message.

• Volvo recommends that TPMS sensorsbe fitted on all wheels used on the vehi-cle, including winter tires. Volvo does notrecommend moving sensors back andforth between sets of wheels.

CAUTION

When inflating tires with TPMS sensors,press the pump's mouthpiece straightonto the valve to help avoid bending orotherwise damaging the valve.

CAUTION

• After inflating the tires, always reinstallthe valve cap to help avoid damage tothe valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

• Use plastic valve caps only. Metalcaps could corrode and become diffi-cult to remove.

NOTE

• If you change to tires with a differentdimension than the factory-installedones, the TPMS system must bereconfigured for these tires. This mustbe done by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen-sor is moved to another wheel, thesensor's seal, nut, and valve coreshould be replaced.

• When installing TPMS sensors, thevehicle must be parked for at least15 minutes with the ignition off. If thevehicle is driven within 15 minutes, aTPMS error message will be displayed.

Related information• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

– general information (p. 307)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– recalibrating (p. 309)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– messages (p. 310)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– activating/deactivating (p. 309)

09 Wheels and tires

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) – recalibratingIn certain cases, it may be necessary to recali-brate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom-mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla-tion pressure table in Tire inflation – pressuretable (p. 301)), for example, if higher inflationpressure is necessary when transportingheavy loads, etc.

Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian modelsonly)*This is done in the vehicle's menu system.

To recalibrate:

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressureand put the ignition in mode I or II (seeIgnition modes (p. 79) for additional infor-mation).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-sole control panel and select SettingsCar settings Tire pressure.

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tirepressure and press OK/MENU again.

5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above20 mph (30 km/h) continuously for atleast 10 minutes.> Calibration is done automatically once

initiated by the driver and the systemdoes not give any confirmation whencalibration is finished.

The new pressures are used until step 1-5above are repeated.

Related information• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

– general information (p. 307)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– messages (p. 310)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– activating/deactivating (p. 309)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– changing wheels (p. 308)

• My Car – introduction (p. 76)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) – activating/deactivating

Activating/deactivating TPMS(Canadian models only)1. Switch off the engine.

2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see Igni-tion modes (p. 79) for additional informa-tion).

3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con-sole control panel and select SettingsCar settings Tire pressure

4. Select Tire monitoring and press OK/MENU to turn the system on or off.

Related information• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

– general information (p. 307)

09 Wheels and tires

09

310

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) – messages

Erasing warning messagesWhen a low tire pressure warning messagehas been displayed and the tire pressurewarning light in the instrument panell ( )has come on:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check theinflation pressure of all four tires.

2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres-sure (consult the tire pressure placardlocated on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehi-cle, at the rear of the driver's door open-ing) or the inflation pressure table, seeTire inflation – pressure table (p. 301).

3. In certain cases, it may be necessary todrive the vehicle for several minutes at aspeed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. Thiswill erase the warning text and the telltalewill go out.

NOTE

• Tire monitoring systems use a tem-perature compensated pressure value.This pressure value is dependent ontire temperature and ambient tempera-ture, which can differ from the recom-mended cold tire pressure in the tireinflation table and on the tire pressureplacard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at theside of the vehicle, at the rear of thedriver's door opening). This meansthat it may sometimes be necessary toinflate them slightly above the recom-mended cold pressure value(approx. 3-4 psi or 0.2-0.3 bar) in orderto reset a low tire pressure warning.

• To help avoid incorrect tire inflationpressure, if possible only inflate thetires when they are cold. The tires areconsidered to be cold when they havethe same temperature as the sur-rounding (ambient) air. This tempera-ture is normally reached after the vehi-cle has been parked for at least3 hours. After driving a distance ofapproximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tiresare considered to be hot.

CAUTION

• After inflating the tires, always reinstallthe valve cap to help avoid damage tothe valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

• Use plastic valve caps only. Metalcaps could corrode and become diffi-cult to remove.

WARNING

• Incorrect inflation pressure could leadto tire failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

• Tire monitoring systems cannot indi-cate sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors (e.g., a blowout) inadvance.

Related information• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

– general information (p. 307)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– recalibrating (p. 309)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– activating/deactivating (p. 309)

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)– changing wheels (p. 308)

• Tire pressure monitoring - introduction(p. 306)

• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}311

Tire Monitor - introductionTire Monitor uses the rotational speed of thetires in combination with signal analysis of theABS sensor signals to determine if they areproperly inflated.

When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter(and consequently also its rotational speed)changes. By comparing the individual tireswith each other it is possible to determine ifone or more tires are under inflated.

When low inflation pressure is detected or ifthe system is not functioning properly, TireMonitor will light up the tire pressure warninglight ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) inthe instrument panel and will display one ofthe following messages in the text window,for example: Tire pressure low Check rearright tire6 or Tire press. syst Servicerequired.

If two or more tires have low pressure or if thesystem cannot determine which tire has lowpressure, a general text (Tire pressure lowCheck tires) will be displayed.

NOTE

If a malfunction occurs in the system, thetire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute and then remainilluminated. Tire press. syst Servicerequired will be displayed.

NOTE

The system indicates low tire pressure butdoes not replace normal tire maintenance.For information on correct tire pressure,please refer to the tire inflation pressuretable (see Tire inflation – pressure table(p. 301)), the tire inflation pressure placardlocated on the driver's side B-pillar (thestructural member at the side of the vehi-cle, at the rear of the driver's door open-ing) or consult your Volvo retailer.

Related information• Tire pressure monitoring - introduction

(p. 306)

Calibrating Tire MonitorIn order for Tire Monitor to work correctly, tirepressure reference values must be set. Thismust be done each time wheels or tire pres-sures are changed.

Calibration1. Switch off the engine.

2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure(consult tire pressure placard located onthe driver's side B-pillar (the structuralmember at the side of the vehicle) andput the ignition in mode II, see Ignitionmodes (p. 79).

3. Press the MY CAR button on the centerconsole control panel and select Settings

Car settings Tire monitoring.

4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tirepressure and press OK/MENU again.

5. Drive away.> The calibration process will be comple-

ted while driving and will be interruptedif the vehicle is parked and the engineis switched off. Calibration continuesautomatically when driving resumes.The system will not give any confirma-tion when calibration is finishedalthough it will state if calibration fails.

6 That last part of this message varies, depending on the tire(s) effected.

09 Wheels and tires

09

312

The new reference values will be used untilsteps 1-5 stated above are repeated.

NOTE

Always remember to calibrate Tire Monitorwhen the wheels have been changed orthe tire pressure has been correctedaccording to tire pressure placard or tirepressure table. If correct reference valueshave not been set, the system cannotissue low tire pressure alerts correctly.

Tire Monitor status informationThe current status of the system and the tiresis indicated by color-coded graphics.

This status can be displayed by pressing theMY CAR button on the center console andgoing to Settings Car settings Tiremonitoring.

The following color-coded graphics indicate:

• All green: the system is operational andall tire pressures are at or above the rec-ommended levels.

• One yellow wheel: the tire indicated isunder-inflated.

• All wheels yellow: two or more tires areunder-inflated

• All wheels gray: the system is currentlyunavailable. It might be necessary todrive at a speed of at least 20 mph(30 km/h) for several minutes for the sys-tem to become operational.

• All wheels gray in combination with themessage Tire press. syst Servicerequired and the telltale in the instru-ment panel ( ) is illuminated: thesystem is not functioning correctly. Haveit checked by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

• All wheels gray in combination with themessage Tire press. syst currentlyunavailable and the telltale in theinstrument panel ( ) is illuminated:

the system is temporarily unavailable. Itshould become operational again shortly.

Related information• Tire Monitor – messages (p. 313)

09 Wheels and tires

09

313

Tire Monitor – messagesWhen low tire pressure has been detected, amessage will be displayed and the tire pres-sure warning telltale in the instrument panel

will illuminate.

Erasing warning messagesTo erase a low tire pressure message andturn off the telltale:

1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check theinflation pressure of all four tires (see thearticle "Tire inflation – checking pres-sure").

2. Re-inflate the tires to the correct pressure(consult the tire pressure placard locatedon the driver's side B-pillar (the structuralmember at the side of the vehicle, at therear of the driver's door opening) or theinflation pressure table, see Tire inflation –pressure table (p. 301).

3. Recalibrate Tire Monitor, see CalibratingTire Monitor (p. 311).

NOTE

To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pres-sure, only inflate the tires when they arecold. The tires are considered to be coldwhen they have the same temperature asthe surrounding (ambient) air. This tem-perature is normally reached after the vehi-cle has been parked for at least 3 hours.After driving a distance of approximately1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered tobe hot.

CAUTION

• After inflating the tires, always reinstallthe valve cap to help avoid damage tothe valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

• Use plastic valve caps only. Metalcaps could corrode and become diffi-cult to remove.

WARNING

• Incorrect inflation pressure could leadto tire failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle.

• Tire monitoring systems cannot indi-cate sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors (e.g., a blowout) inadvance.

Related information• Tire Monitor – messages (p. 313)

• Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 298)

• Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

09 Wheels and tires

09

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)Self-supporting run flat tires are available asoptional equipment on certain models.

The vehicle must be equipped with one of thetire pressure monitoring systems if tires ofthis type are installed.

Tires of this type have specially reinforcedsidewalls that make it possible to continuedriving to a limited extent even though the tirehas lost some or all of its inflation pressure.These tires are mounted on special rims (nor-mal tires can also be mounted on these rims).

If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel-low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instru-ment panel and a text message is also dis-played. If this happens, reduce speed to notmore than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

WARNING

• SST tires should only be mounted byservice technicians who are familiarwith tires of this type.

• SST tires may only be mounted onvehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system.

• Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h) if the monitoring system indi-cates that a tire has lost inflation pres-sure.

• Do not drive farther than 50 miles(80 km) before replacing a damagedSST tire.

• Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hardbraking or fast turns.

• SST tires must be replaced if they aredamaged. A tire of this type cannot berepaired.

Related information• Tire pressure monitoring - introduction

(p. 306)

Tire sealing system* – generalinformationCertain models are equipped with a tiresealing system* that enables you to tempo-rarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflationpressure.

IntroductionThe tire sealing system consists of an aircompressor, a container for the sealing com-pound, wiring to connect the system to thevehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect thesystem to the tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE

The tire sealing system's compressor hasbeen tested and approved by Volvo.

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315

The 12-volt sockets are located in the fronttunnel console, on the rear side of the centerconsole in the rear seat and in the cargoarea*.

Accessing the tire sealing systemThe tire sealing system is stowed under thefloor of the cargo area. To access it:

1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area.2. Lift out the tire sealing system.

NOTE

• The tire sealing system is onlyintended to seal holes on the tire’stread area, not the sidewall.

• Tires with large holes or tears cannotbe repaired with the tire sealing sys-tem.

• After use, stow the tire sealing systemproperly to help prevent rattling.

WARNING

• After using the tire sealing system, thevehicle should not be driven fartherthan approximately 120 miles (200km).

• Have the tire inspected by a trainedand qualified Volvo service technicianas soon as possible to determine if itcan be permanently repaired or mustbe replaced.

• The vehicle should not be driven fasterthan 50 mph (80 km/h) while using atire that has been temporarily repairedwith the tire sealing system.

• After using the tire sealing system,drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer-ing maneuvers and sudden stops.

Tire sealing system–temporarilyrepairing a flat tire

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in twostages:

• Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumpingsealing compound into the tire. The car isthen driven a short distance to distributethe sealing compound in the tire.

||09 Wheels and tires

09

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

Do not remove any foreign objects (nails,etc.) from the tire before using the sealingsystem.

• Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure ischecked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING

• Never leave the tire sealing systemunattended when it is operating.

• Keep the tire sealing system awayfrom children.

• Be sure the vehicle is parked safely offthe road and away from moving traffic.

• Apply the parking brake.

Related information• Tire sealing system* – overview (p. 316)

• Tire sealing system* – inflating tires(p. 320)

• Tire sealing system* – sealing compoundcontainer (p. 321)

• Tire sealing system* – sealing hole(p. 317)

• Tire sealing system – checking inflationpressure (p. 319)

• Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 140)

• 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)

Tire sealing system* – overviewCertain models are equipped with a tiresealing system* that enables you to tempo-rarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflationpressure.

Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of thecompressor)

On/Off switch

Electrical wire

Bottle holder (orange cover)

Protective hose cover

Air release knob

Hose

Bottle with sealing compound

Air pressure gauge

09 Wheels and tires

09

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317

WARNING

Please keep the following points in mindwhen using the tire sealing system:

• The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 inthe illustration) contains 1) rubberlatex, natural and 2) ethanediol. Thesesubstances are harmful if swallowed.

• The contents of this bottle may causeallergic skin reactions or otherwise bepotentially harmful to the respiratorytract, the skin, the central nervous sys-tem, and the eyes.

Precautions:

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Do not ingest the contents.

• Avoid prolonged or repeated contactwith the skin.

• Wash thoroughly after handling.First aid:

• Skin: Wash affected areas of skin withsoap and water. Get medical attentionif symptoms occur.

• Eyes: Flush with plenty of water forleast 15 minutes, occasionally liftingthe upper and lower eyelids. Get medi-cal attention if symptoms occur.

• Inhalation: Move the exposed personto fresh air. If irritation persists, getmedical attention.

• Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomitingunless directed to do so by medicalpersonnel. Get medical attention.

• Disposal: Dispose of this material andits container to a hazardous or specialwaste collection point.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

Related information• Tire sealing system* – general information

(p. 314)

• Tire sealing system* – inflating tires(p. 320)

• Tire sealing system – checking inflationpressure (p. 319)

• Tire sealing system* – sealing hole(p. 317)

• Tire sealing system* – sealing compoundcontainer (p. 321)

Tire sealing system* – sealing holeThe tire sealing system can be used to tem-porarily seal a hole in the tread surface of atire.

Stage 1: Sealing the hole1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it

to the steering wheel hub where it will beclearly visible to the driver.

2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi-tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

WARNING

Contact with the sealing compound maycause skin irritation. If contact occurs,wash the affected area immediately withsoap and water.

3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottleholder and unscrew the cap on the bottleof sealing compound.

NOTE

Do not break the seal on the bottle. Thisoccurs automatically when the bottle isscrewed into the holder.

4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder.

||09 Wheels and tires

09

318

WARNING

The bottle is equipped with a catch tokeep it securely in place and help preventsealing compound leakage. Once in place,the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This mustbe done by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’sinflation valve and screw the tire sealingsystem’s hose connector onto the valveas tightly as possible by hand.

6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

NOTE

Be sure that none of the other 12-voltsockets is being used while the compres-sor is in operation.

7. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

The vehicle´s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used toavoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure thevehicle is parked in a well ventilated place,or outdoors, before using the system.

8. Start the tire sealing system’s compres-sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi-tion I.

WARNING

• Never stand next to the tire being infla-ted when the compressor is in opera-tion.

• If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire,switch off the compressor immediately.

• If there is visible damage to the sidewallor the rim, the tire cannot be repaired.The vehicle should not be driven if thisoccurs. Contact a towing service orVolvo On Call Roadside Assistance ifapplicable.

NOTE

The air pressure gauge will temporarilyshow an increase in pressure to approxi-mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealingcompound is being pumped into the tire.The pressure should return to a normallevel after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire tobetween 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar).Switch off the compressor briefly to get aclear reading from the pressure gauge.

09 Wheels and tires

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

WARNING

If the pressure remains below 22 psi(1.8 bar) after approximately sevenminutes, turn off the compressor. In thiscase, the hole is too large to be sealed andthe vehicle should not be driven.

10. Switch off the compressor and discon-nect the electrical wire from the 12-voltsocket.

11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

• After inflating the tires, always reinstallthe valve cap to help avoid damage tothe valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal capscould corrode and become difficult toremove.

12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi-mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximumspeed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distributethe sealing compound in the tire.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS), theuse of the sealing compound may lead toincorrect tire pressure readings or in rarecases, damage to the tire pressure sensor.Use the tire sealing system to check andadjust the damaged tire's inflation pres-sure.

NOTE

• Safely stow the tire sealing system in aconvenient place as it will soon beused again to check the tire’s inflationpressure.

• The empty bottle of sealing compoundcannot be removed from the bottleholder. Consult a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician to have thebottle removed and properly disposedof.

WARNING

If heavy vibrations, unsteady steeringbehavior, or noises should occur whiledriving, reduce speed and park the vehiclein a safe place. Recheck the tire forbumps, cracks, or other visible damage,and recheck its inflation pressure. If thepressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do notcontinue driving. Have the vehicle towedto a trained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

Tire sealing system – checkinginflation pressureThe tire sealing system can also be used tocheck the tires' inflation pressure.

Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure1. Connect the tire sealing system as

described in stage 1, see Tire sealingsystem* – sealing hole (p. 317).

2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in thischapter for the correct inflation pressure.If the tire needs to be inflated, start thetire sealing system’s compressor. If nec-essary, release air from the tire by turningthe air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

WARNING

If you interrupt your trip for more than 1hour, check the inflation pressure in thedamaged tire again before continuing.

09 Wheels and tires

09

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Tire sealing system* – inflating tiresThe tire sealing system can be used to inflatethe tires.

To do so:

1. Park the car in a safe place.

2. The compressor should be switched off.Ensure that the on/off switch is in position

0 (the 0 side of the switch should bepressed down).

3. Take out the electrical wire and hose.

4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’sinflation valve and screw the hose con-nector onto the valve as tightly as possi-ble by hand.

5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest12-volt socket in the vehicle.

6. Start the vehicle’s engine.

WARNING

• The vehicle’s engine should be runningwhen the tire sealing system is used toavoid battery drain. Therefore, be surethe vehicle is parked in a well ventilatedplace, or outdoors, before using thesystem. The parking brake should besecurely applied and the gear selectorshould be in the P (park) position.

• Children should never be left unatten-ded in the vehicle when the engine isrunning.

7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on thegauge. Switch off the compressor brieflyto get a clear reading from the pressuregauge.

8. Refer to the tire inflation table in thischapter for the correct inflation pressure.If the tire needs to be inflated, start thetire sealing system’s compressor (pressthe on/off switch to position I). If neces-sary, release air from the tire by turningthe air release knob counterclockwise.

CAUTION

The compressor should not be used formore than 10 minutes at a time to avoidoverheating.

9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/offswitch to position 0) when the correctinflation pressure has been reached.

10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflationvalve and reinstall the valve cap.

CAUTION

• After inflating the tires, always reinstallthe valve cap to help avoid damage tothe valve from dirt, gravel, etc.

• Use plastic valve caps only. Metal capscould corrode and become difficult toremove.

11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the12-volt socket.

09 Wheels and tires

09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321

Tire sealing system* – sealingcompound containerThe sealing compound container must bereplaced if the tire sealing system has beenused to repair a tire or if the container’s expi-ration date has passed (see the date ondecal).

Replacing the sealing compoundcontainer

NOTE

• After use, the sealing compound bot-tle, the hose, and certain other systemcomponents must be replaced. Pleaseconsult your Volvo retailer for replace-ment parts.

• If the sealing compound bottle’s expi-ration date has passed, please take itto a Volvo retailer or a recycling stationthat can properly dispose of harmfulsubstances.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

323

Maintenance – introductionPeriodic maintenance will help keep yourvehicle running well.

IntroductionThe maintenance services contain severalchecks that require special instruments andtools and therefore must be performed by aqualified technician. To keep your Volvo intop condition, specify time-tested and provenGenuine Volvo Parts and Accessories.

The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S.The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehiclemanufacturers to furnish written instructionsto the ultimate purchaser to assure the properservicing and function of the components thatcontrol emissions. These services, which arelisted in the "Warranty and Service RecordsInformation" booklet, are not covered by thewarranty. You will be required to pay for laborand material used.

MaintenanceYour Volvo passed several major inspectionsbefore it was delivered to you, in accordancewith Volvo specifications. The maintenanceprocedures outlined in the Warranty andService Records Information booklet, many ofwhich will positively affect your vehicle'semissions, should be performed as indicated.It is recommended that receipts for vehicleemission maintenance be retained in casequestions arise concerning maintenance.Inspection and maintenance should also be

performed anytime a malfunction is observedor suspected.

Applicable warranties – U.S./CanadaIn accordance with applicable U.S. andCanadian regulations, the following list ofwarranties is provided.

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty

• Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

• Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty

• Seat Belt and Supplemental RestraintSystems Limited Warranty

• Emission Design and Defect Warranty

• Emission Performance Warranty

These are the federal warranties; other war-ranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate War-ranty and Service Records Information book-let for detailed information concerning eachof the warranties.

Periodic maintenance helps minimizeemissions

NOTE

• Refer to your Warranty and ServiceRecords Information booklet for acomprehensive service and mainte-nance schedule up to 150,000 miles(240,000 km). This program containsinspections and services necessary forthe proper function of your vehicle andincludes components that affect vehi-cle emissions.

• The Warranty and Service RecordsInformation booklet also containsdetailed information concerning thewarranties that apply to your vehicle.

Related information• Climate – general information (p. 125)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

324

Maintenance – owner maintenancePeriodic maintenance requirements and inter-vals are described in your vehicle's Warrantyand Service Records Information booklet.

The following points can be carried outbetween the normally scheduled maintenanceservices.

Owner maintenance

Each time the car is refueled:• Check the engine oil level.

• Clean the windshield, windshield wipers,headlights, and taillights.

Monthly:• Check cold tire pressure in all tires.

Inspect the tires for wear.

• Check that engine coolant and other fluidlevels are between the indicated "min"and "max" markings.

• Clean interior glass surfaces with a glasscleaner and soft paper towels.

• Wipe driver information displays with asoft cloth.

• Visually inspect battery terminals for cor-rosion. Corrosion may indicate a looseterminal connector, or a battery near theend of its useful service life. Consult yourVolvo retailer for additional information.

As needed:Wash the car, including the undercarriage, toreduce wear that can be caused by a buildup

of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused bysalt residues.

Clean leaves and twigs from air intake ventsat the base of the windshield, and from otherplaces where they may collect.

NOTE

Complete service information for qualifiedtechnicians is available online for purchaseor subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

Related information• Maintenance – opening/closing hood

(p. 328)

• Engine compartment – overview (p. 329)

• Engine compartment – coolant (p. 332)

• Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 330)

• Engine compartment – power steeringfluid (p. 334)

• Engine compartment – washer fluid(p. 345)

• Cleaning the interior (p. 363)

• Washing the car (p. 361)

• Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 298)

• Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

325

Maintenance – hoistingWhen the vehicle is hoisted, the jack orgarage lift must be positioned in the correctlifting points.

Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, itshould be placed:

Front: under either of the two reinforcedareas under the front section of the vehicle,not under to jack attachment points (theoutermost points shown in the illustration).

Rear: Under the jack attachment points.

Ensure that the jack is positioned so that thevehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axlestands or similar structures.

Related information• Changing a wheel – removing wheel

(p. 292)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Onboard Diagnostic SystemOBD II is part of your vehicle's computerizedengine management system. It stores diag-nostic information about your vehicle's emis-sion controls. It can light the Check Enginelight (MIL) if it detects an emission control"fault." A "fault" is a component or systemthat is not performing within an expectedrange. A fault may be permanent or tempo-rary. OBD II will store a message about anyfault.

Emission inspection readiness

How do states use OBD II for emissioninspections?Many states connect a computer directly to avehicle's OBD II system. The inspector canthen read "faults." In some states, this type ofinspection has replaced the tailpipe emissiontest.

How can my vehicle fail OBD II emissioninspection?Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec-tion for any of the following reasons.

• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, yourvehicle may fail inspection.

• If your vehicle's Check Engine light waslit, but went out without any action onyour part, OBD II will still have a recordedfault. Your vehicle may pass or fail,depending on the inspection practices inyour area.

• If you had recent service that requireddisconnecting the battery, OBD II diag-nostic information may be incompleteand "not ready" for inspection. A vehiclethat is not ready may fail inspection.

How can I prepare for my next OBD IIemission inspection?• If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or

was lit but went out without service, haveyour vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary,serviced by a qualified Volvo technician.

• If you recently had service for a lit CheckEngine light, or if you had service thatrequired disconnecting the battery, aperiod of driving is necessary to bring theOBD II system to "ready" for inspection.Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway driving are typically neededto allow OBD II to reach readiness. YourVolvo retailer can provide you with moreinformation on planning a trip.

• Maintain your vehicle in accordance withyour vehicle's maintenance schedule.

Booking service and repairs Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes set-ting up a time for service, maintenance and/orrepairs directly from the vehicle quick andconvenient.

Prerequisites• The owner (primary driver) must have a

valid Volvo ID. See Volvo ID (p. 21) foradditional information.

• The vehicle must be connected to theInternet using a paired Bluetooth® cellphone. See your Sensus Infotainmentsupplement for information on pairing acell phone. On models equipped withVolvo On Call (VOC)*, you can connect tothe Internet using your separate VOCdata plan. Refer to your separate VolvoOn Call manual.

• By default, the retailer where you pur-chased your vehicle will be your preferred(primary) retailer/Volvo authorized work-shop who will perform service and repairson your vehicle. To change the preferredretailer, go to Dealer Locator atvolvocars.com and select a retailer, clickon Service Scheduler and book anappointment at the new preferred retailer.

• In order to be guided through the on-screen steps, the menu alternativeDisplay notifications must be activated.

CSB menu accessOnce the prerequisites have been estab-lished, all CSB-related menus can be

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}327

accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENUand then selecting Maintenance & repair.

Booking information and data from thevehicleIf you request an appointment from your vehi-cle, with your consent, booking informationand data about your vehicle1 will be transmit-ted to your preferred retailer.

Using the serviceOnce the prerequisites have been estab-lished, all CSB-related menus can beaccessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENUand then selecting Maintenance & repair.

If the time for the next regularly scheduledservice is approaching, if the vehicle requirescertain types of repairs or if a system needsto be checked, a message will be displayed.You will then by guided through the stepsrequired to book service or repairs.

On-screen service messages

On-screen service message

The pop-up service alert menu offers the fol-lowing alternatives:

• Yes: The vehicle will transmit a bookingrequest as well as vehicle data directly toyour preferred retailer. In return, you willreceive an email from this retailer with alink to their booking portal. From a smart-phone or a computer, you can select aday and time that suits you and specifyany other service requests that you mayhave. When you have submitted yourrequest, it will be entered into the retail-er's booking portal and you will receiveimmediate confirmation online and viaemail. The service reminder light in the

vehicle's instrument panel will also beturned off remotely by Volvo.

• No: No other messages will be displayedon the Sensus screen but the ServiceReminder Light on the vehicle's instru-ment panel will stay on. If you haveanswered "No", service can still bebooked manually (see the following sec-tion).

• Postpone: The pop-up menu will be dis-played that next time the engine isstarted.

Booking service or repairs manuallyAccess your Volvo On-Line Service Schedulerportal from a smartphone or a computer toselect a day and time that suits you andspecify any other service requests that youmay have. When you have submitted yourrequest, it will be entered into the retailer'sbooking portal and you will receive immediateconfirmation online and via email.

My AppointmentsThis displays booking information.

– Select Maintenance & repair MyAppointments.

Transmitting vehicle dataIn order for a retailer to access vehicle data,the information is initially sent to a centralVolvo database (not directly to your retailer)

1 This information includes: service requirements, status of various functions, odometer reading and the vehicle's VIN number and software version.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

328

where any retailer can access or search forthis information using your vehicle's VIN num-ber. This number can be found in your war-ranty booklet or on the dashboard at thelower left corner of the windshield.

– Select Maintenance & repair Sendvehicle data.

Booking information and vehicle dataWhen you opt to book service from your vehi-cle, booking information and vehicle data willbe transmitted. Vehicle data consists of anumber of parameters in the following areas:

• Service requirements

• Function status

• Fluid levels

• Odometer reading (mileage)

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• The vehicle's software version

Related information• Volvo ID (p. 21)

Maintenance – opening/closing hoodThe hood is opened by first releasing the lockfrom the passenger compartment and thenpressing the release control.

Opening and closing the hood

G031911

Pull the lever located under the left sideof the dash to release the hood lock. Aninformation symbol will illuminate whenthe hood is open.

Lift the hood slightly. Press the releasecontrol (located under the right front edgeof the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

WARNING

Check that the hood locks properly whenclosed.

Related information• Maintenance – owner maintenance

(p. 324)

• Engine compartment – overview (p. 329)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}329

Engine compartment – overviewThe overview shows the main inspectionpoints in the engine compartment.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Dipstick-engine oil

Filler cap-engine oil

Cover over brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only

Filler cap-engine oil

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Radiator

Brake fluid reservoir

Battery

Relay/fuse box

Washer fluid reservoir

Air cleaner

The appearance of the engine compartmentmay vary depending on engine model.

WARNING

The cooling fan (located at the front of theengine compartment, behind the radiator)may start or continue to operate (for up to6 minutes) after the engine has beenswitched off.

WARNING

Before performing any operations in theengine compartment, the ignition shouldalways be completely switched off (inmode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 79)) andthere should be no remote keys in the pas-senger compartment. The gear selectorshould be in the P (park) position. If theengine has been running, wait until it hascooled before touching any components inthe engine compartment.

The distributor ignition system operates atvery high voltages. Special safety precau-tions must be followed to prevent injury.Always turn the ignition off when:

• Replacing distributor ignition compo-nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc.

• Do not touch any part of the distributorignition system while the engine is run-ning. This may result in unintendedmovements and body injury.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

330

Related information• Maintenance – opening/closing hood

(p. 328)

• Maintenance – owner maintenance(p. 324)

Engine compartment – engine oilThe correct oil must be used for the stated oilchange (service) intervals to apply.

The oil level on 4-cylinder engines is checkedelectronically and is checked using a dipstickon 5- and 6-cylinder engines.

Checking the engine oil (5- and 6-cylinder engines)The oil level should be checked at regularintervals, particularly during the period up tothe first scheduled maintenance service.

• See Oil specifications (p. 377) for oilspecifications.

• Also, refer to the Warranty and ServiceRecords information booklet for informa-tion on oil change intervals and oil speci-fications.

CAUTION

• Not checking the oil level regularly canresult in serious engine damage if theoil level becomes too low.

• Oil that is lower than the specifiedquality can damage the engine.

• Volvo does not recommend the use ofoil additives.

• Always add oil of the same type andviscosity as already used.

• Never fill oil above the MAX mark. Thiscould cause an increase in oil con-sumption.

• Oil changes should be carried out by atrained and qualified Volvo servicetechnician.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}331

Checking and adding oil

Location of the filler cap and dipstick

NOTE

Before checking the oil:

• The car should be parked on a levelsurface.

• If the engine is warm, wait for at least10 – 15 minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off.

G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the dipstick

Checking the oil1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a

lint-free rag.

2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, andcheck the oil level. The level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks.

3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close tothe MIN mark, add approximately0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil.

4. Recheck the level and add more oil ifnecessary until the level is near the MAXmark.

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come intocontact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

Electronic oil level sensor (4-cylinderengines only)

Oil filler cap

No action is necessary until a message is dis-played, see the following illustration.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Left: digital instrument panel*, Right: analoginstrument panel

Message

Oil level

The oil level can be checked when the engineis not running by scrolling to the oil level sen-sor using the thumb wheel on the left steeringwheel lever.

CAUTION

• If Oil service required is displayed,the oil level may be too high. Take thevehicle to an authorized Volvo work-shop as soon as possible.

• If the oil level sensor indicates that thelevel is too low, using the correct oil,top up with the amount of oil indicatedas soon as possible, see oil specifica-tions (p. 377).

WARNING

Do not allow oil to spill onto or come intocontact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

Electronically checking the oil levelThe oil level should be checked at regularintervals, particularly during the period up tothe first scheduled maintenance service.

To check the oil level:

1. Activate ignition mode II, see Ignitionmodes (p. 79).

2. Turn the thumb wheel on the left steeringwheel lever until Oil level is displayed.> The oil level will be displayed.

NOTE

• The system cannot detect changes inthe oil level immediately. The vehiclemust be driven approximately 20 miles(30 km) or have been parked on levelground with the engine off for5 minutes before the oil level readingwill be correct.

• If the necessary conditions are not metfor checking the oil level electronically(time interval after the engine wasswitched off, if the vehicle is parked onan incline, etc.), No values availablewill be displayed. This does not indi-cate a problem with the oil level sen-sor.

Engine compartment – coolantNormally, the coolant does not need to bechanged. If the system must be drained, con-sult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech-nician.

Level check and filling

Location of the coolant reservoir

See Fuel tank volume – specification and vol-ume (p. 380) for information on cooling sys-tem capacities.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}333

CAUTION

• If necessary, top up the cooling sys-tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti-freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water andantifreeze).

• Different types of antifreeze/coolantmay not be mixed.

• If the cooling system is drained, itshould be flushed with clean water orpremixed anti-freeze before it is refilledwith the correct mixture of water/anti-freeze.

• The cooling system must always bekept filled to the correct level, and thelevel must be between the MIN andMAX marks. If it is not kept filled, therecan be high local temperatures in theengine which could result in damage.Check coolant regularly!

• Do not top up with water only. Thisreduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and hasa lower boiling point. It can also causedamage to the cooling system if itshould freeze.

• Do not use chlorinated tap water in thevehicle's cooling system.

WARNING

• Never remove the expansion tank capwhile the engine is warm. Wait until theengine cools.

• If it is necessary to top off the coolantwhen the engine is warm, unscrew theexpansion tank cap slowly so that theoverpressure dissipates.

Engine compartment – brake fluidThe brake fluid should always be between theMIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-ervoir.

Location of the brake fluid reservoir

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

334

Checking the levelThe fluid reservoir is concealed under theround cover at the rear of the engine com-partment. The round cover must be removedfirst before the reservoir cap can beaccessed.

The brake fluid should always be between theMIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res-ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, thatthere is sufficient fluid in the reservoir.

Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F

(280 °C), P/N 9437433

Replace: The fluid should be replacedaccording to the intervals specified in theWarranty and Service Records Informationbooklet.

When driving under extremely hard condi-tions (mountain driving, etc), it may be neces-sary to replace the fluid more often. Consult atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Always entrust brake fluid changing to atrained and qualified Volvo service technician.

WARNING

• If the fluid level is below the MIN markin the reservoir or if a brake-relatedmessage is shown in the informationdisplay: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the cartowed to a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician and have the brakesystem inspected.

• Dot 4 should never be mixed with anyother type of brake fluid.

Filling1. Turn and open the cover.

2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill thefluid. The level must be between the MINand MAX marks.

Engine compartment – power steeringfluidThe fluid level must be between the MIN andMAX marks. For capacities and recom-mended fluid grade, see Fuel tank volume –specification and volume (p. 380).

Check the level frequently. It does not nor-mally require changing.

WARNING

If a problem should occur in the powersteering system or if the vehicle has noelectrical current and must be towed, it isstill possible to steer the vehicle. However,keep in mind that greater effort will berequired to turn the steering wheel.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}335

CAUTION

Keep the area around the power steeringfluid reservoir clean when checking.

Bulbs – introductionCertain bulbs can be replaced by the vehicle'sowner. However, the bulbs on the followinglist should only be replaced by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

All bulb specifications are listed in Bulbs –specifications (p. 342).

• Active Bending Lights

• Daytime running lights, front parkinglights

• Front side marker lights

• Turn signals in the door mirrors

• Approach lighting in the door mirrors

• Interior lighting (except for the front foot-well lighting)

• Rear parking lights

• Rear side marker lights

• Rear turn signals

• LED bulbs

NOTE

• For information regarding any bulbsnot mentioned in this section, pleasecontact your Volvo retailer or a trainedand authorized Volvo service techni-cian.

• Always switch off the ignition beforestarting to replace a bulb.

• If an error message remains in the dis-play after a faulty bulb has beenreplaced, contact an authorized Volvoworkshop.

• Condensation may form temporarily onthe inside of the lenses of exteriorlights such as headlights, fog lights, ortaillights. This is normal and the lightsare designed to withstand moisture.Normally, condensation will dissipateafter the lights have been on for ashort time.

• The optional Active Bending Lightbulbs contain trace amounts of mer-cury. These bulbs should always bedisposed of by a trained and qualifiedVolvo service technician.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

CAUTION

Never touch the glass of bulbs with yourfingers. Grease and oils from your fingersvaporize in the heat and will leave adeposit on the reflector, which will damageit.

WARNING

• The engine should not be runningwhen changing bulbs.

• If the engine has been running justprior to replacing bulbs in the head-light housing, please keep in mind thatcomponents in the engine compart-ment will be hot.

WARNING

• Active Bending Lights* – due to thehigh voltage used by these headlights,these bulbs should only be replacedby a trained and qualified Volvo serv-ice technician.

• Turn off the lights and remove theremote key from the ignition beforechanging any bulbs.

Related information• Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 336)

• Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 342)

• Bulbs – cargo area lighting (p. 341)

• Bulbs – license plate lighting (p. 341)

Bulbs – headlight housingThe entire headlight housing must be liftedout when replacing all front bulbs.

Removing the headlight housing

Pull out the headlight housing's lockingpins.

Pull the headlight housing straight out.

CAUTION

When disconnecting the connector, pull onthe connector itself and not on the wiring.

Unplug the wiring connector by holdingdown the clip with your thumb.

Pull the connector out with the otherhand.

5. Lift out the headlight housing and place iton a soft surface to avoid scratching thelens.

6. Replace the defective bulb(s).

Reinserting the headlight housing

When reinserting the housing, be sure thatthe long locking pin is securely in place inboth of its retaining clamps.

1. Plug in the connector until it clicks intoplace.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

337

2. Reinsert the headlight housing and lock-ing pins. Check that they are correctlyinserted.

The headlight housing must be properlyin place and the wiring connector cor-rectly reconnected before the lighting isswitched on or the remote key is insertedinto the ignition slot.

3. Check that the lights function properly.

Related information• Bulbs – introduction (p. 335)

• Bulbs – cover (p. 337)

• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – coverThe larger cover has to be removed in orderto change the high/low beam headlight bulbs.

Removing the cover to access the bulbs

NOTE

Before starting to replace a bulb, seeBulbs – introduction (p. 335).

1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws(3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). Thescrews should not be removed com-pletely.

2. Push the cover to the side.

3. Remove the cover.

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

Related information• Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 336)

• Bulbs – low beam, Halogen (p. 338)

• Bulbs – high beam, Halogen (p. 338)

• Bulbs – extra high beam (p. 339)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

338

Bulbs – low beam, HalogenThe low beam bulb is concealed by the largercover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from thevehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing(p. 336)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (seeBulbs – cover (p. 337)).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holderdownward.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket until itsnaps into place. It can only be securedin one position.

6. Put the cover back into position and rein-stall the headlight housing.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – high beam, HalogenThe high beam bulb is concealed behind thelarger cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from thevehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing(p. 336)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (seeBulbs – cover (p. 337)).

3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter-clockwise and pulling it straight out.

4. Remove the connector from the bulb.

5. Press the new bulb into the socket andturn it clockwise to put it in place. It canonly be secured in one position.

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlighthousing.

7. Put the cover back into position and rein-stall the headlight housing.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}339

Bulbs – extra high beamThe extra high beam bulb is concealed by thelarger cover.

Extra high beam2

1. Remove the headlight housing from thevehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing(p. 336)).

2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (seeBulbs – cover (p. 337)).

3. Disconnect the wiring connector from thebulb holder.

4. Remove the bulb holder from the head-light housing by pulling it straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the holder. It can onlybe inserted in one way.

6. Press the bulb holder into position in theheadlight housing.

7. Reconnect the wiring connector to thebulb holder.

8. Put the cover back into position and rein-stall the headlight housing.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – front turn signalsThe turn signal bulb is concealed behind thesmaller cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from thevehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing(p. 336)).

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling it out of theheadlight housing.

3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb.

4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressingit in slightly and turning it counterclock-wise.

5. Press the new bulb into the holder andturn it clockwise.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

340

6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlighthousing and turn it clockwise.

7. Reinstall the headlight housing.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – rear fog lightsThe rear fog lights can be reached frombehind the bumper

1. Remove the bulb holder by turning itcounterclockwise.

2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressingit in and turning it counterclockwise.

3. Insert a new bulb, press it downward andturn it clockwise.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-wise.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – location of taillight bulbsThe following illustrations show the location ofthe bulbs in the taillight cluster.

Taillight lens, right side

Parking/side marker lights (LED)

Brake light

Backup light

Turn signal

Brake light (LED)

Related information• Bulbs – introduction (p. 335)

• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

341

Bulbs – brake lights and taillightsThe brake lights and back-up lights in the tail-light cluster are replaced from inside thecargo area.

Brake lights and taillights

1. Open the panel.

2. Remove the bulb holder by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressingit in and turning it counterclockwise.

4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn itclockwise.

5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock-wise.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

• Bulbs – location of taillight bulbs (p. 340)

Bulbs – license plate lightingThe license plate lighting is located next tothe tailgate handle.

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housingand pull it out.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing andtighten the screws.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – cargo area lightingThe cargo area light is located in the ceilingliner.

G031942

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn sothat the bulb housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and pressit back into the bulb housing.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

342 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Bulbs – vanity mirror lightingThe vanity mirror bulbs are located behind thelens.

Removing the lens

1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the lensand carefully exert upward pressure torelease the retaining lugs.

2. Snap out the lens.

3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulbstraight to the side. Replace the bulb. Donot exert too much pressure on the bulbwith the pliers to help avoid damaging it.

Reinstalling the lens1. Put the lens back into position.

2. Press it into place.

Related information• Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Bulbs – specificationsThe following bulbs can be replaced by thevehicles owner. All other bulbs should only bereplaced by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Lighting func-tion

Wat-tage

Bulb

Extra high beam(models withActive BendingLights*)

55 H7 LL

Low beam (hal-ogen)

55 H11 LL

High beam (hal-ogen)

65 H9

Front turn sig-nals

24 PY24W

License platelighting

5 C5W LL

Vanity mirror 2 W2x4.6dtype T5

Front sidemarker lights

5 W3W LL

Glove compart-ment lighting

5 SV8.5(length43mm)

Lighting func-tion

Wat-tage

Bulb

Rear fog light 21 P21W LL

Backup lights 21 P21W LL

Brake lights 21 P21W LL

Cargo arealighting

10 SV8.5(length43mm)

NOTE

Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Partsdepartment for the most up-to-date bulbspecifications.

Related information• Bulbs – introduction (p. 335)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

343

Wiper blades – service positionThe windshield wiper blades must be in thevertical (service) position for replacement,washing or to lift them away from the wind-shield when e.g., removing ice or snow.

Wiper blades in service position

CAUTION

Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen inposition before attempting to move themto the service position.

To put the windshiield wipers in the serviceposition:

1. Insert the remote key into the ignitionslot3 and press the START/STOPENGINE button briefly to put the ignitionin mode I (see Ignition modes (p. 79) fordetailed information about the ignitionmodes).

2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE buttonagain briefly to switch the ignition off.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steeringwheel lever up and hold it for at least1 second.> The wipers will then move to the verti-

cal (service) position on the windshield.

The wipers can be returned to the normalposition by pressing the START/STOPENGINE button briefly to put the ignition inmode I (or by starting the engine).

CAUTION

If the wiper arms have been folded outfrom the windshield while in the serviceposition, fold them back against the wind-shield before returning the wipers to thenormal position to help avoid scratchingthe paint on the hood.

Related information• Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 345)

3 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

344

Wiper blades – windshieldThe wiper blades should be replaced regularlyfor best effect.

The windshield wiper blades must be in thevertical (service) position for replacement,washing or to lift them away from the wind-shield when e.g., removing ice or snow.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades

NOTE

The windshield wiper blades are differentlengths. The blade on the driver’s side islonger than the one on the passenger side.

With the wipers in the service position,fold out the wiper arm from the wind-shield. Press the button on the wiperblade attachment and pull the wiperblade straight out, parallel with the wiperarm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicksinto place.

Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the wind-shield.

To return the wipers from the service positionto the normal position, fold the wipers backagainst the windshield and press the START/STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the igni-tion in mode I (or start the engine).

CleaningKeeping the windshield and wiper bladesclean helps improve visibility and prolongsthe service life of the wiper blades. Clean thewiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush andlukewarm soap solution or car washing deter-gent.

Related information• Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 345)

• Wiper blades – service position (p. 343)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

345

Wiper blades – tailgateThe wiper blades should be replaced regularlyfor best effect.

Replacing the tailgate wiper blade

G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward.

2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (atthe arrow).

3. Pull out the blade to release it from thewiper arm.

4. Press the new wiper blade into place andcheck that it seats securely.

5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail-gate window.

Related information• Engine compartment – washer fluid

(p. 345)

Engine compartment – washer fluidWasher fluid helps keep the windshield andheadlights clean. During cold weather, thereservoir should be filled with windshieldwasher solvent containing antifreeze. UseVolvo Original Washer Fluid or the equivalentwith a recommended pH value between 6 and8.

Location of the washer fluid reservoir

The windshield and headlight washers sharea common reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir is located on thedriver's side of the engine compartment. Forcapacities, see the printed Owner's Manual.

Specification:Use a washer antifreeze rec-ommended by Volvo, mixed with water.

Volume:

• 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters)

• 4.7 US qts (4.5 liters4)

Related information• Wiper blades – service position (p. 343)

4 Models without headlight washers

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

346

Battery – symbolsThere are information and warning symbolson the battery.

Symbols on the battery

Wear protective goggles.

Keep away from children.

Avoid smoking, openflames, and/or sparks.

See the owner's manual.

Contains corrosive acid.

Risk of explosion

Recycle properly

NOTE

A used battery should be disposed of in anenvironmentally responsible manner. Con-sult your Volvo retailer or take the batteryto a recycling station.

Related information• Battery – changing (p. 348)

• Battery – handling (p. 346)

• Battery – maintenance (p. 347)

Battery – handlingThe battery's service life is affected by thenumber of starts, if it has been discharged,driving style, driving conditions, weather con-ditions ,etc.

Handling• Check that the battery cables are cor-

rectly connected and tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running (for example, whenreplacing the battery).

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as the number of starts, driv-ing conditions and climate. Extreme coldmay also further decrease the battery’sstarting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not drivenfor an extended period of time or if thevehicle is usually only driven short dis-tances.

• Never use a quick charger to charge thebattery. Only traditional types of batterychargers should be used.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}347

CAUTION

The infotainment system's energy-savingfeature may not function correctly or at all,and/or a message may be displayed if abattery charger or jumper cables are notconnected properly.

• The negative terminal on the batterymust never be used to connect ajumper cable or a battery charger.Only the ground point on the chassismay be used.

See Jump starting (p. 251) for an illustra-tion and additional information.

WARNING

• Never expose the battery to openflame or electric spark.

• Do not smoke near the battery.

• Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Donot allow battery fluid to contact eyes,skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. Ifcontact occurs, flush the affected areaimmediately with water. Obtain medi-cal help immediately if eyes are affec-ted.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if itbecomes discharged repeatedly.

Related information• Battery – changing (p. 348)

• Battery – maintenance (p. 347)

• Battery – symbols (p. 346)

Battery – maintenanceProper battery maintenance can help prolongits service life.

Maintenance• Use a screw driver to open the caps or

cover and a flashlight to inspect the level.

• If necessary, add distilled water. The levelshould never be above the indicator.

• The fluid level should be checked if thebattery has been recharged.

• After inspection, be sure the cap overeach battery cell or the cover is securelyin place.

• Check that the battery cables are cor-rectly connected and properly tightened.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running, or when the key is inthe ignition. This could damage the vehi-cle's electrical system.

• The battery should be disconnected fromthe vehicle when a battery charger isused directly on the battery.

• To help keep the battery in good condi-tion, the vehicle should be driven for atleast 15 minutes a week or connected toa charger with an automatic chargingfunction.

• If the battery is fully discharged a numberof times, this may shorten its service life.Keeping the battery fully charged helpsprolong its service life.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

348

• The service life of a battery is affected byfactors such as driving conditions and cli-mate. Extreme cold may also furtherdecrease the battery’s starting capacity.

• Because the battery’s starting capacitydecreases with time, it may be necessaryto recharge it if the vehicle is not drivenfor an extended period of time or if thevehicle is usually only driven short dis-tances.

CAUTION

• Always use distilled or deionized water(battery water).

• Never fill above the level mark in thecell.

Related information• Battery – changing (p. 348)

• Battery – handling (p. 346)

• Battery – symbols (p. 346)

Battery – changingWhen changing batteries, be sure to use thecorrect battery for your vehicle. Consult aVolvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

Changing

WARNING

Connect and disconnect the positive andnegative cables in the correct sequence.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}349

RemovalSwitch off the ignition, remove the remote keyfrom the ignition slot and wait at least5 minutes before disconnecting the battery sothat all information in the vehicle's electricalsystem can be stored in the control modules.

Open the clips on the front cover andremove the cover.

Release the rubber molding so that therear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by pulling it away.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable

Detach the ventilation hose from thebattery

Loosen the screw holding the batteryclamp.

Move the battery to the side and lift it up.

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the state ofCalifornia to cause cancer and reproduc-tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Installation1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the sideuntil it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat-tery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.> Be sure that it is correctly connected

to the battery and the vent in the vehi-cle's body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal).

8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal).

9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it withthe clips. (See Removal).

Related information• Battery – handling (p. 346)

• Battery – symbols (p. 346)

Fuses – introductionThe fuses help protect the vehicle's electricalcomponents from overloading.

There are relay/fuseboxes located in theengine compartment, the passenger com-partment and the cargo area.

If an electrical component fails to function,this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiestway to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it.

To do so:

1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is diffi-cult to remove, a special fuse removaltool is located on the inside of theengine compartment fusebox cover.

2. From the side, examine the curved metalwire in the fuse to see if it is intact.

If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of thesame color and amperage (written on thefuse).

If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electri-cal system inspected by a trained and quali-fied Volvo service technician.

WARNING

Never use metal objects or fuses withhigher amperage than those stated on thefollowing pages. Doing so could seriouslydamage or overload the vehicle's electricalsystem.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

350

Location of the fuseboxes

Engine compartment

Under the glove compartment

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area

Engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}351

Fuses – engine compartmentThe fuses in the engine compartment protecte.g., engine and brake functions.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

PositionsThese fuses are all located in the engine com-partment box. Fuses in C are located underA.

A decal on the inside of the cover shows thepositions of the fuses.

• Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/circuit breakers and should only beremoved or replaced by a trained andqualified Volvo service technician.

• Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may bechanged at any time when necessary.

There is a special fuse removal tool on theunderside of the cover.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: centralelectrical moduleunder the glove com-partmentA

50

Circuit breaker: centralelectrical moduleunder the glove com-partment

50

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: centralelectrical module in thecargo compartmentA

60

Circuit breaker: centralelectrical moduleunder the glove com-partmentA

60

Circuit breaker: centralelectrical moduleunder the glove com-partmentA

60

–

–

Headed windshield*,driver's side

40

Windshield wipers 30

–

Climate systemblowerA

40

Headed windshield*,passenger's side

40

ABS pump 40

Pos Function A

ABS valves 20

Headlight washers 20

Active Bending Lights-headlight leveling*

10

Central electrical mod-ule (under the glovecompartment)

20

ABS 5

Adjustable steeringforce*

5

Engine Control Module(ECM), transmission,SRS

10

Heated washer noz-zles*

10

-

Lighting panel 5

-

-

-

Relay coils 5

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353

Pos Function A

Auxiliary lights* 20

Horn 15

Relay coils, EngineControl Module (ECM)

10

Control module - auto-matic transmission

15

A/C compressor (not4-cyl. engines)

15

Relay-coils A/C, relaycoils in engine com-partment cold zone forStart/Stop

5

Starter motor relayA 30

Engine control module(4-cyl. engines)

Ignition coils (5-/6-cyl.engines), condenser(6-cyl. engines)

20

Engine Control Module(4-cyl. engines)

20

Engine Control Module(5-cyl. & 6-cyl. engines)

10

Pos Function A

4-cyl. engines: massair meter, thermostat,EVAP valve

10

5-/6-cyl. engines:Injection system, massair meter (6-cyl.engines only), enginecontrol module

15

A/C compressor (5-/6-cyl. engines), enginevalves, engine controlmodule (6-cyl.engines), solenoids (6-cyl. non-turbo only),mass air meter (6-cyl.only), oil level sensor(5-cyl. only)

10

Engine valves/oilpump/center heatedoxygen sensor (4-cyl.engines)

15

Front/rear heated oxy-gen sensors (4-cyl.engines), EVAP valve(5-/6-cyl. engines),heated oxygen sensors(5-/6-cyl. engines)

15

Pos Function A

Oil pump/crankcaseventilation heater/cool-ant pump (5-cyl.engines)

10

Ignition coils (4-cyl.engines)

15

Fuel leakage detection(5-/6-cyl. engines),control module forradiator shutter (5-cyl.engines)

5

Fuel leakage detection,A/C solenoid (4-cyl.engines)

7.5

Coolant pump (4-cyl.engines)

50

Cooling fan 60 (4/5-cyl.engines)

80 (6-cyl.engines)

Power steering 100

A This position is not used on vehicles with the optionalStart/Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compart-ment cold zone" in Fuses – engine compartment cold zone(Start/Stop only) (p. 359).

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

354

Related information• Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355)

• Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 358)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}355

Fuses – glove compartmentThe fuses under the glove compartment pro-tect components such as the infotainmentsystem and optional power seat.

Fusebox A: General fuses

Fusebox B: Control module fuses

Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse-boxes.

1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up.

2. The fuses are accessible.

Positions: fusebox A

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker for the infotain-ment system and for fuses16-20

40

Windshield/tailgate washers 25

-

-

-

Pos Function A

-

12-volt socket (cargo area) 15

Controls in driver's door 20

Controls in front passenger'sdoor

20

Controls in right rear passeng-er's door

20

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Pos Function A

Controls in left rear passeng-er's door

20

Keyless drive* 20

Power driver's seat* 20

Power front passenger's seat* 20

-

Infotainment system display 5

Infotainment system: amplifier,SiriusXM™ satellite radio*

10

Sensus control module 15

Bluetooth hands-free system 5

-

Laminated panoramic roof*

Courtesy lighting, climate sys-tem sensor

5

12-volt sockets in tunnel con-sole

15

Heated rear seat* (passenger'sside)

15

Heated rear seat* (driver'sside)

15

Pos Function A

-

Heated front passenger'sseat*

15

Heated driver's seat* 15

Park assist*

Blind Spot Information System(BLIS)*, park assist camera*

5

All Wheel Drive* control mod-ule

15

Active chassis system* 10

Positions: fusebox B

Pos Function A

Tailgate wiper 15

-

Front courtesy lighting, driv-er's door power window con-trols, power seat(s)*,

7.5

Instrument panel 5

Adaptive cruise control/colli-sion warning*

10

Pos Function A

Courtesy lighting, rain sen-sor*, HomeLInk® WirelessControl System*

7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Cental locking: fuel filler door 10

Electrically heated steeringwheel*

15

Electrically heated windshield* 15

Tailgate unlock 10

Electrical folding rear seatoutboard head restraints*

10

Fuel pump 20

Climate system control panel 5

-

Alarm, On-board diagnosticsystem

5

Satellite radio *, audio systemamplifier

10

Airbag system, occupantweight sensor

10

Collision warning system* 5

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal sensor,auto-dim mirror function,heated rear seats*

7.5

-

Brake lights 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 20

Immobilizer 5

Related information• Fuses – engine compartment (p. 351)

• Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 358)

• Fuses – engine compartment cold zone(Start/Stop only) (p. 359)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Fuses – cargo area/trunkThe fuses in the cargo area/trunk protectcomponents such as trailer connections, theparking brake, etc.

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions

Pos Function A

Electric parking brake (leftside)

30

Electric parking brake (rightside)

30

Heated rear window 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

Pos Function A

Power tailgate* 20

-

-

-

-

-

Pos Function A

Trailer socket 1* 40

-

Related information• Fuses – engine compartment (p. 351)

• Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355)

• Fuses – engine compartment cold zone(Start/Stop only) (p. 359)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}359

Fuses – engine compartment coldzone (Start/Stop only)7

There are fuses in the engine compartmentcold zone on models with the Start/Stopfunction.

Location of Start/Stop fuses

Positions• Fuses A1, A2 and 1–11 are relays/circuit

breakers and should only be removed orreplaced by a trained and qualified Volvoservice technician.

• Fuse 12 may be changed at any timewhen necessary.

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: central elec-trical module in the enginecompartment

175

Circuit breaker: fuseboxesunder the glove compart-ment, central electrical mod-ule in the cargo area

175

Pos Function A

-

Circuit breaker: fusebox Bunder the glove compartment(see Fuses – glove compart-ment (p. 355))

50

7 Option on 4-cyl. engines

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

360

Pos Function A

Circuit breaker: fusebox Aunder the glove compartment(see Fuses – glove compart-ment (p. 355))

60

Circuit breaker: fusebox Aunder the glove compartment(see Fuses – glove compart-ment (p. 355))

60

Circuit breaker: central elec-trical module in the cargoarea

60

Climate system blower 40

– –

– –

Starter motor relay 30

Internal diode 50

Auxiliary battery 70

Central electrical module:auxiliary battery referencevoltage, auxiliary batterycharging point

15

Related information• Fuses – engine compartment (p. 351)

• Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355)

• Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 358)

• Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

361

Washing the carThe vehicle should be washed at regular inter-vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spotsadhere to the paint and may cause damage.To help prevent corrosion, it is particularlyimportant to wash the car frequently in thewintertime.

The following points should be kept in mindwhen washing and cleaning the car:

• Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight.Doing so may cause detergents and waxto dry out and become abrasive. To avoidscratching, use lukewarm water to softenthe dirt before you wash with a softsponge, and plenty of sudsy water.

• Bird droppings: Remove from paintworkas soon as possible. Otherwise the finishmay be permanently damaged.

• A detergent can be used to facilitate thesoftening of dirt and oil.

• Dry the car with a clean chamois andremember to clean the drain holes in thedoors and rocker panels.

• Tar spots can be removed with tarremover after the car has been washed.

• A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapywater can be used to clean the wiperblades. Frequent cleaning of the wind-shield and wiper blades improves visibilityconsiderably and also helps prolong theservice life of the wiper blades.

• Wash off the dirt from the underside(wheel housings, fenders, etc).

• In areas of high industrial fallout, morefrequent washing is recommended.

NOTE

When washing the car, remember toremove dirt from the drain holes in thedoors and sills.

CAUTION

• During high pressure washing, thespray mouthpiece must never becloser to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm).Do not spray into the locks.

• Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights canreduce lighting capacity considerably.Clean the headlights regularly, forexample when refueling.

Special laminated panoramic roof cau-tions:

• Always close the laminated panoramicroof and sun shade before washingyour vehicle.

• Never use abrasive cleaning agents onthe laminated panoramic roof.

• Never use wax on the rubber sealsaround the laminated panoramic roof.

Exterior componentsVolvo recommends the use of special clean-ing products, available at your Volvo retailer,for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna-mental components such as chromed stripson the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc-tions for using these products should be fol-lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removersshould not be used.

CAUTION

• Avoid waxing or polishing plastic orrubber components

• Polishing chromed strips can wearaway or damage the surface

• Polishes containing abrasive sub-stances should not be used

Related information• Polishing and waxing (p. 362)

• Cleaning the interior (p. 363)

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

362

Automatic car washThe vehicle should be washed at regular inter-vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spotsadhere to the paint and may cause damage.To help prevent corrosion, it is particularlyimportant to wash the car frequently in thewintertime.

• We do NOT recommend washing yourcar in an automatic wash during the firstfew months (because the paint will nothave hardened sufficiently).

• An automatic wash is a simple and quickway to clean your car, but it is worthremembering that it may not be as thor-ough as when you yourself go over thecar with sponge and water. Keeping theunderbody clean is most important, espe-cially in the winter. Some automaticwashers do not have facilities for washingthe underbody.

NOTE

Condensation may form temporarily on theinside of the lenses of exterior lights suchas headlights, fog lights, or taillights. Thisis normal and the lights are designed towithstand moisture. Normally, condensa-tion will dissipate after the lights have beenon for a short time.

CAUTION

• Before driving into an automatic carwash, turn off the optional rain sensorto avoid damaging the windshield wip-ers.

• Make sure that side view mirrors, aux-iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and thatany antenna(s) are retracted orremoved. Otherwise there is risk of themachine dislodging them.

• Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated wheels using the same deter-gents used for the body of the vehicle.Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents canpermanently stain chrome-platedwheels.

WARNING

• When the vehicle is driven immediatelyafter being washed, apply the brakes,including the parking brake, severaltimes in order to remove any moisturefrom the brake linings.

• Engine cleaning agents should not beused when the engine is warm. Thisconstitutes a fire risk.

Related information• Polishing and waxing (p. 362)

• Cleaning the interior (p. 363)

• Washing the car (p. 361)

Polishing and waxingNormally, polishing is not required during thefirst year after delivery, however, waxing maybe beneficial.

• Before applying polish or wax the vehiclemust be washed and dried. Tar spots canbe removed with kerosene or tar remover.Difficult spots may require a fine rubbingcompound.

• After polishing use liquid or paste wax.

• Several commercially available productscontain both polish and wax.

• Waxing alone does not substitute for pol-ishing a dull surface.

• A wide range of polymer-based waxescan be purchased today. These waxesare easy to use and produce a long-last-ing, high-gloss finish that protects thebodywork against oxidation, road dirt andfading.

• Do not polish or wax your vehicle in directsunlight (the surface of the vehicle shouldnot be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C).

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}363

CAUTION

Volvo does not recommend the use oflong-life or durable paint protection coat-ings, some of which may claim to preventpitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat-ings have not been tested by Volvo forcompatibility with your vehicle's clear coat.Some of them may cause the clear coat tosoften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused byapplication of paint protection coatingsmay not be covered under your vehicle'spaint warranty.

Related information• Washing the car (p. 361)

Cleaning the interiorOnly use cleaning agents and car care prod-ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularlyand follow the instructions included with thecar care product.

Cleaning the interior

Upholstery care

FabricClean with soapy water or a detergent. Formore difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream,shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvoretailer.

AlcanteraTM suede-like materialSuede-like upholstery can be cleaned with asoft cloth and mild soap solution.

Leather careVolvo's leather upholstery is manufacturedwith a protectant to repel soiling. Over time,sunlight, grease and dirt can break down theprotection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, andfading can result.

Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasyleather care kit formulated to clean and beau-tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew theprotective qualities of its finish. The cleanerremoves dirt and oil buildup. The light creamprotectant restores a barrier against soil andsunlight.

Volvo also offers a special leather softenerthat should be applied after the cleaner andprotectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth,and reduces friction between leather andother finishes in the vehicle.

Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting andconditioning your vehicle's leather two to fourtimes a year. Ask your Volvo retailer aboutLeather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft-ener 943 7429.

Cleaning leather upholstery1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge

and squeeze it until the cleaner foams.

2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving thesponge with circular movements.

3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with thesponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain,do not rub.

4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or atowel, and allow the leather to dry com-pletely.

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

364

Protecting leather upholstery1. Put a small amount of protectant cream

on a cloth and apply a thin coating ofcream to the upholstery with light circularmovements.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes.

This will help the leather resist staining andprotect against sunlight's harmful UV rays.

CAUTION

• Under no circumstances should gaso-line, naphtha or similar cleaning agentsbe used on the plastic or the leathersince these can cause damage.

• Take extra care when removing stainssuch as ink or lipstick since the color-ing can spread.

• Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol-vent can damage the seat padding.

• Start from the outside of the stain andwork toward the center.

• Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in apocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothingmay damage the textile upholstery.

• Clothing that is not colorfast, such asnew jeans or suede garments, maystain the upholstery.

Cleaning a leather-covered steeringwheel• Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp

sponge and a neutral soap solution.

• Leather should be allowed to breath.Never cover the steering wheel with aplastic protector.

• Volvo recommends cleaning, protectingand conditioning the steering wheel withVolvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 andLeather Softener 943 7429.

If there are stains on the steering wheel:

Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat orblood)

– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe thewheel with a solution with 5% ammonia.For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl)of water and one ounce (25g) of salt andwipe the stain.

Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate)

1. Same procedure as for type I stains.

2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb-ent paper or a towel.

Type 3 (dry soil or dust)

1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush.

2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

CAUTION

Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam-age the leather on the steering wheel.

Cleaning the seat beltsClean only with lukewarm water and a mildsoap solution.

Cleaning floor matsThe floor mats should be vacuumed orbrushed clean regularly, especially duringwinter when they should be taken out for dry-ing. Spots on textile mats can be removedwith a mild detergent. For best protection inwinter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvorubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer.

Spots on interior plastic, metal, or woodsurfacesCleaning interior plastic components shouldbe done with a cleaning agent speciallydesigned for this purpose. Consult your Volvoretailer.

10 Maintenance and servicing

10

}}365

CAUTION

• Do not use cleaning agents with highalcohol content such as washer fluidto clean instrument panel glass.

• Never spray cleaning agents or waterdirectly onto components with electri-cal buttons or controls. Clean compo-nents of this type by applying thecleaning agent/water sparingly to acloth and wiping the components sothat no liquid penetrates into thesecomponents.

Related information• Washing the car (p. 361)

Touching up paintworkPaint damage requires immediate attention toavoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin-ish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle.Touch-up if necessary.

Paint repairs require special equipment andskill. Contact your Volvo retailer for anyextensive damage.

Minor scratches can be repaired by usingVolvo touch-up paint.

Color code

Sample color code: US models

Sample color code: Canadian models

Make sure you have the right color. See Labelinformation (p. 368) for the location of thislabel (label number 4 in the illustration).

Minor stone chips and scratchesMaterial:

• Primer – can

• Paint – touch-up pen

• Brush

• Masking tape

If the stone chip has not gone down to thebare metal and an undamaged color coatremains, you can add paint immediately afterremoving dirt.

NOTE

When touching up the vehicle, it should beclean and dry. The surface temperatureshould be above 60 °F (15 °C).

||10 Maintenance and servicing

10

366

Repairing stone chips

G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over thedamaged surface. Pull the tape off so thatany loose flakes of paint adhere to it.

2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply itwith a small brush.

3. When the primer surface is dry, the paintcan be applied using a brush. Mix thepaint thoroughly; apply several thin paintcoats and let dry after each application.

4. If there is a longer scratch, you may wantto protect surrounding paint by masking itoff

5. After a few days, polish the touched-upareas. Use a soft rag and a small amountof polish.

Related information• Label information (p. 368)

SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

11

368

Label informationThe labels in your vehicle provide informationsuch as the chassis number, paint code, tireinflation pressure, etc.

11 Specifications

11

}}369

Location of labels

||11 Specifications

11

370

List of labelsVehicle Emission Control Information.Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli-cable emission standards, as evidencedby the certification label on the undersideof the hood. For further information regar-ding these regulations, please consultyour Volvo retailer.

Engine oil. This label contains the recom-mended engine oil specifications.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).The VIN plate is located on the top leftsurface of the dashboard. The VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) should alwaysbe quoted in all correspondence concern-ing your vehicle with the retailer and whenordering parts.

Tire inflation pressures. This label indi-cates the correct inflation pressures forthe tires that were on the vehicle when itleft the factory.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) andMinistry of Transport (CMVSS) stand-ards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed tomeet all applicable safety standards, asevidenced by the certification label on thedriver's side B-pillar (the structural mem-ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rearof the driver's door opening). This labelalso includes codes for paint color, etc.For further information regarding theseregulations, please consult your Volvoretailer. U.S. models have the upperdecal; Canadian models have the lowerone.

Related information• Weights (p. 374)

• Engine specifications (p. 376)

11 Specifications

11

}}371

DimensionsThis section lists your vehicle's most impor-tant dimensions.

||11 Specifications

11

372

Dimensions

Dimension in. (mm)

A Ground clearance (curb weight + 2 people)A 8.7 (220)

B Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

C Length 182.8 (4644)

D Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789)

E Load length, floor 38.3 (972)

F Height 67.4 (1713)

G Load height 31.6 (802)

H Track, front 64.3 (1632)

I Track, rear 62.4 (1586)

11 Specifications

11

373

Dimension in. (mm)

J Load width, floor 42.9 (1090)

K Width 74.4 (1891)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.5 (2120)

M Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.4 (1891)

A Varies slightly depending on tire size, optional sport chassis, etc.

11 Specifications

11

374

WeightsThe following table lists important weight datafor your vehicle.

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 4-cyl. FWDA: 5140 lbs

5-cyl. AWDB: 5270 lbs

6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs

4-cyl. FWD: 2330 kg

5-cyl. AWD: 2390 kg

6-cyl. AWD: 2440 kg

Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models)

Permissible axle weights, front 4-cyl. FWD: 2720 lbs

5-cyl. AWD: 2755 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2840 lbs

4-cyl. FWD: 1230 kg

5-cyl. AWD: 1250 kg

6-cyl. AWD: 1290 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 4-cyl. FWD: 2560 lbs

5-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs

6-cyl. AWD: 2645 lbs

4-cyl. FWD: 1160 kg

5-cyl. AWD: 1200 kg

6-cyl. AWD: 1200 kg

Curb weight 3840 - 4170 lbs 1740 - 1900 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs

With brakes, 2” ball: 3,500 lbs

Without brakes: 750 kg

With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg

With brakes, 2” ball: 1600 kg

Max. tongue weight 350 lbs 160 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel DriveB AWD = All Wheel Drive

11 Specifications

11

375

Related information• Loading specifications (p. 302)

• Loading specifications – load limit (p. 302)

11 Specifications

11

376

Engine specificationsThe following table provides technical data forthe respective engines. Engine specificationsfor Special Edition vehicles may vary.

Some of the engines listed here may notbe available in all markets.

Engine specifications

Specification/Model 3.0 T6 5-cyl. 2.0 4-cyl. T9 2.0 4-cyl. T11

Engine designation B6304T4 B5254T12 B4204T9 B4204T11

Output (kW/rps) 224/93 187/90 225/95 179/93

Output (hp/rpm) 300/5600 250/5400 rpm 302/5700 240/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 440/35–70 360/30-70 400/35–75 350/25-75

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 325/2100– 4200 266/1800-4200 295/1500–4500 258/1500–4500

No. of cylinders 6 5 4 4

Bore (in/mm) 3.23/82 3.27/83 3.23/82 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.67/93.2 3.63/92.3 3.67/93.2 3.67/93.2

Displacement 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 9.3:1 9.5:1 10.3:1 10.8:1

Related information• Coolant – specification and volume

(p. 379)

• Oil specifications (p. 377)

• Oil volume (p. 378)

11 Specifications

11

377

Oil specificationsFull synthetic engine oil meeting the minimumACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oilsmay not offer the same fuel economy, engineperformance, or engine protection.

Volvo recommends:

Refer to the warranty and Service Recordsinformation booklet for information on oilchange intervals and oil type requirements.

NOTE

This vehicle comes from the factory withsynthetic oil.

Oil additives must not be used.

Oil viscosityIncorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine lifeunder normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

good fuel economy and engine protection.See the viscosity chart.

Viscosity chart

Extreme engine operationSAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 require-ments is recommended for extreme drivingconditions.

CAUTION

4-cylinder engines only: Volvo oil VCCRBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recommended forextreme driving conditions.

This oil must never be used in 5- or 6-cyl-inder engines.

Related information• Oil volume (p. 378)

• Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 330)

11 Specifications

11

378

Oil volumeThe following table provides technical data forthe respective engines. Some of these

engines may not be available in all markets.Engine specifications for Special Edition vehi-cles may vary.

Engine model Approx. volume (incl. filter)

3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0 T6 (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

T12 (5 cyl.) B5254T12 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters)

All 4-cyl. engines 5.7 US qts (5.4 liters)

Related information• Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 330)

• Oil specifications (p. 377)

11 Specifications

11

379

Coolant – specification and volumeThe table lists coolant volumes and specifica-tions.

System Volume Specifica-tion

3.2 (6-cyl.)/3.0T

3.0 T6/T5

9.4 US qts.(8.9 liters)

Coolant withcorrosioninhibitormixed withwater (50/50mix), seepackaging.

All 4-cyl.engines

8.8 US qts.(8.3 liters)

Related information• Engine compartment – coolant (p. 332)

Transmission oil – specification andvolumesThe table lists transmission oil1 volumes andspecifications.

Auto-matictrans-mission

Volume Specifi-cation

TF-80SC 7.4 US qts(7 liters)

Transmis-sion fluidAW1

TG-81SC 7 US qts ( 6.6liters)

TF-71SC 7.1 US qts(6.8 liters)

Related information• Label information (p. 368)

Brake fluid – specification and volumeBrake fluid transfers braking force when thebrake pedal is depressed to the master cylin-der and to the slave cylinders on each wheel.

Specification: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F(>280 °C)

Volume: 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters)

Related information• Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 333)

1 Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

11 Specifications

11

380

Power steering – specificationThis fluid is used to help reduce and regulatesteering force.

Specification:Power steering fluid recom-mended by Volvo.

Related information• Engine compartment – power steering

fluid (p. 334)

Fuel tank volume – specification andvolumeThe table lists the fuel tank volume for yourvehicle.

Volume Specification

18.5 US gallons (70 lit-ers)

–

Related information• Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door

(p. 278)

• Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap(p. 279)

• Refueling – octane rating (p. 277)

• Engine specifications (p. 376)

Air conditioning – specification andvolumeThe air conditioning system in your vehiclecontains the following:

Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)

Volume: 1.7 lbs (770 g)

Compressor oil: PAG

11 Specifications

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 381

Battery specificationsIf the battery is replaced, replace it with a bat-tery of the same cold start capacity as theoriginal (see the decal on the battery).

General information

WARNING

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING!

Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the state ofCalifornia to cause cancer and reproduc-tive harm. Wash hands after handling.

12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter-nator. Single pole system in which the chas-sis and engine block are used as conductors.The negative terminal is connected to thechassis.

Motor Voltage (V) Cold start capacity

CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes) (A)

Engines with Start/Stop* 12 800A

All other engines 12 520–800

A AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries have to be used on models with Start/Stop

11 Specifications

11

382

Symbols – general informationThe following tables list the most commonwarning and indicator lights and symbols anda reference to where more detailed informa-tion can be found.

IntroductionThe symbols in the vehicle's various displaysare divided into three main categories:

• Warning symbols

• Indicator symbols

• Information symbols

The following tables list the most commonsymbols, their meaning and the pages in thismanual that provide more detailed informa-tion.

NOTE

Not all of the symbols shown in the relatedarticles are available in all models or on allmarkets. Local variations may occur.

Warning symbol: The red warning symbol illuminates to

indicate a problem related to safety and/ordrivability. A message will also appear in themain instruments panel's display.

Information symbol: The information symbol illuminates and

a text message is displayed to provide the

driver with necessary information about oneof the vehicle's systems.

Related information• Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

Warning symbolsThe following tables list the most commonwarning and indicator lights and symbols anda reference to where more detailed informa-tion can be found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates toindicate a problem related to safety and/ordrivability. A message will also appear in themain instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates anda text message is displayed to provide thedriver with necessary information about oneof the vehicle's systems.

11 Specifications

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 383

Symbols in the main instrument panel

Warning symbols in the instrumentpanel

Symbol Description See

Low oil pressure (p. 74)

Parking brakeA (p. 74)

SRS airbags (p. 74)

Seat belt reminder (p. 74)

Generator not charg-ing

(p. 74)

Fault in the brake sys-tem

(p. 74)

Warning symbol (p. 74)

A The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digitalinstrument panel.

Related information• Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

Indicator symbolsThe following tables list the most commonwarning and indicator lights and symbols anda reference to where more detailed informa-tion can be found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates toindicate a problem related to safety and/ordrivability. A message will also appear in themain instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates anda text message is displayed to provide thedriver with necessary information about oneof the vehicle's systems.

Indicator symbols in the instrumentpanel

Symbol Description See

Fault in the ActiveBending Light(ABL)*system

(p. 72)

Malfunction indicatorlight

(p. 72)

Anti-lock brake sys-tem (ABS)

(p. 72)

Rear fog lights on (p. 72)

Symbol Description See

Stability system, HillDescent Control,Trailer StabilityAssist*

(p. 72)

Tire pressure moni-toring sensor (TPMS)

(p. 72)

Low fuel level (p. 72)

Information symbol,see text in informa-tion display

(p. 72)

High beam indicator (p. 72)

Left turn signal indi-cator

(p. 72)

Right turn signal indi-cator

(p. 72)

Stability system ,Sport mode

(p. 175)

Related information• Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

11 Specifications

11

384 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Information symbolsThe following tables list the most commonwarning and indicator lights and symbols anda reference to where more detailed informa-tion can be found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates toindicate a problem related to safety and/ordrivability. A message will also appear in themain instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates anda text message is displayed to provide thedriver with necessary information about oneof the vehicle's systems.

Information symbols in the instrumentpanel

Symbol Description See

Adaptive CruiseControl *

(p. 184)

Adaptive CruiseControl *

(p. 184)

Adaptive CruiseControl *

(p. 184)

Adaptive CruiseControl * (Distancealert)

(p. 184)

Radar sensor* (p. 193)

Symbol Description See

Camera sensor,laser sensor

(p. 215)(p. 208)

Collision Warningwith Full Auto-brake and Pedes-trian Detection*

(p. 220)

Active BendingLights (ABL)*

(p. 92)

Driver Alert Sys-tem*

(p. 222)

Driver Alert Sys-tem*

(p. 222)

Parking brake (p. 269)

Rain sensor* (p. 98)

Active High Beams(AHB)*

(p. 90)

Windshield sensor* (p. 90)

Symbol Description See

Driver Alert Sys-tem* (LaneDeparture Warning)

(p. 227)

Driver Alert Sys-tem* (LaneDeparture Warning)

(p. 227)

Driver Alert Sys-tem* (LaneDeparture Warning)

(p. 227)

Fuel tank on pas-senger's side of thevehicle

(p. 278)

Related information• Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

11 Specifications

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385

Information symbols – ceiling consoleThe following tables list the most commonwarning and indicator lights and symbols anda reference to where more detailed informa-tion can be found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates toindicate a problem related to safety and/ordrivability. A message will also appear in themain instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates anda text message is displayed to provide thedriver with necessary information about oneof the vehicle's systems.

Symbol Description See

Seat belt reminder (p. 30)

Occupant Weight Sen-sor

(p. 36)

Related information• Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

Information symbols – center consoleThe following tables list the most commonwarning and indicator lights and symbols anda reference to where more detailed informa-tion can be found.

: The red warning symbol illuminates toindicate a problem related to safety and/ordrivability. A message will also appear in themain instruments panel's display.

: The information symbol illuminates anda text message is displayed to provide thedriver with necessary information about oneof the vehicle's systems.

Symbol Description See

Audio files Sensus Info-tainment sup-plement

CD folder Sensus Info-tainment sup-plement

Video files Sensus Info-tainment sup-plement

Bluetooth-connected cellphone

Sensus Info-tainment sup-plement

Symbol Description See

BluetoothTM

hands-freeSensus Info-tainment sup-plement

HD radio Sensus Info-tainment sup-plement

Park Assist* (p. 232)

Related information• Information displays – indicator symbols

(p. 72)

• Information displays – warning symbols(p. 74)

• Information display – messages (p. 114)

12 Index

12

386

A

ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 268

Accessory installation warning.................. 23

Active chassis system............................. 174

Active high beams..................................... 90

Active yaw control........................... 174, 175

Adaptive brake lights............................... 268

Adaptive cruise control.................... 184, 185

Airbagsdisconnecting the front passenger’sside....................................................... 36front...................................................... 32inflatable curtain................................... 41side impact........................................... 39

Air conditioning................................ 131, 132

Air distribution.................................. 127, 133

Air distribution table................................. 135

Air vents................................................... 127

Alarm........................................ 169, 170, 171

All Wheel Drive......................................... 264

Ambient temperature sensor..................... 77

Anti-freeze....................................... 275, 332

Anti-lock brake systemwarning light......................................... 73

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 268

Approach lighting.............................. 97, 153

Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 104

Automatic locking retractor....................... 47

Automatic transmissionEco (driving function).......................... 262Geartronic........................................... 254general description..................... 252, 254oil........................................................ 379shiftlock override................................ 256

Axle weight.............................................. 302

B

Batterymaintenance............................... 347, 348remote key, replacing......................... 158replacing............................................. 348specifications...................................... 381start/stop............................................ 381warning symbols................................. 346

Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 240Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)..................... 243

Booster cushion, integrated.......... 57, 59, 60

Booster cushions....................................... 54

Brake lights.............................................. 268

Brake systemABS..................................................... 268Brake pad inspection.......................... 266checking fluid level............................. 333emergency brake assistance.............. 269fluid..................................................... 379general information............................. 266Hill Descent Control.................... 264, 265

Bulbscargo area lighting.............................. 341headlights........... 335, 336, 337, 338, 339introduction......................................... 335license plate lights.............................. 341specifications...................................... 342taillight................................................ 340

C

Camera, Park Assist................................ 236

Capacity weight....................................... 302

Cargo areachanging bulbs................................... 341steel grid............................................. 147

Cargo area cover..................................... 147

Cargo area net......................................... 144

Cargo net................................................. 144

Catalytic converter................................... 280

12 Index

12

387

Central locking system, introduction 150,151, 154, 157

Chains...................................................... 305

Check Engine warning light....................... 73

Child restraintsrecalls and registration......................... 47

Child restraint systems.............................. 47booster cushions.................................. 54convertible seats.................................. 51infant seats........................................... 49ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ 55top tether anchors................................ 56

Child safety................................................ 46booster cushions.................................. 54child restraint systems.......................... 47convertible seats.................................. 51infant seats........................................... 49

Child safety locks...................................... 61

City safety........................................ 202, 203

Climate system........................................ 132air distribution..................... 127, 133, 135air vents.............................................. 127Interior Air Quality System.................. 126introduction......................................... 125passenger compartment filter............ 126refrigerant........................................... 125

Clock, setting............................................. 78

Cold weather driving................................ 275

Collision warning system.. 209, 211, 214,215, 217, 218

Compass in rearview mirror..................... 105

Connected service booking..................... 326

Conserving electrical current................... 274

Convertible seats....................................... 51

Coolant............................................ 332, 379

Cooling system, general information....... 274

Corner traction control............................. 175

Courtesy lighting........................................ 96

Crash event data....................................... 18

Crash mode......................................... 44, 45

Cruise control.................................. 181, 183adaptive.............................................. 184

Curb weight............................................. 302

Current, conserving................................. 274

Cyclist detection.............................. 213, 217

D

Daytime running lights............................... 89

Defroster.................................................. 132

Detachable key blade...................... 155, 156

Dimensions.............................................. 372

Disconnecting the front passenger’s air-bag............................................................. 36

Distance Alert.......................................... 198

Dome lighting............................................. 96

Door mirrors..................................... 102, 103

Driver alert....................... 222, 223, 224, 225Lane Departure Warning..... 227, 229, 230

Driver distraction warning.......................... 23

Driving economically................................ 280

Driving in cold weather............................ 275

Driving through water.............................. 273

E

ECC................................................. 130, 131

Eco (driving function)............................... 262

Eco coast................................................. 262

Eco guide................................................... 71

Economical driving.................................. 280

Electrically heated steering wheel............. 88

Electrical sockets..................................... 140

Electric parking brake...... 269, 270, 271, 272

Electronic Climate Control............... 129, 131air distribution table............................ 135Interior Air Quality System.................. 126

12 Index

12

388

Electronic oil level sensor........................ 331

Electronic stability control....................... 174

Emergency locking retractor...................... 47

Emergency starting.................................. 251

Emergency towing........................... 285, 286

Emission inspection readiness................ 326

Engineoverheating........................................... 75specifications...................................... 376Start/Stop........... 257, 258, 259, 260, 261starting................................................ 247switching off............................... 249, 250

Engine compartment overview................ 329

Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 175

Engine oil................................................. 377checking............................................. 330low pressure warning light.................... 74volumes.............................................. 378

Engine remote start (ERS)........................ 249

Environment............................................... 22

F

Federal Clean Air Act............................... 323

Flat tiresrepairing with tire sealing system....... 314

Floor matscleaning.............................................. 364placing correctly................................. 247

Fluid specifications.......................... 379, 380

Fog lights................................................... 73rear................................................ 94, 340

Four C (active chassis system)................ 174

Front airbags.............................................. 32disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 36

Front park assist.............................. 232, 236

Front seats................................................. 80heated................................................. 130

Fuel filler cap........................................... 279

Fuel filler door, opening................... 278, 279

Fuel level warning light.............................. 73

Fuel requirements............................ 276, 277

Fuel tank volume..................................... 380

Fuses....................................... 349, 351, 358

G

Garage door openerHomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem........................................ 109, 110

Gasoline requirements............................. 277

Gas tank volume...................................... 380

Gauges...................................................... 68

Geartronic................................................ 254

Geartronic automatic transmission.......... 254

Generator warning light............................. 75

Glossary of tire terminology..................... 303

Grocery bag holder.................................. 144

Gross vehicle weight............................... 302

H

Hazard warning flashers............................ 94

HeadlightsActive Bending Lights........................... 92active high beams................................. 90changing bulbs........... 336, 337, 338, 339daytime running lights.......................... 89high/low beams.................................... 90high beam flash.................................... 90tunnel detection.................................... 92

Headlight washers..................................... 99

Head restraints, rear seat.................... 84, 85

Heated front seats................................... 130

Heated oxygen sensors........................... 280

Heated rear seats.................................... 130

Heated steering wheel............................... 88

Heated windshield........................... 104, 132

12 Index

12

389

High beams................................................ 90active.................................................... 90

Hill Descent Control......................... 264, 265

Hill Start Assist (HSA).............................. 252

Hoisting the vehicle................................. 325

HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem............................................. 109, 110

Home safe lighting..................................... 97

Hood, opening/closing............................ 328

Horn........................................................... 88

I

ID, Volvo.................................................... 21

Ignition modes..................................... 78, 79

Immobilizer.............................................. 152

Important information.......................... 13, 14

Indicator lights............................... 68, 70, 74

Infant seats................................................ 49

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 41

Inflation pressure............................. 297, 298

Inflation pressure table............................ 301

Information and warning symbols, tableof.............................................................. 382

Information lights........................... 68, 70, 74

Inspection readiness................................ 326

Instrument lighting..................................... 93"theater" lighting................................... 93

Instrument overview............................ 64, 68

Instrument panel........................ 68, 113, 114

Integrated two-stage boostercushion.......................................... 57, 59, 60

Interior Air Quality System....................... 126

Interior lighting........................................... 96

Internet connectionbooking service.................................. 326

ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 55

J

Jackattaching............................................. 293location of........................................... 292

Jump starting........................................... 251

K

Key blade. 150, 151, 154, 155, 156, 157, 160private locking.................................... 156

Keyless drive............................................ 159general description............. 160, 161, 162starting the vehicle............................. 247

Keyless locking/unlocking....................... 159

L

Labelslist of................................................... 370location of........................................... 369

Laminated panoramic roof.............. 106, 107

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 227, 229,230

LATCH anchors......................................... 55

Leather care............................................. 363

Lighting panel............................................ 89

Loading the vehicle.................. 142, 143, 302roof loads............................................ 142

Locking.................................... 163, 164, 165tailgate................................................ 166

Locking the vehicle.................................. 153

Locks, child safety..................................... 61

12 Index

12

390

Low beams................................................ 90

Low oil pressure warning light................... 74

M

Main instrument panel..................... 113, 114

Maintenance............................................ 323hoisting the vehicle............................. 325performed by the owner..................... 324

Malfunction indicator light......................... 73

Messages in the instrument panel... 113, 114

Mirrorsdefroster............................................. 104power door................................. 102, 103rearview, auto-dim function................ 104retractable................................... 102, 103vanity.................................................. 141

Motor oilchecking............................................. 330volumes.............................................. 378

N

Net in cargo area..................................... 144

O

Occupant safety........................................ 26

Occupant weight sensor............................ 36

Octane recommendations....................... 277

Odometer, trip........................................... 78

Oilchecking............................................. 330volumes.............................................. 378

Oil level sensor........................................ 331

Oil quality................................................. 377

OK button........................................ 113, 114

On Call Roadside Assistance.................... 24

Outside temperature sensor...................... 77

Overhead courtesy lighting........................ 96

Overheating, engine................................... 75

Ownership, changing................................. 18

Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 280

P

Paint, touching up.................................... 365

Park assist....................................... 232, 236

Park Assist Camera................................. 236

Parking brakeelectric, applying/releasing. 269, 270,271, 272warning light......................................... 74

Parking lights............................................. 93

Pedestrian detection........................ 214, 217

Polishing.................................................. 362

Power front seatmemory function................................... 81

Power meter.............................................. 71

Power mirrors.................................. 102, 103defroster............................................. 104

Power steeringadjustable........................................... 179fluid..................................................... 334

Power steering fluid................................. 380

Power tailgate.......................... 167, 168, 169

Power windows....................................... 100laminated glass................................... 101

Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 30

Private locking......................................... 156

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 251, 349, 381

12 Index

12

391

R

Rain sensor................................................ 98

Rear fog lights.................................... 94, 340

Rear park assist............................... 232, 236

Rear seat head restraints........................... 85

Rear seatscenter head restraint............................. 84folding............................................. 84, 86heated................................................. 130

Rearview mirrorauto-dim function............................... 104compass............................................. 105

Rear window defroster............................ 104

Recalls....................................................... 26

Recalls, child restraints.............................. 47

Refrigerant............................................... 380

Refueling.......................................... 276, 277fuel filler cap....................................... 279fuel filler door.............................. 278, 279fuel tank volume................................. 380

Registering child restraints........................ 47

Remote controlprivate locking.................................... 156

Remote key...................... 150, 151, 154, 157approach lighting................................ 153immobilizer......................................... 152

key blade.... 150, 151, 154, 155, 156, 157locking the vehicle.............................. 153replacing the battery........................... 158unlocking the vehicle.......................... 153

Reporting safety defects............................ 27

Roadside Assistance................................. 24

Road sign information (RSI)..................... 179

Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 44

Roll Stability Control (RSC)........................ 44

Roof loads............................................... 142

S

Safety, occupant........................................ 26

Safety defects, reporting........................... 27

Safety mode.............................................. 44

Seat beltreminder................................................ 30

Seat beltsAutomatic locking retractor/Emer-gency locking retractor......................... 47buckling................................................ 29maintenance......................................... 29pretensioners........................................ 28reminder................................................ 30reminder warning light.......................... 74

securing child restraint systems.... 49,51, 54unbuckling............................................ 29use during pregnancy........................... 30using..................................................... 28

Seats, front.......................................... 80, 81

Sensus..................................................... 112

Serviceconnected service booking................ 326

Shiftlock..................................................... 14override............................................... 256

Side door mirrors............................. 102, 103

Side impact airbags................................... 39

Sign information (RSI).............................. 179

Snow chains............................................ 305

Snow tires........................................ 305, 306

Spare tire................................................. 295

Spin control..................................... 174, 175

SRS............................................................ 31

Stability system....................... 174, 175, 177Corner Traction Control (CTC)............ 175Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 175indicator light........................................ 73

Start/Stop (engine function)..... 257, 258,259, 260, 261

12 Index

12

392

Starting the engine.................................. 247remote start........................................ 249with keyless drive............................... 247

Starting the vehicleafter a crash (crash mode).............. 44, 45

Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...................... 152

Steel grid in cargo area............................ 147

Steering wheeladjusting............................................... 87heated................................................... 88horn....................................................... 88keypad.................................................. 88

Steering wheel paddles............................. 88

Stone chips, touching up......................... 365

Storage spaces........................................ 138

Studded tires................................... 305, 306

Sunrooflaminated panoramic roof........... 106, 107

Sun shade................................................ 100

Supplemental restraint system.................. 31warning light......................................... 74

Symbols, overview................................... 382

T

Tailgatelocking/unlocking................................ 166opening manually............................... 166power operated.................. 167, 168, 169wiper/washer...................................... 100

Tailgate wipers......................................... 345

Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 340

Temperature sensorambient................................................. 77

Temporary spare tire............................... 295

Three-way catalytic converter................. 280

Tire designations..................................... 299

Tire inflation pressure.............................. 301

Tire Monitor............................. 311, 312, 313

Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 307, 310indicator light........................................ 73

Tires......................................................... 289age...................................................... 290changing from summer to winter........ 292glossary of terms................................ 303improving economy............................ 291inflation pressure........................ 297, 298inflation pressure table....................... 301rotation............................................... 289Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 314snow........................................... 305, 306

spare................................................... 295specifications...................................... 299speed ratings...................................... 299storing................................................. 290studded....................................... 305, 306tire pressure monitoring system......... 307tire sealing system.............................. 314tread wear indicator............................ 291uniform tire quality grading................. 304

Tire sealing system.................................. 314

Top tether anchors (child restraint sys-tems).......................................................... 56

Touching up paint.................................... 365

Towing a trailer........................ 282, 283, 284trailer hitch.......................................... 283

Towing the vehicle........................... 285, 286

Traction control................................ 174, 175

Trailer towing........................... 282, 283, 284trailer hitch.......................................... 283

Transmissiongeneral description..................... 252, 254Hill Start Assist................................... 252oil........................................................ 379shiftlock override................................ 256

Tread wear indicator................................ 291

Trip computer.......................................... 115

Trip odometers.......................................... 78

12 Index

12

393

Trips, long distance................................. 274

Tunnel detection........................................ 92

Turn signals............................................... 95changing bulbs................................... 339indicator lights...................................... 73

Two-stage booster cushion........... 57, 59, 60

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 304

Unlocking the tailgate.............................. 166

Unlocking the vehicle...... 153, 163, 164, 165

V

Vanity mirror............................................ 141changing bulbs................................... 342

Vehicle dimensions.................................. 372

Vehicle Event Data..................................... 18

Vehicle information.................................... 20

Vehicle loading........................ 142, 143, 302roof loads............................................ 142

Vehicle maintenance................................ 323performed by the owner..................... 324

Vehicle weights........................................ 374

Volvo and the environment........................ 22

Volvo ID..................................................... 21

Volvo maintenance.................................. 323

Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance.......... 24

Volvo programs......................................... 24

Volvo Sensus........................................... 112

W

Warning flashers, hazard........................... 94

Warning lights................................ 68, 70, 74

Warning symbol......................................... 75

Warning system, collision........ 209, 211, 217

Warranties................................................ 323

Washer fluid............................................. 345

Washersheadlight............................................... 99windshield............................................. 98

Water, driving through............................. 273

Waxing..................................................... 362

Weights.................................................... 374

Wheels..................................................... 289changing..................................... 292, 293storing................................................. 290

Whiplash Protection System..................... 42

Windowspower.................................................. 100sun shade........................................... 100

Windshieldheated......................................... 104, 132rain sensor............................................ 98washers................................................ 99wipers/washers..................................... 98

Windshield washer fluid........................... 345

Windshield wipers.................................... 343service position................................... 343

Wiper bladesreplacing............................................. 343replacing tailgate wiper...................... 345

12 Index

12

394

TP 18910 (USA & Canada), AT 1517, MY16, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2015, Copyright © 2000-2015 Volvo Car Corporation